Control panel 21509 Instructions manual

Control panel 21509 Instructions manual
Instructions manual
Control panel 21509
Section Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Section Intrusion detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Section Speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Section Light Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
Section Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Section Tactil Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Section Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Section Plug&Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
1
2
Section
Automation
3
4
Table of Contents
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. Basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. Installation topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1 Installation of bus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2 Description of terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3 Putting the system into service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4. Main configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Navigating the control unit menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main screens of the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
23
24
29
5.Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.1 Creating a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2 Activating a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.3 Renaming a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.4 Deleting a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.5 Cancelling a button associated with the scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.6 Remote access to scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6. Programming events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.1Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.3 Example applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7. Integration of the passive infrared presence detectors and the contacts interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 73
8. Diagnostics and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.1 Diagnostics and replacement of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
8.2 Remote communications management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8.3 Control unit software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9. Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10. Compliance with regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
11. Supplementary declarations made by the manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5
General information
The By-me automated system via the control unit 21509 provides integrated control of comfort, security, energy
saving, HVAC and remote control in the residential and commercial sectors.
This manual is arranged in a sequence of sections that provide a complete understanding of the By-me system
and allow the user to take full advantage of the available features:
• Chapter 1 “Main functions”: describes what can be controlled with the By-me system (see page 7);
• Chapter 2 “Basic concepts”: explains some basic concepts necessary for gaining an understanding the Byme system (see page 8);
• Chapter 3 “Installation topology”: describes the structure of the By-me system and gives the general rules
and information necessary for setting the system structure and the information necessary for putting into operation (see page 14);
• Chapter 4 “Main configurations”: describes the configuration procedures and main settings of the By-me
system (see page 21);
• Chapter 5 “Scenarios”: describes the procedures for creating scenarios where a number of functions are actuated at the same time (see page 58);
• Chapter 6 “Programming events”: describes the procedures for advanced management of the By-me system,
in order to be able to initiate functions that perform special operations when certain events occur (see page 62);
• Chapter 7 “Integration of the passive infrared presence detector”: describes the procedures for managing
detectors both as intrusion alarm sensors and motion sensors with lights coming on (see page 73).
• Chapter 8 “Diagnostics and maintenance”: describes the procedures for monitoring the operation of devices
and managing their replacement where necessary (see page 74).
6
Main functions:
1. Main functions.
The By-me system makes it possible to manage the installation using the following controls:
• Ambient temperature management, dividing the installation into up to 40 areas controlled by 40 separate programs;
• Lighting management, with on/off control and light adjustment;
• Control for roller shutters and blinds;
• Function centralization and automation (up to 32 scenarios and 16 programs);
• Control of the intrusion detection alarm system;
• Remote control and monitoring of functions;
• Power consumption and load control.
• Speaker system management.
COMFORT
SECURITY
Scenarios
Light automation
Shutter automation
Temperature control
Programmed actions
Load control
Speaker system
Wired burglar alarm system
Radio burglar alarm system
Remote assistance
Technical alarms
Panic alarm
Access control
emergency lighting
SAVINGS
REMOTE CONTROL
Power management
Load programming
Temperature control
Temperature status
Aircon programming
Alarm signals
Device actuation
Scenario activation
Intrusion detection alarm system
ON/OFF
Diagnostics
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
Control unit 21509
7
Basic concepts
2. Basic concepts.
This chapter explains some fundamentally important concepts that are necessary for correctly making full use of
the system.
Note.
Some examples refer to the device codes; for further information please refer to the product's instructions sheet.
• Functional unit: part of a device that can be considered as if it were a separate device. Some examples:
1. Appliance with one functional unit: the functional unit is equivalent to the device itself, for example actuator
with change-over relay output 16 A 250 V~ (Eikon 20535; Arké 19535, Idea 16975; Plana 14535 series).
2. Appliance with two functional units: in the interface for conventional controls (Eikon 20515; Arké 19515, Idea
16955; Plana 14515) each of the two inputs is a functional unit.
3. Appliance with three functional units: in the control equipment with two rocker switches and actuator (Eikon
20526; Arké 19526; Idea 16966; Plana 14526) there are three functional units: left rocker switch, right rocker
switch and actuator that, from the point of view of the configuration and operation, are to all intents and purposes 3 different devices.
4. Appliance with four functional units: in the control equipment with three rocker switches and actuator (Eikon
20547; Arké 19547, Idea 16987; Plana 14547) there are four functional units: left rocker switch, central
rocker switch, right rocker switch and actuator that, from the point of view of the configuration and operation,
are to all intents and purposes 4 different devices. Another example is the device with 4 changeover relays
(art.01851.2 for installation on DIN (60715 TH35) rails) where each output is a functional unit.
Note.
Difference between a rocker switch and a simple
switch: a rocker switch can be pushed up or down, a
simple push-button can only be pushed down.
During the design phase, each functional unit of
any device must be considered as though it were a
separate device. It is therefore necessary, during the
design phase, to plan the functions to be performed
and only then make a list of the devices needed to
perform these functions.
The diagram opposite shows the functional units of a
control device with three simple push-buttons and an
actuator (Eikon 20545; Arké 19545, Idea 16985; Plana
14545).
Relay actuator
Left
button
Middle
button
Right
button
For example, during installation, the actuator could be used to control load A through the push-button of another
device, the left push-button to control load B through an actuator, the middle button to control load C through a
second actuator and the right button to control load D through a third actuator.
8
Basic concepts
There are no limits on the use of the functional units of a physical device. When a load is to be controlled, it is
necessary to provide one control device and one actuator connected to the load.
Control appliance with three simple buttons and actuator
(Eikon 20545; Arké 19545; Idea 16985; Plana 14545).
Actuator
Front view
Rear
Load D
Actuator
Load C
Actuator
Load D
Button
Load A
• Connection: logic link between two functional units, which allows a function to be shared (for example: actuator
relay and push button).
9
Basic concepts
• Configuration: operation that can be used to create the logic connection between various functional units (of
various appliances).
• Functional group (or Group): set of functional units connected logically with each other that provide a function
in the system (for example: three different buttons that control a single actuator and, as a result, the same load).
The devices that make up a functional group are connected to each other logically, not by conventional wiring.
IMPORTANT:
Groups must comprise only functional units that are harmonious with each other: any one group cannot
contain an actuator for roller shutters and an actuator to control the lighting of a lamp.
Control equipment with
two rocker switches.
Actuator with relay output.
Eikon20521
Arké19521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20535
Arké19535
Idea16975
Plana14535
BUS line
• Group depth: number of groups to which one functional unit can belong. Each functional unit can belong to a
maximum of 4 different groups keeping the same function (for example “dimmer control”).
•Scenario: a scenario is an exact positioning of the actuators in one or more functional groups that can be called
up as preferred from a menu on the control unit or with a button configured for this purpose or with the infrared
remote control 01849. For example, the rolling shutters could be lowered and a lamp lit in the room at the same
time. A scenario can also be activated with the programs that can be configured via the Events menu or remotely
with the GSM communicator or Web Server.
10
Basic concepts
To control the switching on of a load from different points, it is sufficient to add more functional units; it is not
necessary to modify the wiring.
Eikon20521
Arké19521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20521
Arké19521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20535
Arké19535
Idea16975
Plana14535
BUS line
• Parameters: these can be set at the control unit, and are used to modify and customize the operation of each
functional unit. For example, the relay actuator (Eikon 20535, Arké 19535, Idea 16757; Plana 14535), during
configuration, behaves as a two-position stable relay. It is, however, possible to configure it as one-position
stable; in this case it is necessary to define the deactivation time too.
M
M
1
Eikon20527
Arké19527
Idea16967
Plana14527
3
2
Eikon20527
Arké19527
Idea16967
Plana14527
Eikon20521
Arké19521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Group
1
= device 1: left button functional unit + device 1 actuator
Group
2
= device 2: left button functional unit + device 2 actuator
Group
3
= device 3: button functional unit + device 1 and 2 actuator functional unit
Actuators are of group depth 2 since they both belong to two groups.
11
Basic concepts
• Line: any set of devices.
• Scenario depth: number of scenarios to which a group can belong. Each functional group can belong to a
maximum of 4 different scenarios.
• Bus line: equipment used to carry the electrical or electromagnetic signals associated with the messages between the system devices.
• Bus system: set of devices and their interconnections creating applications by using a common communications framework.
• Command: functional unit that sends commands and/or statuses over the bus line.
• Actuator: functional unit that receives commands and/or statuses from the bus line in order to carry out a predetermined action.
The system in general is made up of three main families of functional unit:
• Controls (for example, push-buttons, sensors and infrared remote controls)
• Actuators (for example, relays and dimmers)
• Controllers (for example, the control unit)
Each line can be composed of at most 128 devices and needs one or two power supplies depending on
the number of devices and the length of the bus.
Using line couplers, a number of lines can be connected to each other, up to a maximum of 15 areas by 15
lines; the line couplers allow only authorized messages to pass between one line and another.
On each By-me control unit it is possible to configure up to 254 devices (194 automation devices and 60
intrusion detection alarm system devices).
System configuration starts with the creation of functional groups (it is better to think in terms of functional
groups rather than individual devices), which is the only operation strictly necessary for the system to
function. During the installation phase, the first operation is therefore to assume the functions that are to
be made available.
Subsequent operations, such as placing a number of units together in one scenario or setting a number of automated functions, should be treated as a system customization or as the use of advanced functions.
12
Basic concepts
From the moment the groups are created, the control unit has no role in their operation; the devices and related
functional groups are “connected” to each other and do not require any intervention by the control unit (the control
unit is still needed, however, for managing editing functions, HVAC automation and automation programmes).
In the event of a power failure, when the mains power returns, the actuators will keep their status prior to the event.
Following a Reset applied to an actuator, instead, the actuator will go back to opening the contact (applies both to
relay actuators and roller shutter actuators).
Note: If the By-me system is composed of both the automation system and the intrusion detection alarm system,
always use two power supplies 01401.
13
Installation topology
3. Installation topology.
The main characteristic of the By-me system is that all devices are connected to each other by a bus system cable
(pair) that supplies the devices with the power and the signals carrying the digital control and monitoring data.
WARNING:
On a line where a control unit 21509 has already been configured it is not possible to configure a second
control unit (whether 21509, 21550-20550-14550 + 01960 or the 2-module control units Eikon 20510 and
20480, Idea 16950 and 16930, Plana 14510 and 14480).
The system is configured through the control unit and the configuration buttons located on the devices.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM with separation coupler from another automation line.
230 V~
Power supply Line 2
230 V~
Controls
Control unit 21509
IR detector
Line coupler
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
Power supply Line 1
bus
M
Relay actuator
L
N
14
Controls with
roller shade
actuator
Controls with
relay actuator
Controls
Installation topology
In the case of integration between the automation system and the intrusion detection alarm system, see
the intrusion detection alarm system section in this manual that gives the wiring diagram (see page 81); in this case
the control unit must be installed and configured in "Area 00 - Line 00" of the intrusion detection alarm
system. The two automation and intrusion detection alarm system lines must then be separated with a
coupler 01845.
The power consumption of the control unit is:
-45 mA of maximum instantaneous consumption with backlit display;
-25 mA with display without backlighting (Stand By);
3.1 Bus system installation.
3.1.1 General rules and system topology.
• For the connections use the twisted pair and sheathed cable VIMAR 01840 (2x0.5 mm2, rated voltage to
earth 400 V, suited for installation with Category I power cables). The wire pair distributes both the power
supply voltage (29 V d.c.) and the device control signals, and can be placed inside the same corrugated pipe
that carries the electrical mains cables.
• A bus line must be supplied by 1 or 2 power supplies 01401.
Each line can be controlled by a single control unit and can be composed of at most 128 devices and at
most two power supplies, depending on the number of devices and the length of the connecting cable (pair).
• One control unit can manage up to at most 60 intrusion detection alarm systems.
• If a system is being installed with only one power supply and the number of devices is close to the maximum
number allowed, it is advisable to plan for a second power supply to allow for future extensions of the system.
• The devices do not have to be connected in any particular order, maintaining the polarities indicated on the
terminals. Linear type connections (figure 3.1.1.1), star type connections (figure 3.1.1.2) or mixed connections (figure 3.1.1.3) are possible (the rectangle in the figures represents the power supply). The ideal configuration is the linear type with only one power supply in the middle of the system, or two power supplies
at the ends of the bus cable.
• The total current used by the various devices must not exceed the nominal current of the power supply (or
supplies) installed.
• The voltage at all points on the bus, with all devices at rest, must never go below 23 V d.c. Check particularly
the points furthest away from the power supply and the sections of cable where the load is highest.
• The voltage at all points on the bus, when the most numerous group of shutter actuators is in operation,
must never go below 22 V d.c. (check the points furthest away from the power supply). The delayed actuation function can be useful for reducing the number of shutter actuators in operation at the same time.
• The By-me control unit can manage up to 20 different users (including the administrator), each one with their
own privileges and password.
• The By-me control unit can manage up to at most 480 groups (automation, intrusion detection alarm system, loads, etc.).
15
Installation topology
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.3
3.1.1.2
• The By-me control unit is able to configure up to at most 254 devices divided over a number of lines (including the couplers 01845); each device can have from 1 to 4 functional units. If the system does not have an
intrusion detection alarm system, the maximum number of Automation devices that can be configured on a
control unit is equal to 194 (including the routers) distributed over a number of lines; lastly, bear in mind that
one line can be installed with up to at most 2 power supplies 01401 (which can sustain up to a maximum
consumption of 1.6 A on the bus line).
• It is essential to protect the system from the effects of lighting using surge protection devices (SPD).
As a general rule, the power supply side must be protected using a Class 1 SPD downstream of the power
meter, a Class 2 SPD after the magneto-thermal protection device, and a Class 3 SPD at the power supply
input. If a telephone communicator is present, it is advisable also to install an SPD on the telephone line.
3.1.2 System setup.
During the design phase, it is essential to arrange for a consumer unit with sufficient capacity to hold:
• conventional devices, magneto-thermal protections, circuit-breakers, etc;
• 1 or 2 power supplies with capacity for 9 modules on DIN (60715 TH35) rails;
• DIN (60715 TH35) rail devices such as the load control module, GSM communicator, interfaces, web server.
• surge protection devices to protect the installation.
As regards the corrugated pipes for laying the Vimar cable 01840 of the BUS line, it is advisable to plan
for a dedicated raceway; it is however possible to use those where the cables of the electric mains pass.
3.1.3 Bus length: general rules.
• Maximum distance between power supply and device: 350 m.
• Maximum distance between devices: 700 m.
• Maximum length of the bus cable: 1000 m.
• Minimum distance between 2 power supplies: 40 m. It is important for the load to be well distributed between the two power supplies.
16
Installation topology
• Essential requirements:
• the distance between two power supplies must never be less than 40 m;
• the load must be well distributed between the two power supplies;
• the two power supplies should be placed at the ends of the one of the circuits of the system that has
the largest number of devices or branches.
In any case the optimal configuration has the power supplies set as far apart as possible; this has a positive
effect also on the minimum voltage on the bus.
3.1.4 Length of the BUS line.
The following is a list of the maximum lengths of the BUS line installed in systems with the linear configuration
(the rectangle in the figure represents the power supply).
POWER SUPPLY
350 m
POWER SUPPLY
350 m
350 m
DEVICE
DEVICE
700 m
POWER SUPPLY
250 m
POWER SUPPLY
500 m
250 m
17
Installation topology
3.1.5 Bus installation: summary table.
• Installation and system topology:
• Cable of the BUS line laid in dedicated raceways; it can also be laid in the corrugated pipes that contain
the electric line.
• Configurations allowed:
• Linear configuration
• Star configuration
• Mixed configuration
• We recommend using junction boxes
• For the connections use the twisted pair and sheathed cable VIMAR 01840 (2x0.5 mm2, rated
voltage to earth 400 V, suited for installation with Category I power cables)
• Devices and distances per line
• Logic capacity (number of addresses): 128
• Maximum distance between power supply and last device: 350 m
• Maximum total length of the bus line: 1,000 m
• Maximum distance between two devices: 700 m
•Minimum distance between two power supplies: 40 m (loads must be balanced between the two
power supplies)
• Optimal position for each single power supply: in the centre of the BUS line
• Optimal position for two power supplies: at the ends of the BUS line
• Minimum voltage on the furthest device: 23 V d.c. (at rest)
3.2 Terminals of the control unit.
The back of the control unit 21509 has (fig. 3.3.1):
- TP bus terminals;
- temperature sensor terminals;
- PIN-STRIP 8-pin connector for the cable that enables connecting the programming interface 01998.
• Terminals BUS + and BUS - must be connected to the BUS + - output of the power supply 01401.
• If there is also the intrusion detection alarm system the BUS + and BUS - terminals must be connected to the
BUS + - output of the back-up unit 01804.
• Maximum length of the connecting cable of the external probe:: 60 m.
Use a twisted cable with a minimum cross-section of 0.5 mm2 (art. 01840).
18
Installation topology
PIN-STRIP 8-pin
connector for 01998
Temperature sensor terminals
TP BUS
terminals
3.3.1
3.3 Putting the system into service.
To install the devices correctly, carry out the following operations:
1. Lay out the bus cable and connecting terminals, maintaining the correct polarities (figure 3.4.1).
Connection terminal
Vimar 01840 twisted pair
3.4.1
2. Lay out the cable for the electrical connections of the actuators.
3. Wire the control unit, components and power supply.
4. Power up the system.
19
Main configurations
4. Main configurations.
This section describes the configuration procedures and main settings of the system.
All these procedures can be carried out directly from the control unit menu, except the creation of units, which also
requires an operation to be carried out on the individual devices.
The more advanced system functions are discussed in later sections of this manual.
4.1 Navigating through the control unit menus.
To navigate through the control unit menus simply touch the words or the icons displayed till you reach the
desired screen. The control unit moreover also displays step by step indications of the operations to perform to
reach the relevant menu or function.
Depending on the type of option to select, the touch can be made in four different ways:
MODE
MEANING
Tap
Brief and single touch
Press
Prolonged pressure
Flick
Quick tap, movement in which the point of release
is not significant; it is equivalent to the action of
pushing a virtual object with a finger to move it
quickly in a specific direction.
Drag
Dragging, movement in which, on the contrary to
the flick, the finger is released only after establishing the final position for a certain fraction of time;
it is equivalent to the action of dragging a virtual
object with a finger.
If you want to make a single movement it is advised to release the finger only after seeing the
movement.
If instead you want to make repeated movements
you need to maintain the pressure on the display.
ASSOCIATED SYMBOL
 or
The symbols shown in the table above are the ones used in this manual to indicate the method of selecting the
various menus of the control unit.
In general:
• To select an option in a list, it is necessary to highlight the desired item with a flick or vertical drag and then tap
in the central zone (it is not necessary for it to be above the element under focus, the important thing is that it is
not over a button or an icon).
20
Main configurations
• It is possible to quickly scroll through the elements of a list with a flick. The initial scrolling speed is slow enough so
as to allow reading the words; if you want to increase the speed it is necessary to subsequently flick while scrolling.
Further flicks keep the scrolling active recommencing at top speed.
• During navigation, arrows pointing left or right identify the possibility of making a flick or horizontal drag.
• The sensitive area for flicking and dragging is equivalent to all the display of the control unit and acts on the element that has the active focus on the page.
• Being a touch screen display, it is advised to use a fingertip with a light pressure that however is more than just
skimming over it; performance increases if you press with a fingertip.
• It is permissible to use a specific stylus for a touchscreen; whereas it is recommended not to use any sharp
object such as a pen, screwdriver, electric cable, etc., to avoid damaging the display.
Each action carried out on the display is associated with a different acoustic signal that is only played if the action
is permissible.
4.2 Initial switch-on.
• When switched on for the first time, or after a reset, the control unit asks for the current language to be selected,
then the area no. (00-15) and line no. (00-15); this information is essential for identification and group offset,
which is a necessary parameter only when configuring a number of control units in the same system. The order
of creating the systems must start according to the use of the control unit: if performing the function of a SAI
bus control unit, set the area to 0 and line 0; for the comfort control unit the Area number varies from 1 and
the line numbers between the possible values (from 1 to 15), then passing onto area 2,3…
For the "Group Offset parameter" confirm the suggested value. unless it is necessary to configure a system with a number of control units; In this case in on the 1st control unit "Group Offset" 0xB00 will be
set, while for the others the following Offset values will be set:
- 2nd control unit: 0x2000
- 3rd control unit: 0x4000
- 4th control unit: 0x6000
- 5th control unit: 0x8000
- 6th control unit: 0xA000
- 7th control unit: 0xC000
- 8th control unit: 0xE000
• The control unit will then ask for the date and time to be entered.
• In addition the first time it requires setting the security code (PIN) for the administrator (5-8 characters) and afterwards a second time for confirmation. The numbers are entered with the numerical keys (from 0 to 9) shown on
the display.
• You now enter the main menu.
• Create the groups [see paragraph 4.4.1 “Creating a new group”, page 29].
• The system is now ready to use.
If the preconfigured behaviour of the devices is not considered suitable, or to access the advanced functions of the
system, the system can be customized by carrying out one or more of the following operations:
21
Main configurations
• modify device behaviour[see paragraph 4.5.4 “Modifying the device parameters - page 34];
• create scenarios [see Section 5 “Scenarios” - page 58];
• events [see chapter 6 “Programming events” - page 62].
• SAI control unit (only with the intrusion detection alarm system) [see intrusion detection alarm system section]
IMPORTANT:
Before proceeding with system configuration (and therefore of the various functional groups) ALWAYS reset each single device (see chap.
4.5.8 on page 35).
22
Main configurations
4.3 Control unit main screen.
The control unit's main screen displays the list relating to the main menus:
• HVAC;
• Temperature probe;
• Scenarios;
• Event programmer;
• Load control;
• Audio;
• Intrusion detection alarm system.
Main Menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events
Audio
Logout
Setup
The main menu is selected by touching the name of the one you want; the selection is highlighted by the black
band and by the name that becomes white in colour.
The Loads Control, Intrusion Detection Alarm System and Audio menus are displayed in the second part of the
screen which is accessed by simply touching the white cursor on the right and moving it downwards
.
Main Menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Audio
Logout
Setup
Main Menu
Events
Alarm System
Audio
Power Management
Logout
Setup
If, after a time-out of approximately 90 s, no operation is carried out, the control unit display switches off, activating
a stand-by screen that displays the time, day and date.
If personal security codes have been set (installer PIN, different users, etc.), access to the menus is only possible
after entering the code permitting use, by the user, only of the menus for which the user has been enabled (see
paragraph 4.5.4).
23
Main configurations
4.4 Settings menu.
Used to adjust the control unit clock, language used, settings for the display and keypad tones, different profiles
for accessing the control unit menus, the favourite applications to display on the start screen, to set the time-out to
activate the screen saver and to manage the temperature probe.
4.4.1 Setting the clock.
Used to set the date and time.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Date and Time  Select Master or Slave
- Select Master  Solar or Daylight Saving or Automatic EU to manually set the date and time by
to display and select the values; then confirm with Save.
- If you select Slave the date and time cannot be entered with the control panel (the display will show the popup) but will be set automatically by the web server (where applicable).
In both cases, the control panel will confirm the operation has been completed.
4.4.2 Language settings.
Used to set the national language in which the menus are displayed. The available languages are Italian, English, German, Spanish, French and Greek.
Note: If the user does not have the necessary privileges you will be asked to change user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Language
The active language is signalled by the symbol ; perform
guages and touch
to scroll through the list of available lan-
the one you want. Confirm with Save; the control unit will display the confirmation of
the operation.
4.4.3 Display and Tones.
Used to set the parameters of contrast and backlighting of the display, the tones of the icons for using and
programming the control unit and performing the touch screen calibration function.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Display and Tones
It is then possible, by touching
- Contrast of the Display  Use
- Backlighting  Use
the desired one, to set the following parameters:
to select the desired value  Save
to select the desired value  Save
- Keyboard tones  Use
to select the desired value  Save
- Touch calibration (a pop-up will be displayed to illustrate the procedure to follow)  Next
WARNING: It is not possible to stop the touch calibration function. Once started it must be completed.
To exit the menu touch
24
Exit.
Main configurations
4.4.4 User Management.
The control unit enables setting different profiles to access the menus and in this way to configure the privileges (that is to say the methods of use according to the user); a total of 17 users can be set (one of which
is the administrator).
At the time of first switching on, there are three types of user available on the control unit:
- Administrator, who has the right to perform every kind of operation and must always enter his or her password;
- Events Prog. User, whose partitions are called up when the intrusion detection alarm system is turned on/
off using an automated program created with the Events menu.
- Guest, who has limited privileges that can however be changed at any time (guests do not enter passwords);
It is therefore possible to customize access to system functions by creating different user profiles.
Warning: If there is also the intrusion detection alarm system and more than one user has been set, each one
with a different partition for turning on the system, the Guest management privileges over the intrusion detection alarm system must be disabled.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management
N.B. Only the Administrator user can intervene on all the user settings, including the Guest user and the Events
Prog. user, or add a new user.
4.4.4.1 Creating a new User
This menu enables creating new users assigning each one with the profile to access the control unit menus.
The operation of creation can be carried out only by the Administrator user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management  Select the Administrator user  Add
- Scroll with the
through the list of characters displayed and again with the
left form the name of the new user.
- Lastly confirm by touching
to the right and
Save.
The control unit will now ask for the user PIN.
- Enter the new PIN  OK.
- Confirm the entered PIN by touching
OK. The control unit confirms the operation has been completed.
4.4.4.2 Administrator
The only activity that the Administrator user can perform is to change the PIN. This operation can be carried
out only by the Administrator user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management  Select the Administrator user
istrator
 Admin-
The only activity that the Administrator user can perform is to change the PIN.
Touch
Change PIN
- Enter the new PIN  OK.
- Confirm the entered PIN by touching
OK. The control unit confirms the operation has been completed.
25
Main configurations
4.4.4.3 Events Prog. User
The only activity that the Events Prog. User can perform is to change the PIN. This operation can be carried
out only by the Administrator user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management  Select the Administrator user
Prog. User
 Events
The only activity that the Events Prog. User user can perform is to change the PIN.
Touch
Change PIN
- Enter the new PIN  OK.
- Confirm the entered PIN by touching
OK. The control unit confirms the operation has been completed.
4.4.4.4 Guest
The only activity that can be performed on the Guest user is to change the user privileges. This operation can
be carried out only by the Administrator user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management  Select the Administrator user  Guest
The only activity that the Administrator can perform on the Guest user is to change the User privileges.
Touch
User privileges
- Scroll with
upwards or downwards through the list of values and touch
the one you want.
4.4.4.5 Generic user
The activities that can be performed on a generic user are:
• Change user name: this operation can be carried out only by the Administrator user.
• Change PIN: this operation can be carried out by the Administrator' user and by the selfsame user.
• Change user privileges: this operation can be carried out only by the Administrator user.
• Remove user: this operation can be carried out only by the Administrator user.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  User Management  Select the type of user (Administrator or
user)  Guest
• Selecting User Name assigns a name to the user.
- Scroll, with
through the list of characters and form the name by touching
desired letters; with a
delete the selected one.
- Lastly confirm by touching
to the right you pass on to the next one while with a
, one by one, the
to the left you
Save.
• Selecting Change PIN assigns or can change the password of the generic user.
• Selecting User Privileges assigns the profile for accessing the control unit menus such as Central Adminis-
tration, Scenario Configuration, Thermostat Configuration, etc.
26
Main configurations
- Touch all the options that you want to assign to the user; the selected ones will be marked by the symbol .
- Lastly,
touch Options  Save
The control unit will display the confirmation of the operation.
• Selecting User Name  Remove User the current user will be deleted and the display will show the deletion has been made.
4.4.5 Favourite Application.
Used to set the start-up screen you want to be displayed.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Favourite Application
Scroll with
upwards or downwards through the menu items and select the desired application; con-
firm lastly by touching
Save.
The control unit confirms the operation has been completed.
4.4.6 Screen saver.
Used to set the time of inactivity at the end of which the control unit activates the screen saver and cuts off
the display backlighting.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Screensaver
-Touching
Off disables the screen saver.
-Touching
screen saver.
Delay enables setting the inactivity time at the end of which the control unit activates the
With
upwards or downwards select the desired value then touch
Set; the control unit confirms
the operation carried out.
The activation time of the screen saver set by default is equal to 1 and a half minutes.
NB: If the screen saver is disabled, after 1 and a half minutes only the display backlighting is cut off.
4.4.7 Temperature Probe
Used to enable operation of the external probe that may be connected to the control unit to view the temperature measurement.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Temperature Probe
The available options are Status and Calibration.
• Status.
Select Enable to enable using the temperature probe or Disable to disable it.
Confirm by touching
Save.
27
Main configurations
• Calibration.
Selecting this option starts the measuring system calibration procedure; this procedure can be carried out
only with the sensor not connected.
As prescribed in the information pop-up shown on the display, make sure the probe is not connected and
touch
Next to start the auto-calibration mechanism.
The result of the calibration process is shown on the display with one of the following messages:
- Calibration performed successfully.
- Calibration failed. Repeat the operation.
Calibration completed successfully, it is possible to reconnect the probe to be able to view the value of the
temperature measurement.
4.4.7.1 Use
Once the probe has been correctly configured and connected, it is possible to view the measured temperature.
Main Menu  Temperature Probe
If the external sensor is enabled, the display will show a screen that shows and periodically updates the current temperature measured by the sensor. The temperature value is given in the unit of measurement configured on the device (see the following paragraph 4.4.8).
Temperature
Menu
Failure to enable the sensor is signalled by the message No temperature probe enabled.
Touching
Menu takes you back to view the main menu of the control unit.
N.B.: If unexpected values are shown, it is necessary to check the connection of the probe to the control unit
and if necessary carry out the calibration process again.
4.4.8 Temperature Unit
Used to select the temperature unit from degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.
Main Menu  Setup  Settings  Temperature Unit
Scroll upwards or downwards with
and select the desired unit of measurement; lastly touch
Save.
The control unit confirms the operation has been completed.
28
Main configurations
4.5 Configuration menu.
N.B.
On concluding system configuration it is possible to download the entire database of the control unit (system characteristics, etc.) onto a PC via the programming interface 01998.
4.5.1 Creating a new functional group.
As already described in chapter 2 [Basic concepts, page 8], the functional groups (set of functional units that
operate together) are basic elements of the system, so the first operation is to create them.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
1. Enter the Configuration menu and set the type of group (Automations, Load Control, etc.), the index and
the name;
2. Again from the Configuration menu, configure the desired functional unit;
3. At the end of point 2. exit the Configuration menu of the created group.
4.5.1.1 Creating a new group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups
• Automation groups: generic group of the comfort system; this is the item to select in almost every
case (lights, roller shutters….)
• Load control groups: group dedicated to load control
• HVAC group: group dedicated to HVAC management
• Audio groups: group dedicated to speaker system management
• Intrusion detection alarm system groups: group dedicated to intrusion detection alarm system configuration
Automations group  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group (00-480) that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured
ones; touch Next to confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group
and the zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by touching Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address and number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove
Group menu).
29
Main configurations
4.5.1.2 Functional unit selection and configuration.
WARNING:
For each device, how to select a functional unit is explained in the special instructions sheets that
accompany the product.
To configure the various functional units within a group, carry out the following:
1. Touch Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups (or Load Control, etc.).
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list and Touch Add; the procedure is started on the control unit;
4. Press the configuration button and, where necessary, the control button of the device to be included
in the group;
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when
configuration is complete;
6. The control unit indicates the functional unit that has just been configured;
7. Proceed with the configuration of other functional units by repeating points 3, 4, 5 and 6 or press
Back to exit.
Example 1.
Functional units that can be selected by the control with 2 rocker switches with relay (Eikon 20526, Arké
19526, Idea 16966, Plana 14526).
Functional unit selection.
• To select the relay functional unit, press the configuration button (figure A);
• To select the left button functional unit, press the configuration button then the left button (figure B);
• To select the right button functional unit, press the configuration button then the right button (figure C).
A
Configuration
button
B
Configuration
button
Left button
30
C
Configuration
button
Right button
Main configurations
Example 2.
Functional units that can be selected by the control with 3 rocker switches with relay (Eikon 20546, Arké
19546, Idea 16986, Plana 14546).
Functional unit selection.
• To select the relay functional unit, press the configuration button (figure A);
• To select the left button functional unit, press the configuration button then the left button (figure B);
• To select the middle button functional unit, press the configuration button then the middle button (figure C).
• To select the right button functional unit, press the configuration button then the right button (figure D).
A
B
Configuration
button
Configuration
button
Left button
C
Configuration
button
Middle button
D
Configuration
button
Right button
31
Main configurations
4.5.1.3 Rules for creating groups.
1. Groups must comprise only functional units that are harmonious with each other: any one group cannot
contain an actuator for roller shutters and an actuator to control the lighting of a lamp.
2. In the phase of creating a group, first enlist the actuators and then the control devices (push buttons); in
this way the control unit is able to recognize the type of group being created and to set the correct parameters
on the buttons.
4.5.1.4 Note on built-in controls.
• The built-in controls must be installed with the bus
terminal turned upwards (general rule for all built-in
devices - figure 4.4.1.4.1).
• For the Idea and Plana series the “simple button”
type of controls are distinguished by the grey of
the button contact surface (figure 4.4.1.4.2); the
"rocker switch" controls by green (figure 4.4.1.4.3).
• The buttons for devices such as "rocker switches"
are distinguished by there being symbols or a plate
both at the top and at the bottom (figure 4.4.1.4.4);
apart from the blank button, the buttons for simple
switches have symbols or a plate only at the bottom (figure 4.4.1.4.5).
4.4.1.4.1
•The buttons for simple switches have a direction
of installation; when mounting the button, align the
two slots inside the button with the slots on the
lower side of the contact surface of the control (figure 4.4.1.4.2).
• The built-in control devices must be installed without buttons (these have to be attached only when
the configuration of the system is complete). This
is necessary in order to allow access to the configuration button (for the position of the configuration button, please refer to the instruction sheet for
the device).
4.4.1.4.2
4.4.1.4.3
4.4.1.4.4
4.4.1.4.5
•Removing the button: using a small screwdriver,
apply slight pressure and lever up the top part of
the button (this has a small tab) from the body of
the device (figure 4.4.1.4.6), then take out the button.
32
Main configurations
• Mounting the button: position the button in the button-holder and press lightly (figure 4.4.1.4.7).
4.4.1.4.6
4.4.1.4.7
IMPORTANT: Obviously, all the considerations made in par. 4.4.1.4 apply both for the
appliances with 2 buttons and for the 3-button devices.
4.5.2 Add devices to a functional group.
Used to add additional devices to an existing functional group.
Setup  Configuration
list  Add
 Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the
Configure the functional units as described in paragraph 4.4.1 [Creating a new functional group, page 29].
N.B.
If a user is to be controlled using infrared remote control 01849, it is necessary to configure the infrared
receiver (Eikon 20516, Arké 19516, Idea 16956, Plana 14516) inside the group that contains the relay
actuator (or regulator) connected to the load to be controlled (or regulated).
For example, by creating a group made up of a relay actuator (Eikon 20535, Arké 19535, Idea 16795, Plana
14535, for DIN (60715 TH35) rail 01850.2) and infrared receiver (Eikon 20516, Arké 19516, Idea 16956, Plana
14516) connected to a lamp, the lamp can be controlled using infrared remote control 01849.
The procedure for configuring the infrared receiver is described in the instruction sheet that accompanies the
product.
33
Main configurations
4.5.3 Remove a functional unit from a functional group.
Used to remove functional units from a functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the list
 Associated devices  Select the functional unit to remove  Remove device
Proceed to remove the device  Yes
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
4.5.4 Modifying device parameters.
Device parameters can be modified in order to personalize operation to adapt the system to the various installation requirements.
Setup
 Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the
list  Associated devices  Select the functional unit scrolling through the list  Device parameters
The modifiable parameters for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit and vary by type
depending on the device considered (see the instructions sheets provided with each article).
4.5.5 Changing the name of a group.
Used to rename an existing group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the list
 Edit group name
Choose the name of the group and the location from the names given in a pre-set list; lastly, save the name
by touching Save.
It is now possible with the same procedure to rename another group.
4.5.6 Removing a group.
Used to remove an existing functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the list
 Remove group
Delete all information associated with the selected Group  Yes
The control unit confirms removal and goes back to displaying the list of groups.
34
Main configurations
4.5.7 Device identification.
It is possible to display information on a device that has already been configured such as its physical address
and the group to which it belongs.
Setup  Configuration  Device identification
On pressing the configuration button of a device, the control unit displays the physical address and the type
of device (Dimmer, RF interface, etc.).
Then press the configuration button for the device you want to identify; at the end of this process, touch End
and the control unit will show the list of all the device's functional units.
On selecting the functional unit from the list and touching it
- Information:
to view the information on the device itself;
- Own Scenarios:
- Own Groups:
the following will be displayed:
to view its own scenarios (number and name);
to view its own groups (number and name).
4.5.8 Device reset.
Used to delete the configuration and settings saved by one or more devices.
Setup  Configuration  Reset management  Device reset
Press and hold down the configuration button for the device you want to reset; the red LED will come on (in
some cases after a few seconds).
When the LED goes out, release the device button, then touch End on the control unit.
As regards the thermostats (Eikon 20513-20514, Arké 19513-19514, Idea 16953-16954, Plana 1451314514) the procedure is similar; the button to press is the first one on the left (on the device instructions sheet
it is called A) and you need to wait for the display to stop showing the CNF icon.
N.B.
When resetting control devices with two simple push-buttons and actuator (Eikon 20525, Arké 19525,
Idea 16965, Plana 14525) and control devices with two toggle switches and actuator (Eikon 20526,
Arké 19526, Idea 16966, Plana 14526), the relay actuator in the device is always associated with the
left button on the device concerned.
IMPORTANT:
The reset procedure for the intrusion detection alarm system devices, except for the IR detectors, is
given on page 145 of this manual.
4.5.9 Control unit reset.
Used to restore the factory conditions on the control unit; all the saved data are therefore deleted.
Setup  Configuration  Reset management  Control unit reset
The control unit requests confirmation of the operation, go ahead with
Yes.
35
Main configurations
4.5.10 Device parameters.
• Functional unit – Left push button
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal
• Functional unit - Middle button (only for single buttons with 3 modules)
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal
• Functional unit – Right push button
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal
• Functional unit – Left rocker switch
Operation ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - on/off, LED control - normal
• Functional unit - Middle rocker switch (only for rocker switches with 3 modules)
Operation ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - on/off, LED control - normal
• Functional unit – Right rocker switch
Operation ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED management: off, normal, reverse, always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal
• Functional unit - Relay
Operation: one- or two-position stable
On time-delay: from 0 to 200 s; then at intervals of one minute from 1 to 50 min.
Off time-delay: from 0 to 200 s; then at intervals of one minute from 1 to 50 min.
Default parameters: Op. - Two-Position Stable, On Delay - 0, Off Delay - 0.
• Functional unit - dimmer
Adjustment speed: low, medium or high.
Default parameters: Speed setting - medium
• Command 10 V Adjustment speed: low, medium or high.
Default parameters: Speed setting - medium
• Contact interface with 2 inputs
Input operation: normal, reverse, toggle (on opening or on closing), only ON, only OFF, scenario
Default parameters: Normal op
36
Main configurations
• Interface for traditional controls
Rocker operation: normal, reverse
Button operation: toggle on up, toggle on down
LED management: off, on (it is enough for one of the two inputs to be active for the LED to come on)
Default parameters: Op. - Normal, Mgt. LED - On
N.B.: For art. 20518, 16958 and 14518 there are also the parameters Only ON and Only OFF.
• Roller shutter actuator
Deactivation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Scenario activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Control activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal
• Actuator for roller shutters and blinds (01852.2):
Operation: set the actuator operating mode, namely 0 –> “Normal” and 1 –> “Blinds”.
- With the 0 (Normal) setting the device controls only the roller shutters and the typical parameter of blinds
operation will not be displayed (Step duration).
- With the 1 (Blinds) setting the device controls not only the roller shutters but also the Venetian blinds and it
will be necessary to set the "Step Duration" parameter that identifies the length of the pulse with which the
actuator will drive the motor to rotate the laths (that is it is used to determine how far you want to turn the
blinds around their axis on briefly pressing the rocker switch).
Step duration: adjustable from 70 ms to 3 s in steps of 10 ms.
The movement of the blinds is affected by briefly pressing or holding down the control button that governs
them according to the following modes:
a.Briefly pressing the control button: the laths move by one click.
b.Pressing and holding down the control button: the laths turn completely and raise or lower, depending on
the button being pressed.
c.Briefly pressing the control button while the laths are moving: the laths stop without completing the closing or opening movement.
Deactivation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Scenario activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Control activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Default parameters: Operation - 0, Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal.
• Infrared remote control receiver
Button operation: toggle, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
Rocker operation: on/off, dimmer switch, roller shutter switch
LED management: off, on in reception, always on
Default parameters: Op. for Push-button - Toggle, Op. for Push-button - on/off, LED control - normal
• IR detector, with dual technology and wall-mounting, mini)
Brightness threshold: settable from 0 to 100 (when the setting is equal to 100, the detector operates in a situation of total darkness).
Default parameters: Brightness threshold - 250
37
Main configurations
• Control device with three rocker switches and regulator actuator MASTER 20548, 16988, 14548
- The regulators also control inductive response electronic transformers 40-200 VA 230 V~ 50 Hz (200 VA max for
2 transformers); do not connect any more than 2 transformers.
- Not suitable for controlling motors (e.g. fans, ventilators).
- If installing 2 regulators in a single box, the loads that can be controlled by each regulator must be reduced so
that their total does not exceed the values indicated in the following table:
Controllable loads
Characteristics
of controllable
transformer
20548
16988
14548
MASTER
–
40 - 300 W
–
40 - 300 VA
L
40 - 200 VA
- The rated power level should never be exceeded.
- Overloading, power surges and short-circuits may permanently damage dimmers. Before installation check the
circuit carefully and eliminate any of the above causes.
- Do not connect several dimmers in series between each other.
- The dimmer does not have a mechanical circuit breaker in the main circuit and so is not galvanically separated.
The circuit load should be considered always powered.
4.5.11 Configuration of Actuator with 4 relay outputs 01471
The functional blocks that the device makes available comprise: 4 relays or 2 relays + 1 roller shutter or 2 roller
shutters or 1 fan coil.
The Fancoil functional block has a group depth of 1 (that is, it can belong to one group only).
Description of the functional blocks
ACTUATOR
• Actuator: to manage a lights actuator.
This functional block receives the following command requests: load on/off, timed load switch on, saving and
recalling scenes.
ROLLER SHUTTER ACTUATOR
• Roller shutter actuator: to manage the roller shutter.
• Blinds: to manage the roller shutter + slat
These functional blocks receive the following command requests: opening/closing roller shutters, rotating
slats, setting the roller shutter height and slat rotation values, saving and recalling scenes, forcing via logic
module.
FANCOIL
• 2 or 4 pipe fancoils or integrations with third parties (controlled by devices that send a proportional value (for
example art.02951).
38
Main configurations
Functional blocks
• For each single relay, you can select the functional block:
- actuator
• For the pairs of relays (relay 1+ relay 2 or relay 3 + relay 4) you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- roller shutter actuator
- blinds actuator
Caution: After installation you need to open and close each roller shutter completely to carry out the
calibration process.
• For the 4 relays used in a single block, you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- 2/4-pipe fancoil: the control unit automatically selects the functional block according to the configuration of
the thermostat already present in the group.
- integrating third-party fancoil
Selecting the functional block to be configured:
Press the configuration button to select the first functional block; keeping it pressed cycles through the list of
functional blocks.
The LEDs on the OUT 1, 2, 3 and 4 buttons indicate the selected functional block:
• OUT1 on for functional block relay 1
• OUT2 on for functional block relay 2
• OUT3 on for functional block relay 3
• OUT4 on for functional block relay 4
• OUT1 and OUT2 on for functional block roller shutter 1
• OUT3 and OUT4 on for functional block roller shutter 2
• OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 on for functional block fancoil
After a pause of 3 s the device enters configuration mode for the selected functional block and the start of
configuration is signalled by the red LED. At the end of this operation the red LED will go out.
Scenes.
The actuator can belong to multiple scenes and, for each one of them, save the status (ON or OFF) to retrieve
when activating the scene itself.
The roller shutter actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter.
The blinds actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter and the angle of the slats.
Description of the parameters
ACTUATOR
 On and off delay (they are delay times that can be set for actuating the On and Off request): from 0 s to 12
h with default value 0 s.
 ON time duration for one-position stable operation (this is the activation time for one-position stable operation): from 1 s to 12 h with default value 30 s.
 Warning time (this is a time that is added to the activation time of the one-position stable actuator. At the end
of the activation time the relay switches off for 0.5 s and then switches back on for the warning time): from 0
s to 12 h with default value 0 s.
 Output status at power on and output status at power down (this enables setting the actuator when switching off and upon restoring power respectively): ON/OFF/Unchanged with default value "Unchanged".
39
Main configurations
 Operation (this enables setting the operation of the actuator): one-position stable/two-position stable with
default value "two-position stable".
 Feeedback group (this enables setting the group on which to send the actuator status to align the LEDs of
the commands): for details see par. 3.4 of the Plug&Play Home Automation System section.
ROLLER SHUTTER AND BLINDS ACTUATOR
 Up and down time (these are the roller shutter up and down times): 10 s to 1 h with default value 180 s.
 Full slat rotation time: from 500 ms to 5 s with default value 2 s.
 Behaviour at power on (this enables setting whether when power is restored the roller shutter opens, closes,
remains in the current position or you can choose the height of the roller shutter and the tilt of the slats): all
down, all up, no action, default position. Default value no "action".
 Position of the roller shutter at power on (enables setting the position of the roller shutter when power is
restored): from 0 to 100% with default value 50%.
 Scene recall execution delay (this enables delaying execution of the command so as not to actuate all the
roller shutters at once): from 0 s to 250 s with default value 0 s.
 Command execution delay: from 0 s to 250 s with default value 0 s.
 Tilt of the slats at power on (enables setting the position of the slat when power is restored): from 0 to 100%
with default value 50%.
 Position on forcing (this enables setting the behaviour of the roller shutter upon the forcing request): all down,
all up, fixed, preset position with default value "fixed." It is necessary to observe the value set by the "roller
shutter position on forcing" and "slat tilt on forcing" parameters.
 Position on end of forcing (this enables setting the behaviour of the roller shutter at the end of forcing): all
down, all up, fixed, preset position with default value "fixed." It is necessary to observe the value set by the
"roller shutter position on forcing" and "slat tilt on forcing" parameters; it returns to the previous value with
the request for forcing.
 Roller shutter position on forcing (can be used in the “position on forcing” and “position on end of forcing”
parameters): from 0 to 100% with default value 50%.
 Slat tilt on forcing (can be used in the “position on forcing” and “position on end of forcing” parameters): from
0 to 100% with default value 50%.
FANCOIL
 Valve control (enables selecting whether to control the hot or cold valve). Default value "heating valve".
Chap. 4 of the Plug&Play Home Automation System section contains some time charts describing the
operation of the roller shutter and relay actuators depending on the settings made during configuration and
on the parameters.
40
Main configurations
4.5.12 Installing and configuring the touch screens
The colour touch screens (Eikon Evo 21553.2, 21554, 21511, 21512, Eikon 20511.1, Arké 19511, Plana
14511.1) and the monochrome touch screens (Eikon Evo 21512, Eikon 20512, Arké 19512, Idea 16952,
Plana 14512) enable controlling lights, roller shutters, HVAC, scenarios, etc., by touching the icons associated
with them.
The configuration of the touchscreen is done with the EasyTool Professional LT software connecting the interface 01998 to the special connector on the device..
On concluding this operation, it is necessary to configure the touch screen in the By-me system so that it is
recognized by the control unit and can interact with the system.
The operations to carry out differ depending on the type of touch screen and the applications you want to
control.
4.5.12.1 Colour touch screen (Eikon Evo 21553.2, 21554, 21511, 21512, Eikon 20511.1, Arké 19511, Plana 14511.1).
If, via the touch screen, you want to control only the automation system, the device can be connected
to any of the lines of the automation system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system).
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a group of the automation system via the menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups Select the group scrolling through the
list  Associated devices  Add
If, via the touch screen, you want to control also the intrusion detection alarm system besides the
automation system, the device must be connected to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm
system (area 00-line 00). WARNING: This does not apply to the Eikon touch screen Evo 21512 as they do
not manage the intrusion detection alarm system.
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a zone of the intrusion detection alarm system via the menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group
scrolling through the list  Associated devices  Add
To configure the touch screen, starting from the main screen, touch these icons in the following order:


switch off on concluding the configuration.
. On touching this icon it will light up and it will
WARNING: Once you have downloaded the touch screen screen shots with EasyTool Professional LT and
have configured it on the By-me control unit, you will then need to synchronise the touch screen router by
touching the
icon then the
icon. On touching this icon it will light up
and it will switch off on concluding the configuration.
•Resetting the touchscreen
To reset the touchscreen, carry out the following operations:
- on the control unit select the menu called Setup
-touch and keep the
 Configuration  Reset management  Device reset;
icon pressed until the touchscreen switches off.
The touchscreen is now reset and it is necessary to once more download the screens set with EasyTool Professional LT.
41
Main configurations
4.5.12.2 Monochrome touch screen (Eikon 20512, Arké 19512, Idea 16952, Plana 14512).
The monochrome touch screen enables (local) management of the automation system (it does not
manage the intrusion detection alarm system); the device can therefore be connected to any one of
the lines of the automation system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion
detection alarm system) .
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a group of the automation system via the menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the
list  Associated devices  Add
To then configure the touchscreen, select its icon menu:
Touch the
icon that will stay pressed until the configuration process has been concluded by the
control unit.
4.5.13 Installation and configuration of the By-me module 01965.
The By-me module 01965 is a device which must be integrated into the video door entry unit 19558 and
allows managing not only the video door entry system, but also all the functions of the By-me automation
system such as the lights control, roller shutters, HVAC, sound system, scenarios, events, and load control. If
there is also an intrusion detection alarm system, the video door entry unit allows you to control the plant with
similar modes and features to those of a digital keypad. The configuration of the module 01965 is done with
the EasyTool Professional LT software connecting the interface 01998 to the special connector on the device.
On concluding this operation, it is necessary to configure the module in the By-me system so that it is recognized by the control unit and can interact with the system.
If, via the module 01965, you want to control only the automation system, the device can be connected
to any of the lines of the automation system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion
detection alarm system).
Having done this, the module must be configured in a group of the automation system via the control panel
menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups Select the group scrolling through the list
 Associated devices  Add
If, via the module 01965, you want to control also the intrusion detection alarm system besides the automation system, the device must be connected to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system
(area 00-line 00). Having done this, the module must be configured in a zone of the intrusion detection alarm
system via the control panel menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups
scrolling through the list  Associated devices  Add
42
Select the group
Main configurations
To configure the module 01965, starting from the main menu, tap the softkeys in sequence corresponding
to the following icons:


.
The display of the video door entry unit will show the following screen:
Tap the softkey corresponding to the icon
at bottom right to start the configuration.
Once the operation has concluded, it is necessary to synchronize the router; using
and tap the softkey corresponding to the icon
.
and
select
Once the operation has concluded, the display will show whether synchronization has taken place correctly.
Synchronization good
Error
43
Main configurations
4.5.14 Router Control
The Router Control menu enables configuring the Line Coupler art. 01845, called “Router” in the control unit,
creating a new line, as per bus system architecture.
NOTE: the configured router identifies a new line/area that will lead to the terminals indicated with BUS 2, while
the backbone will lead to the BUS 1 terminals. The devices connected on the BUS 2 side will be addressed
with the Area and Line number of the Router.
If you are configuring the intrusion detection alarm system, the By-me control unit must be configured
on Area 00 and line 00; these devices must necessarily belong to area 00 line 00 (alias: backbone line)
in a maximum number of 60 devices as described in the intrusion detection alarm system section. If
configuring a system that, at a later time, has to be integrated with the intrusion detection alarm system, it is necessary for the control unit to have already been configured in Area 00 and Line 00 together
with its power supply 01401 and router 01845 for the automation lines.
BUS
+
-
Line 1,0
01401
01845
Automation Devices
01804
01807
BUS
+
-
Line 00
01401
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
Intrusion Detection Alarm System Devices
• Configuration of the router.
Setup  Configuration  Router  Router management  Add
Set the Area and Line number to assign to the Router and touch
Next.
Press the configuration button on Line Coupler 01845 until the red Led lights up on the device. Completion
of this operation is confirmed by a message on the control unit display and by the red LED going out on
the device.
44
Main configurations
• Router synchronization.
Setup  Configuration Router  Router synchronization
Confirm the operation by touching
Yes.
After configuring the devices, this operation enables the Routers controlled by the control unit, allowing the
group messages to get past the line coupler.
In the phase of group management it is allowed to configure devices belonging to different lines in the
same group.
At the end, the synchronization of the Routers prevents filtering the group messages.
NOTE: It is permissible to create actuator control groups on different lines.
• Manual enabling of the messages filtered by the router.
This procedure enables manually passing or blocking the messages from one or more groups in the system (automation groups, temperature zones) via a Router selected from the ones installed in the system.
Setup  Configuration Router  Router management
Select the Router on which you want to manually enable/disable the flow of messages from a group; the
router will be identified with the wording Area no./Line no.
The control unit will display the following four options:
- Add group that enables adding a single group of the By-me system; select the desired group scrolling
through the list and, after making the selection, confirm by touching
Save.
- Remove group that enables removing a single group of the By-me system; select the desired group
scrolling through the list and, after making the selection, confirm by touching
Save.
Finally a pop-up is displayed; touch
Yes.
- Add the address that enables adding a single group address for KNX networks; form the hexadecimal
number with the
on the right to enter and
on the left to delete the numbers forming the
hexadecimal address and, after making the selection, confirm the choice by touching
Next.
- Remove the address that enables removing a single group address for KNX networks; form the hexadecimal number with the
on the right to enter and
on the left to delete the numbers
forming the hexadecimal address and, after making the selection, confirm the choice by touching
Yes.
At the end of each operation, exit the menus and the new groups selected will be filtered by the Router
according to the set choices.
• Removing a router
Setup  Configuration  Router  Router management  Select the router to remove by scrolling through the list  Remove router
Proceed to remove  Yes
The control unit confirms removal and goes back to displaying the list of routers.
45
Main configurations
4.5.15 Communicator interface management.
The following menus are used to configure the Internal communication interface between the BUS system and
the phone communicators 01941 and 01942.
Setup
 Configuration  Communicator interface  Configuration
Select the interface to configure (identified with Area no./Line no.) and touch
Next.
Press the configuration button of the internal communications interface between the BUS system and the
telephone communicators. The red LED lights up on the device.
The end of the operation is confirmed by a message on the control unit and the device's red LED going out;
now switch the communicator off and back on again.
• Phone Communicator Configuration.
This menu is used to activate the necessary configuration procedure so the intrusion detection alarm
system can interact with the phone communicator, for forwarding alarm messages and for remoting some
commands of the intrusion detection alarm system itself. This operation must be performed after configuring the communicator interface (art. 01848 for the 01941 whereas for the 01942 the interface is incorporated and is configured in a similar manner).
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Authentication
The communicator is thus automatically configured and the control unit confirms completion of the operation.
Warning: After configuring the interface 01848 it is possible to configure the phone communicator once only; to do it again you need to carry out the
following procedure:
1. Remove the interface 01848 from the control unit.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface Remove interface
Proceed to remove the communicator interface?  Yes
2. Interface configuration:
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Configuration
N.B.: If you need to Reset the interface, the procedure to follow is similar to the one for resetting the automation devices.
3. Phone communicator configuration.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface
Authentication
• Add group to interface.
When a group is added, the messages sent to that group are no longer blocked by the internal communication interface between the bus system and the phone communicator so as to be able to thus be managed
by the communicator.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Add group
Select the desired group by scrolling through the list of groups and confirm by touching
46
Save.
Main configurations
The control unit confirms the operation and returns to the list of menus for the Communicator interface.
An example of the usefulness of this menu is the management of the technical alarms of a By-me system
via the phone communicator: if, following a technical alarm detected in the control unit, you want the communicator to send an alarm message (SMS or voice message), it is necessary to add the group for the
contacts interface generating the technical alarm to the communicator interface.
• Remove group from interface.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Remove group
Select the group to remove by scrolling through the list of displayed groups.
Proceed to remove the Group?  Yes
• Groups Monitored from a remote location.
This menu is used to enable the selected groups (that contain at least one actuator device) for remote
control via a communicator; it is then possible to turn reading the state of the groups on and off.
Up to 8 groups can be selected for monitoring.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Monitor groups
Select the desired groups by scrolling through the list of all the configured ones and confirm by touching
Save.
Go on to configure the telephone communicator (01941 or 01942) by following the procedures described
in the communicator instructions manual.
• Removing interface.
Setup  Configuration  Communicator interface  Remove interface
Proceed to remove the communicator interface?  Yes
The communicator interface will be removed from the system.
The GSM communicator moreover enables carrying out diagnostics operations from a remote location; for
all the details please see chap. 8 "Diagnostics and maintenance" on page 74.
4.5.16 USB Interface Management 01847
The menus illustrated in this paragraph allow configuring the interface 01847 for connecting the bus of the
By-me system with the PC on which the EasyTool Professional program is installed. The interface 01847 is
supplied with art. 01994; see the relevant instructions sheet for the details about connecting the device.
• Configuring the USB interface.
If the system includes an intrusion detection alarm system, connect the interface to the bus (via the dedicated RJ11 jack) paying the utmost attention to check that the device is connected to the line reserved for
the intrusion detection alarm system (Area 00, line 00).
If, on the contrary, the system has no intrusion detection alarm system it suffices to connect the interface
(again via the dedicated RJ11 jack) to the line of the bus on which the control unit is connected.
47
Main configurations
From the menu:
Setup  Configuration  USB interface  Configuration  Select the interface (Area/Line)
Press the USB 0 interface configuration button for approximately two seconds; the control unit display will,
for approximately two seconds, show a message confirming the configuration.
At the end of this message the control unit will again display the USB Interface menu.
• Authentication of interface 01847.
For the USB interface to enable managing the By-me system via EasyTool Professional it is necessary not
only to configure it but also authenticate it; the procedure is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  USB interface  Authentication
The control unit display will, for approximately two seconds, show a message confirming the configuration.
At the end of this message the control unit will again display the USB Interface menu.
• Removing interface 01847.
Setup  Configuration  USB interface  Remove USB interface
Proceed to remove the USB interface?  Yes
The USB interface will be removed from the system.
4.5.17 Configuration of logic unit 01468
The device must be configured in an automation group, Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
by pressing the CONF button; you are advised to configure a group dedicated exclusively to the logic unit.
More generally, when configuring a logic unit, keep in mind the following:
- the device is configured in an automation group and only on an automation line
- you can configure multiple “logic unit” automation groups per control unit
- more than one logic unit can be configured per automation group without any constraints, but it can only
coexist with similar devices.
In particular, it may be useful to group the logic modules in different groups (if the installer considers it appropriate) to identify different group nomenclature.
The configuration of the device logics is done using the EasyTool Professional software.
Before transferring the programmes to the logic unit, you are advised to check them in the EasyTool Professional editor using the “SIMULATION” function; this is used to enter the possible values received from the
bus manually and check the correct behaviour of the logic networks.
Updating the logic unit firmware.
To update the device firmware, proceed as follows:
• Switch off the connection to the By-me bus.
• Run the firmware update tool on EasyTool Professional, which will wait for the device.
• When requested by the software, press the device configuration button, then connect the logic unit to the
computer via a cable and USB port, while holding down the configuration button; once the cable has been
fitted in the USB port, wait one more second and then release the button.
48
Main configurations
4.5.18 Web Server management
The menus illustrated in this paragraph are used to configure the Web Server 01945 so that the By-me system
can be managed remotely via a PC or Apple mobile devices or locally by means of the multimedia video touch
screen 21553.2.
For all the details on the connection of the Web Server please see the relevant instructions sheet.
• Configuration of the Web Server.
If the system includes an intrusion detection alarm system, connect the Web Server paying the utmost attention to check that the device is connected to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system
(Area 00, line 00).
If, on the contrary, the system has no intrusion detection alarm system it suffices to connect the Web Server
to the line of the bus on which the control unit is connected.
From the menu:
Setup  Configuration  Web Server Configuration
The control unit display will, for approximately two seconds, show a message confirming the
configuration.
At the end of this message the control unit will again display the Web Server menu.
• Authentication of the Web Server.
For the Web Server to enable managing the By-me system it is necessary not only to configure it but also
authenticate it; the procedure is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Web Server Authentication
The control unit display will, for approximately two seconds, show a message confirming the configuration.
At the end of this message the control unit will again display the Web Server menu.
• Removing the Web Server.
Setup  Configuration  Web Server Remove Web Server
Proceed to remove the Web Server?  Yes
The Web Server will be removed from the system.
49
Main configurations
4.5.19 Managing BUS interface with EnOcean module
The BUS with EnOcean module radio interface allows using the devices of the radiofrequency system to extend
coverage in places or accesses where it is not possible to add any cables and devices via BUS.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20508 : 2 Eikon modules
19508 : 2 Arké modules
14508 : 2 Plana modules
The radio interface is combined with the following radio-frequency devices with the EnOcean module:
20505: control with 2 toggle buttons
01796: relay actuator with relay output
• Operation
The device communicates on the one hand via radio wave signals with the radio-frequency devices with the
EnOcean module and, on the other hand, with the devices in the system communication bus.
The functions involve the automation operations such as controlling lights, roller shade control and scenario
management.
Devices with the Enocean module integrate completely with the By-me devices: for example, it is possible in an
Automation group to have a By-me button that commands an EnOcean actuator or an EnOcean button that
commands a By-me actuator; devices with an EnOcean module moreover also take part in creating scenarios.
In a system it is possible to add up to 15 BUS interfaces with the EnOcean module and each one of them can
control at most 16 devices with the EnOcean module.
The maximum number of RF devices with the EnOcean module and SAI that can be saved in the database of
the control unit is 350.
Important:
- an interface cannot be added to more than one Automation Group;
- an EnOcean button control device can be added to at most four Automation groups per interface;
- a relay actuator device with the EnOcean module can be added to at most 30 groups;
- actuators join scenarios when the group to which they belong is associated with a scenario.
The BUS interface with the EnOcean module features two main modes of operation:
- Normal operation: receives information from the radio-frequency devices and sends it through the communication bus, and vice versa.
- Configuration: in the phase of adding radio frequency devices it saves the characteristics of the component
that has responded and communicates some information to the control unit.
50
Main configurations
Controls
Control unit 21509
Controls
RF BUS interface20508
- 14508
RF command
20505 + buttons
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
bus
M
RF actuator
01796
Relay actuator
L
N
Controls
with relay
actuator
RF actuator
01796
Controls with
roller shade
actuator
Example of connecting devices with EnOcean module integrated in the By-me automation system.
• Interface configuration.
An interface must always be associated with an automation group.
The first operation to be carried out therefore consists in creating the group (see par. 4.4.1.1 on page 29):
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Add
The new group is saved in the database.
The second operation consists in associating the interface with the group:
Setup  Configuration
created  Add
 Groups  Automation groups  Select the name of the group just
Then press the configuration button in the interface to add it to the created group.
WARNING: The 20508-14508 interface can be added to one group only.
Note: For practical purposes it is not important in which group the interface 20508-14508 is configured;
but it is advisable to include it in one of the first automation groups for faster access to the menus.
51
Main configurations
• Removing the interface.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the name of the group to which
the interface belongs  Associated devices
Select the functional unit related to the interface to remove by scrolling through the list of units and touch
Remove Device; the control unit displays:
Proceed to remove the device?  Yes
The control unit signals deletion; together with the interface, all the devices with the EnOcean module associated with it are removed from the database, and that is the button controls in the Automation groups,
the button controls associated with the scenarios and the relay actuators.
WARNING: To complete the procedure it is necessary to reset the radio relay actuators associated
with the interface. If any of these actuators have been configured in other interfaces too, the relay
will stop working; it is then necessary to remove them and reconfigure them in the relevant groups.
• Interface diagnostics.
This option permits checking the operation of the interfaces with the EnOcean module and managing their
replacement.
Setup  Diagnostics  Device diagnostics
The control unit initiates a scan procedure to check that all the configured devices are functioning correctly.
In case of error and subsequent replacement of the interface 20508 - 14508, besides the configuration
information, also the related devices with the EnOcean module previously associated with it are restored.
• Device configuration
This procedure allows associating the interface with the EnOcean module with the radio rocker switches
(20505 + 20506 or 20505 +14506) and the radio relay actuator 01796.
Select the group where the BUS interface with the EnOcean module has been inserted.
Scroll through the list of devices to the desired interface, select it and enter Device parameters; scroll
through the list of parameters to the item RF devices and select View.
Select the desired group from the existing ones; add the device selecting the desired type of control
choosing between button control and relay control.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the name of the group to which
the interface belongs  Select the interface  Device parameters  RF devices
Button/Relay  Select the name of the group
 Add Add
The configuration procedure now depends on the type of control selected.
Add Button: Press the desired button (left or right) of the device with the EnOcean module.
Add Relay: Press the LRN button of the relay actuator 01796; lastly press the configuration button on the interface
to complete the procedure correctly.
The radio interface sends a message to the control unit that shows the information related to the device code
and its description on the display.
Then repeat the operation for each device that you want to add.
52
Main configurations
Touching
End takes you back to the previous menu that shows all the devices added on the interface,
displaying the code, description and index of the associated automation group.
In addition, it is possible to add the same device with the EnOcean module on more than one interface, each
one in a different group, in order to increase the system's radio coverage; likewise it is possible to add a device on a single interface associating it to more than one group. In both cases the group depth is equal to 4.
Note: If adding a button on different interfaces belonging to the same group, it must continue to have the
same type in relation to the type of actuator (on/off, dimmer, roller shutters).
For further details, please refer to the manual of interface 20508 - 14508.
• Removing devices
This option enables removing a single device with the EnOcean module from an interface; it can be removed in two ways:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the name of the group to
which the interface belongs  Select the interface  Device parameters  RF device  View
Scrolling through the list, select the device you want to remove and touch Remove Device.
Likewise, removal can be performed as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups
In the desired group, select the functional unit to be removed by scrolling through the list; the removal
procedure depends on the type of device that has to be removed:
- RF button: Touch Remove device on the control unit menu.
- RF relay: Press the LRN button of the radio actuator to remove and subsequently touch Remove device
on the control unit menu.
Warning: It is not possible to remove a group containing buttons and actuators with the EnOcean module
without having first removed them from this group.
• Changing interface parameters
The interface with the EnOcean module features some operating parameters that can be set by the user.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the name of the group to which
the interface belongs  Select the interface  Device parameters
The available interface parameters are:
• Interface LED blink mode:
- Off = the green LED never lights up;
- Normal = the green LED is off whereas it blinks when it receives an RF message;
- Inverted = the green LED is on whereas it blinks when it receives an RF message;
• RF devices:
- View = access to the menu for displaying all the RF devices associated with the interface and for Add
Device.
53
Main configurations
• Interface number:
- Progressive interface number, from 1 to 15, assigned automatically by the control unit and that cannot be
modified.
• Changing the parameters of the device with the EnOcean module
This option allows changing the parameters related to the radio devices with the EnOcean module.
The device with the EnOcean module is displayed in the menu of the Automations group with which it is associated.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group
Scroll through the list of units, select the functional unit for which you want to change the parameters and
finally touch Device parameters.
On the rocker switch device with the EnOcean module it is possible to change the type of associated command; the available types are the following:
- On/Off;
- Dimmer control;
- Roller shutter control.
Select the desired type of control and touch Set; lastly press Save.
The relay actuator with the EnOcean module has no parameters.
As regards the address taken by the devices with the EnOcean module, it will have Area equal to 0, Line equal
to the number of the interface with which it is associated, and device number ranging from 1 to 50.
For example
- 0x0101 corresponds to device no. 1 of interface no. 1;
- 0x0F32 corresponds to device no. 50 of interface no. 15.
• Scenario management with rocker switch control with EnOcean module
In the range of devices with the EnOcean module, the button control (20505 + 20506 or 20505 + 14506) can
be used in scenario management as an external button.
The procedure for associating the button with the desired scenario is as follows:
Scenarios  Setup  Select the scenario to associate  Associated buttons  Add
It is now necessary first of all to identify the interface that is located at a suitable distance for receiving the
radio signal; having done this, press its configuration button.
Again on the control unit menu select the top or bottom side of the button on which to activate the command, touch Next finally press the EnOcean button to associate with the chosen side.
If you attempt to configure a device with the EnOcean module already in a group the control unit will display
this message:
Error Impossible to proceed Control already used to call up a scenario!
54
Main configurations
• Scenario management with relay actuator with EnOcean module
In the range of devices with the EnOcean module, the relay actuator 01796 can be used for scenario management.
The procedure for doing this consists in associating or removing a group in the desired scenario.
Association:
Activate the desired scenario to set all the devices in the desired position.
Scenarios  Setup  Select the scenario  Associated groups  Add  Select the group
containing the actuator 01796  Options  Next  Save Scenario (set all the actuators in the
scenario as preferred) Next
Removal:
Scenarios  Setup  Select the scenario  Associated groups  Select the group containing
the actuator 01796  Remove group
Proceed to remove the group  Yes
• Device identification and strength of reception
This option allows displaying the information related to a device with the EnOcean module already configured
in the system, namely:
- physical address,
- group or scenario to which it belongs.
- strength of reception of the radio signal (RSSI)
The procedure is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Device identification
To identify the button control device with the EnOcean module it suffices to press the button.
Selecting the identified device on the control unit displays all the functional units, corresponding to the
pressed button, that have been configured in the interfaces with the EnOcean module that have detected
the button being pressed.
By pressing Info RF it is possible to display more information such as the type of device, serial code, interface with which it is associated and the strength of reception of the signal (RSSI) of the button.
For the device to work properly, it is sufficient to have a reception strength greater than 30%.
Note: This procedure has different characteristics to the one performed for the devices on the bus as it is
necessary to manage the radio communications too. For this reason it is recommended to wait approximately 30 seconds after pressing the Device Identification button before starting to identify the devices with
the EnOcean module.
In addition, pressing the Info button displays a number of messages according to the number of times it is
pressed and the number of interfaces in which the identified device is configured.
Device identification cannot be performed on 01796 actuators.
55
Main configurations
4.5.20 Interface for managing emergency lamps via By-me BUS 01846.
The device, suitably installed in the emergency lighting appliance 02660 and 02660.120, enables controlling
the lamp via the control unit. For all the details on the connection of the interface to the light please see the
instructions sheet supplied with art. 01846.
Technical characteristics
• Rated supply voltage. BUS 29 V.
• Absorption: 10 mA.
• Configuration button for programming the device.
• Terminals: TP BUS
• Operation:
- when mains voltage is present, the lamp is switched on/off with one or more push-button commands connected to the bus;
- creation of scenarios that also involve the emergency lighting system.
Configuration.
The configuration must be made only when the interface 01846 has been connected both to the By-me
system and to the emergency lighting appliance that you want to control.
• Functional units: 1; the unit can belong to at most 4 different groups.
• Selecting the functional unit (configuration): during group creation, when the control unit requires pressing
the device button.
• Addition of an emergency lamp to a functional group..
It enables adding an interface 01846 (previously connected to an emergency lamp 02660 or 02660.120) to
a lights group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group scrolling through the
list  Add
Press the configuration button of the interface 01846; the lamp then comes on associated with the selected
group.
• Removing a lamp from a functional group.
Used to remove the emergency lamp from a functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups
Select the group containing the light and, scrolling through the list of units, select:
Emergency lamp
 Remove device  Proceed to remove the device?  Yes
The control unit indicates when removal is complete.
56
Main configurations
Parameters.
• Operation: Only Emergency (non-permanent SE mode) or Always On (permanent SA mode).
• Emergency Duration (time for which the lamp stays on following a mains power cut): 1 or 3 hours.
• Default parameters:
- Operation: Only Emergency.
- Emergency Duration 1 hour.
• Setting the lamp parameters
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups
Select the group containing the lamp and select the functional unit whose parameters are to be changed;
lastly touch Device Parameters
The parameters that can be modified for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit
concerned
Select the Emergency Lamp unit and set the following parameters:
• Operation (selecting Always on SA or Emergency only SE)
• Duration of Emergency (selecting 1 h or 3 h).
Then, for instance, on configuring a key of a button control in the same group as the interface 01846 it will
be possible to control the emergency lamp.
Scenarios.
The interface 01846 can belong to up to 4 different scenarios and, for each one of them, save the status to
retrieve when activating the scenario.
57
Scenarios
5. Scenarios.
A scenario is made up of a set of actuations that can be called at any time by means of a single command (for
example to switch on the lights in a living room and at the same time lower the roller shutters and switch on the
heating).
5.1 Creating a scenario.
The procedures for creating a scenario are carried out using the special menus available on the control unit; they
involve a number of functional groups (that should be specified during the operations) and their functional units.
The procedure for creating a new scenario is as follows:
1. Select the functional groups involved (this is done at the control unit);
2. Set the users (i.e. actuators) of the groups concerned in the desired state (load ON, load OFF, load dimmed,
shutter up, shutter down, etc.). This operation must be carried out directly on the actuators and related controls;
3. Store the scenario in memory (this is done at the control unit);
4. Rename the scenario (this is done at the control unit).
Warning:
• The order in which the first operations 1 and 2 are performed is not important; it is necessary to remember that
the scenario will call up the state of all the actuators in the groups involved.
• The control interface does not control and is not controlled by any of the scenarios. Scenarios only control the
actuators in functional groups, and control interfaces are devices with inputs only.
Scenarios  Setup  Add Normal scenario or Global scenario
Important:
•Select normal when the scenario is composed of functional groups belonging to a single control unit.
•Select global only when the scenario must be composed of functional groups belonging to a number of lines. In
this case, the “Create Scenario” operation must be performed on all the systems and the same Global scenario
must be selected on each of them.
Assign the name to the scenario setting:
• Index of new Scenario (1-32) that identifies the number of the scenario in the list of all the configured ones;
touch Next to confirm.
• Scenario name scrolling through
the list of characters displayed and moving
the desired letters to form the name; touch
Next to confirm.
Scroll
through the list of configured groups and select, touching them
in the scenario; the selection will be highlighted by the icon .
Touch Options
, one by one,
one by one, the ones involved
 Next to confirm.
In the scenario it is possible to add or remove all the configured groups by touching Select All and Deselect All
respectively.
58
Scenarios
The control unit asks you to set the state that the actuators will take on when the scenario is activated; using the
buttons of the groups involved set the users positioning them in the desired state (ON or OFF, roller shutter
raised or lowered, thermostat ON, etc.).
During this phase the green LED of the devices in the groups involved blink to make identification easier. Touch
Next; the control unit will confirm the operation carried out and will return to display the list of configured scenarios.
Example.
We want to create a scenario that involves some functional groups of two different control units (for example:
system 1 with Area = 1 and Line = 1, system 2 with Area = 1 and Line = 2). Follow the procedures described
on the page alongside to create two separate scenarios for the two systems, taking account of the following
constraints:
• the scenarios must have the same number/index of scenario;
• the two scenarios must be defined as Global
N.B.
When saving scenarios involving roll-up blind switches and/or relay actuators configured as
one-position stable, it is necessary to carry out the following operations:
• Roller shutter controls: The state of the roller shutters of the saved scenario depends on the last command
received from the roller shutter actuator regardless of the OFF time set in the Parameters menu. For instance,
if the off delay is 5 s and the last command received is “roller shutter up," if the scenario is saved after 5 s the
status of the command to be saved will be "roller shutter up."
• One-position stable relay actuators: The state with which the relay actuator set as one-position stable is
saved in a scenario is tied to the status of the relay and not the last command received. For instance, if the
relay is configured as one-position stable with an off delay of 5 s and if the scenario is saved after the relay has
re-opened the contact, on activating this scenario the relay will remain open. It follows that if it is desired to
save the closure of the relay in the scenario it is necessary to set it beforehand as two-position stable, having it
closed later by a command of its group and then saving the scenario. Lastly the one-position stable operation
must be restored with the Parameters menu of the relay actuator.
59
Scenarios
5.2 Activating a scenario.
Activating a scenario enables calling up the saved state of all the actuators of the functional groups in this scenario;
activation can be carried out from the control unit or from a control device.
5.2.1 Activating with the control unit.
If the scenario is activated from the control unit, the procedure is as follows:
Scenarios  Select and touch
the scenario to activate  Proceed?  Yes
5.2.2 Activation with button control.
As well as from the control unit, a scenario can be activated from an appropriately configured control device ,
which must never belong to any group and which must never be configured from the control unit. The control
devices that can be used are:
• simple push button: only one scenario can be associated;
• rocker switch control: it is possible to associate two scenarios, one for when pressing at the top and one
for when pressing at the bottom; in the case of only one scenario being associated, the push not used can
only be activated to control a new scenario and not for other functions (for example on/off).
• infrared remote control 01849: the scenarios that can be associated depend on the number and on the
configuration assigned to the infrared receivers (Eikon 20516, Arké 19516, Idea 16956, Plana 14516);
• 1 module control interface (Eikon 20518, Arké 19518, Idea 16958, Plana 14518).
Scenarios  Select the scenario  Setup  Touch
the selected scenario  Associated PushButtons (a list of any existing buttons is displayed)  Select the button or the device with which to
activate the scenario or, when not present, continue by touching
Add  Select the Area and
Line of the button to associate  Next
Now press the device configuration button and the button to be associated.
 If a push-button control is being configured, the control unit confirms the operation.
 If a rocker switch is being configured, it is necessary to indicate on which button the scenario must be
associated; select upper or lower and touch
Next.
The control unit confirms the association has been made.
Note.
It is not possible to associate a scenario activation button with an interface for conventional controls (Eikon
20515, Arké 19515, Idea 16955, Plana 14515).
5.2.3 Activation with touchscreen control.
• A scenario can be activated also with colour touch screens (Eikon 20511, Arké 19511, Plana 14511) and
monochrome ones (Eikon 20512, Arké 19512, Idea 16952, Plana 14512). For all the details please see the
related instructions and the EasyTool Professional LT software manual.
5.3 Renaming a scenario.
It is possible to change the name of an existing scenario by assigning it a new one.
Scenarios  Select the scenario  Setup  Touch
60
the selected scenario Edit Name
Scenarios
Scrolling vertically
through the list of characters displayed and move horizontally
the desired letters to form the name; touch
Save to confirm.
, one by one,
5.4 Cancelling a button associated with the scenario
The procedure is as follows:
Scenarios  Select the scenario  Setup  Touch
the selected scenario  Associated Buttons 
Select the button to delete  Remove Association  Yes
The control unit confirms the operation carried out; touch
Close.
5.5 Modifying groups associated with a scenario.
To modify the groups involved in a scenario, carry out the following procedure:
Scenarios  Select the scenario  Setup  Touch
the selected scenario  Associated Groups 
Add  Deselect the groups to delete and Select the ones to associate  Options  Next  Set the actuators in the desired state Next (saving the scenario with the new settings of all the actuators).
Group selection and deselection are identified by the icons  and  respectively.
The control unit confirms the operation carried out.
Note: Saving implies deleting the previous scenario.
5.6 Saving a scenario.
The menu enables saving the configured scenarios.
Scenarios  Select the scenario  Setup  Touch
the selected scenario  Save  Yes  Set
the actuators in the desired state  Next (saving the scenario with the new settings of all the actuators)
Note: Saving implies deleting the previous scenario.
5.7 Remote activation of a scenario.
This menu is used to enable remote activation of the desired scenarios via the communication interface and phone
communicator.
Scenarios  Select the scenario to activate  Setup  Touch
Parameters  Activation  Yes  Set  Save
the selected scenario
 Scenario
It is then necessary to configure telephone communicator 01941 or 01942 as described in the instructions manual
for this device.
5.8 Deleting a scenario.
To delete a scenario, follow the procedure below:
Scenarios  Select the scenario to delete
Scenario  Yes
 Setup  Touch
the selected scenario
 Remove
The control unit confirms the deletion has been completed.
61
Programming events
6. Programming events
The By-me system enables creating advanced management functions that enable performing operations at certain
times and/or when certain events occur, among which interaction with the intrusion detection alarm system. These
functions can later be modified or even removed.
Up to 16 different programs can be set; days of the week can be selected for each program, and the program time
and duration can be set for each day of the week.
Each program must have at least one active input or Timer function and one output. The maximum number of
inputs and outputs that can be associated with a program is equal to 2.
The elements (Input IN 1 and Input IN 2, which can be selected during program creation/modification) that can be
used to activate a function are:
• ON message from a group;
• OFF message from a group;
• ON or OFF message from a group;
• scenario activation message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM alarm message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM activation message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM disconnection message;
• timed program.
The commands that can be output (Output OUT 1 and Output OUT 2) are:
• ON message to a group;
• OFF message to a group;
• ON message when an event occurs, and OFF message when the event has ended;
• OFF message when an event occurs, and ON message when the event has ended;
• scenario activation message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM activation message;
• message for Always OFF and resetting the condition for a load control group.
6.1 Programming.
6.1.1 Creating a program.
Events  Setup  Add
Assign the name to the program setting:
• New Program index. (1-16) that identifies the number of the program in the list of all the configured ones;
touch
Next to confirm.
• Program Name scrolling through the list of characters displayed, do a
desired letters until you form the name; touch
Next to confirm.
to the right to insert the
You thus enter the Prog Settings menu. that is used to configure the inputs, outputs, logic elements, etc.
62
Programming events
6.1.1.1 Inputs.
Used to configure the program inputs.
Input IN1  Select the type of input you want to use:
• Group GPR
 Next  Select the desired group from the list of the ones configured  Set
• Scenario SCN
 Next  Select the desired scenario from the list of the ones configured  Set
• SAI Operation Next
SAI, SAI on)
 Select the desired operation (SAI alarm, Turning on SAI, Turning off
 Set
• Group Address IDG. This option enables setting the group of a KNX system that is not the By-me system as an input (therefore enabling them to "communicate" with each other).
Group Address IDG
• None ---  Next
 Next  Set the hexadecimal value of the address  Set
 Delete each Association at the Input IN1?  Yes
The input is thus deactivated.
At the end of the selection operations touch
out.
Save. The control unit will confirm the operation carried
The configuration of Input IN2 takes place in exactly the same way.
6.1.1.2 Logic elements.
Used to set the type of command to associate with the Inputs according to their type.
Program Settings  Logic IN1  Select the type of desired command Set
The configuration of Logic IN2 takes place in exactly the same way.
At the end of the selection operations touch
out.
Save. The control unit will confirm the operation carried
The following page shows a table illustrating all the commands that can be associated with the type of
Input selected.
63
Programming events
Inputs
Command
Group GPR and Group
Address IDG
Operation
Group ON
Input valid if an ON message arrives from the group
Group OFF
Input valid if an OFF message arrives from the group
Group On-Off
The input stays valid as long as the group is ON
The input stays valid as long as the group is OFF
Group Off-On
Status Change
-
Scenario SCN
Operation SAI
None ---
Input valid if an ON or OFF message arrives from the group (each message
makes the input valid).
Input valid on activating the scenario.
SAI alarm
Input valid when an alarm is received from the intrusion detection
alarm system
Turning on SAI
Input valid if the Intrusion Detection Alarm System is on (stays valid until
turned off).
Turning off SAI
Input valid if the Intrusion Detection Alarm System is off (stays valid until
turned on).
SAI On
Input valid if an ON message arrives from SAI
SAI Off
Input valid if an OFF message arrives from SAI
None
The “Not defined” message will be displayed.
6.1.1.3 Input Logic Elements.
If both Inputs IN1 and IN2 have been configured, it is possible to set whether the program activation signal
is valid when both are true (AND) or at least one of them is true (OR).
Program Settings  Input Logic  Select OR or AND Set
At the end of the operation touch
Save. The control unit confirms the operation carried out.
If only one Input is configured the assigned logic can be any (in this case AND or OR produce the same
result).
The Inputs can be routed to a timer and it is also possible to set one of the Clock options as a program
input condition (see par. 6.1.1.6).
6.1.1.4 Outputs.
Used to configure the program outputs.
Output IN1  Select the type of output you want to use:
• Group GPR
 Next  Select the desired group from the list of the ones configured  Set
• Scenario SCN
64
 Next  Select the desired scenario from the list of the ones configured  Set
Programming events
• SAI Operation Next
 Select the only possible type of operation (SAI on)  Set
• Group Address IDG. This option enables setting the group of a KNX system that is not the By-me system as an output (therefore enabling them to "communicate" with each other).
Group Address IDG
• None ---  Next
 Next  Set the hexadecimal value of the address  Set
 Delete each Association at the Output OUT1?  Yes
The output is deactivated.
At the end of the operation touch
Save. The control unit confirms the operation carried out.
The configuration of Output OUT2 takes place in exactly the same way.
6.1.1.5 Logic elements.
Used to set the type of command to associate with the Outputs according to their type.
Program Settings  Logic OUT1  Select the type of desired command Set
At the end of the operation touch
Save. The control unit confirms the operation carried out.
The configuration of Logic OUT2 takes place in exactly the same way.
The following table illustrates all the commands that can be associated with the type of configured output.
Outputs
Group GPR and Group
Address IDG
Command
Operation
Switching ON
ON message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid.
Switching OFF
OFF message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid.
Pulse ON
Pulse OFF
Scenario SCN
-
Operation SAI
Turning on SAI
None ---
None
ON message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid, OFF message
when they are not valid.
OFF message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid, ON message
when they are not valid.
Scenario activation with valid program.
Connect Intrusion Detection Alarm System (zones associated with
the control unit) with valid program.
The “Not defined” message will be displayed.
65
Programming events
6.1.1.6 Timing.
With this menu you can control switching the program on/off at programmed times and/or only on specific
days of the week.
Program Settings  Timing  Select the desired timing:
- Weekly clock: weekly daily programming of events in steps of 10 minutes.
- Period clock: programming, with time for beginning and end, of at most 2 daily events during the week.
- Cyclic clock: turning programmed events on/off according to the set time intervals.
- Timer: sets the duration of the programmed event
- None: disables the timing function.
Touch
Next.
• Weekly clock.
It is possible for each day to set ON periods with triggering every 10 minutes.
Imposta
Select ON or OFF with
respectively upwards
Indietro
Select the desired day of the week.
or downwards
; do a
to the
right > or to the left < to move along the axis of 24h in steps of 10 minutes; the histogram will be
Indietro
updated.
Imposta
The ON option activates the program for 10 minutes while OFF deactivates it; repeat the procedure for
all the time slots to change, then confirm with Set.
Touching
C expands the previously made selection ON or OFF forwards or backwards.
Select another day of the week and proceed as above; using Copy from....., it is possible to assign
the selected day with the program of any other day of the week; then select the day to copy and touch
Next.
After programming, confirm the settings made with Set.
• Period clock
For each day of the week it is possible to have the program turn on and off twice by setting the timer
in steps of one minute.
Select the desired day of the week.
Set the time for starting and ending each of the 2 events or one only, touching.
the corresponding item then confirm with Set.
N.B.: To delete an event, set the end time so it coincides with or is prior to its starting time. Deleting
event 1 also deletes event 2.
The Copy from..... button enables copying the program of a day that has already been set onto another one to set; the procedure is similar to the one used for the weekly clock.
After programming, confirm the settings made with Set.
66
Programming events
•Cyclic clock
Cyclically repeats an event (ON-OFF) according to the set duration and in an independent way to the
day, date and time.
Touch
Duration ON [h: min]
Set the duration of ON choosing the values of hours and minutes, then confirm with Set.
In a similar manner set Duration OFF [h: min]
After programming, confirm the settings made with Set.
• Timer.
Used to set the duration of the program in hours and minutes.
This function must always be linked to 1 or 2 inputs and 1 or 2 output groups through a Group ON or
Group OFF type message.
The control unit sends the first command when the event occurs and the second when the set time
has elapsed.
Touch
Duration [h: min]
Set the duration choosing the values of hours and minutes, then confirm with Set.
After programming, confirm the settings made with Set.
• None.
Next  Set no Clock among the Inputs and Outputs ?  Yes
Lastly confirm all the settings made by touching
Save.
6.1.2 Renaming a program.
Events  Setup  Select the program to rename  Change Name
Scrolling through the list of characters displayed, do a
you form the name; touch
to the right to insert the desired letters until
Save to confirm.
6.1.3 Editing a program.
Events  Setup  Select the program to edit  Program Settings
Scroll through the list of parameters (Input IN1, Logic IN1, Output OUT1, Input Logic, etc.) to edit the ones
you want according to the procedures illustrated from par. 6.1.1.1 to par. 6.1.1.6.
6.1.4 Deleting a program.
Events  Setup  Select the program to delete
Program?  Yes
 Remove Program  Proceed to Remove the
The selected program will be removed and the control unit will confirm the operation carried out.
67
Programming events
6.2 Operation.
The initial screen of the Events menu, which is accessed via the Main Menu, displays one of the created programs. For example
Events
Programme 01
Garden Sprinkler
enabled
Touching
etc.).
Eventi
Programma 01
Annaffiatore Giardino
attivato
Touching
Setup
Menu
Eventi
Programma 01
Annaffiatore Giardino
attivato
Menu
Setup
displays
the information on the selected program (Inputs IN, Outputs OUT, Timing, Current Status,
Setup
Menu
displays the options for managing the selected program:
- Stop Program to stop the currently active selected program.
- Activate Program Outputs to activate all the outputs associated with the selected program.
- Deactivate Program Outputs to deactivate all the outputs associated with the selected program.
The control unit will always display a message confirming the operation carried out.
68
Programming events
6.3 Application Examples.
6.3.1 Switch on outside lights in the evening.
• Desired program:
• Switch on outside lights in the evening;
• Switch on the lights depending on light conditions, and in any case not before 18:00;
• Switch off at 24:00.
• Weekly clock timing: use a program with operations starting at 18:00 and ending at 24:00, which is the
same for all days of the week.
• Inputs: dusk/dawn sensor input through a command interface (Eikon 20515, Arké 19515, Idea 16955;
Plana 14515).
Create a group that contains the command interface to be used as input IN1 of the lighting program. The
command interface will send an ON message if light intensity is low or an ON message if the light intensity
is high.
• Outputs: relay actuator (Eikon 20535, Arké 19535, Idea 16975, Plana 14535, 01850.2) that must belong to
the output group of the lighting program.
Set the relay in two-position stable mode. Select Pulse ON as output message.
Note.
A command interface is used as an input IN1 because an external dusk/dawn sensor is used, which is not
available in the Vimar catalogue.
Warning!
The dusk/dawn sensor must be placed in an area where it is not directly exposed to other light sources
(for example car headlights), so that the outside lights are not switched off each time another light
source is detected.
PROGRAMMING
18:00 - 24:00
bus INPUT 1:
Events Programme
Programme 01
bus
OUTPUT 1:
ON-OFF
enabled
Menu
Contact interface
Setup
Actuator
Control unit
Perimeter lights
circuit
POWER SUPPLY
12-24 V
LIGHT SENSOR
FOR OUTDOOR
USE
L
N
69
Programming events
6.3.2 Daily watering.
• Desired program:
• water the garden in the evening;
• start the program at 20:00 hours, but only if the moisture level in the soil requires it;
• water two different areas of the garden at different times, for a period of 15 minutes in each area.
• Weekly clock timing: a timer program is used for the required days.
The timer program is then set with operations starting at 20:00 and ending at 20:40. The “start watering”
command will be sent to the relay for area 1, and the “stop watering” command will be sent automatically
after 15 minutes.
The “start watering” command will be sent to the relay for area 2 after the first 15 minutes of watering, and
the “stop watering” command will be sent automatically after 15 minutes.
• Inputs:
• Input from moisture sensor through a command interface (Eikon 20515, Arké 19515, Idea 16955; Plana
14515).
Create a group that contains the command interface to be used as Input IN1 of the watering program.
The command interface will send an ON message if watering is required or an OFF message if the level
of moisture in the soil means that watering is not required.
Set the interface to “normal” or “inverted” operation, depending on the specifications of the moisture
sensor (NO or NC).
• On/off override input from a push-button (for example Eikon 20521, Arké 19521, Idea 16961; Plana
14521).
This device must be used only if you want to be able to manually force or inhibit watering; forcing is
possible only if the time program is valid.
Add the device to a group and associate it with Input IN2 of the watering program; select the operating
mode as an ON/OFF rocker switch.
Set the Input Logic selecting AND so that watering is done only if both inputs are ON (enable signal
from the moisture sensor and from the button); or OR so that watering is done if at least one of the two
inputs is ON (enable signal from the moisture sensor or from the button). With the condition of AND it is
therefore possible with the button to inhibit the watering function; with the condition of OR it is instead
possible with the button to force the watering function.
•Outputs:
• Create two output groups; in the first group set the relay as one-position stable with an off delay of 15
minutes; in the second group set the relay as one-position stable with an on delay of 15 minutes and
an off delay of 15 minutes. Set ON as the output message.
70
Programming events
Note.
For the required functionality, the moisture sensor must be placed in an area not affected by the watering, so
that the water itself does not cause the sensor to react.
Warning!
When first installed, the attachment interface must be made to react at least once, in order to indicate
the status to the control unit. This operation can be carried out on the moisture sensor itself, or by
closing and then re-opening the contacts on the interface using a jumper.
PROGRAMMING
20:00 - 20:40
Events Programme
bus
OUTPUT 1:
ON ONLY
Programme 02
bus INPUT 1:
enabled
Menu
Contact interface
Setup
Watering enable signal
Actuator
OFF delay 15 min
bus
INPUT 2
Control unit
20:00 - 20:15
bus
OUTPUT 2:
ON ONLY
POWER SUPPLY
12-24 V
20:15 - 20:30
MOISTURE
SENSOR
Toggle switches
Watering
enable signal
Actuator
ON delay 15 min
OFF delay 15 min
71
Programming events
6.3.3 Roller shutter automation.
• Desired program: lower all the shutters after 21.00, or when it becomes windy.
Create a scenario that closes all the roller shutters; the scenario should be called up when one of the two
required condition occurs.
Create two programs; the first will be a timer program that calls the scenario that closes the shutters at the
desired time. The second one will be a program that calls a scenario when there is activation of a command
interface connected to a wind sensor and that is configured in an automation group that will be an input for
the program.
6.3.4 Load management by time slots.
• Desired program: from 8:00 hours to 12:00 hours and from 13:00 hours to 18:00 hours, two load control
groups are to be disabled by load control module 01455
• Time program: a timer program is used to enable the groups in time slots: 00:00-8:00, 12:00-13:00 and
18:00-24:00 (select the “Weekly clock” timing).
• Inputs: none
• Outputs: select the two groups of the load control system that are to be controlled, then select Pulse ON
as the output message.
6.3.5 Activation of the intrusion detection alarm system without using the transponder keys
and switching off all the lights (typical application used in offices).
• Desired program: activation of the intrusion detection alarm system, switching off lights and lowering shutters by pressing two buttons at the same time.
Create a scenario that switches off all the lights and lowers the shutters (Scenario “Off”).
• Inputs: creation of two groups, each one with a simple push-button. Modify the parameters of the pushbuttons and set the “push-button” operation.
• Outputs:
SAI activation message.
scenario message “Off".
• Input logic: AND.
72
Intrusion Detection Alarm System Integration
7. Integration of the passive infrared presence detectors and the contacts interfaces.
As already mentioned in the previous chapters, if the By-me system incorporates the intrusion detection alarm
system (or future incorporation is planned), the control unit must be configured in Area 00 and Line 00 together
with the intrusion detection alarm devices.
The passive infrared presence detectors (Eikon 20485-20486, Arké 19485-19486, Idea 16935 and Plana 14485 or
wall-mounting 01828), the dual technology detectors (Eikon 20487, Arké 19487, Idea 16937 and Plana 14487) and
the contacts interfaces (Eikon 20490.1, 20491, Arké 19490.1, 19491, Idea 16940.1, 16941 and Plana 14490.1,
14491) can be used in three ways:
1. installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System, configured from the control unit and not visible to the other
systems;
2. installed in the lighting control system, configured from the control unit and not visible to the other systems;
3. installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System, configured from the control unit and visible also from the lighting control system.
Methods 1. and 2. are the normal configurations of the device for the two above systems; in method 3. the devices
are configured as follows:
• the device is installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System and configured from the control unit;
• the device is afterwards configured by the control unit as belonging to a group of the automation system.
• it is lastly necessary to “open” the group on the router manually or select Sync router.
When the Intrusion Detection Alarm System is not on, the device sends an ON message to the selected group.
Summing up, then, after configuring the infrared detector as an intrusion detection alarm system, insert it in an
automation group. To include the IR detector in a group by the control unit, see paragraph 4.4.1 on page 29.
The presence detectors have the Brightness threshold parameter that by default is set to 100 (maximum value);
the value will be lowered depending on the brightness of the environment in which the detector is installed (for very
bright environments the brightness threshold will be set to 0).
Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for the associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any additional
movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the end of this time
a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
When the sensors detect a presence and the brightness is suitable, or when the contacts of the contact interfaces
are opened, the parameters of these devices are managed by the control unit in the intrusion detection alarm system group (zone) in which they are configured.
Note.
• For all the information on the intrusion detection alarm system, see the Intrusion Detection Alarm System section
in this manual.
• It is possible to configure the inputs 1 and 2 of the contacts interfaces 20490.1, 19490.1, 16940.1, 14490.1 in
two different automation groups; during the configuration procedure, press the configuration button once to configure input 1 and press the configuration button twice to configure input 2.
• As regards the contacts interface 20490.1, 19490.1, 16940.1 and 14490.1, if the inputs have been configured in the
Automation system too, the relays of these groups will command only if the SAI zone of the interface is switched off
(therefore with the intrusion detection alarm system switched off or partially switched on with the relevant zone being off).
73
Diagnostics and maintenance
8. Diagnostics and maintenance.
8.1 Diagnostics and replacement of devices.
This sections describes the procedures for checking the device functions and how to replace them if necessary.
Setup  Diagnostics  Device diagnostics
The control unit starts a scanning procedure for monitoring the operation of all the configured devices ; if they all
work the No device failure message is displayed.
If any faulty devices are found, they will be shown on the control unit display; on touching
the control unit will ask whether to replace or remove this device.
Select Renew device to go ahead and replace it or Remove device to delete it.
Confirm by touching
the desired device
Yes.
When making a replacement, if a new device without a configuration is used, the control unit displays an error
message; in this case proceed as illustrated in par. 4.5.8
Press the configuration push-button for the New device, after a few seconds the control unit confirms the replacement.
IMPORTANT
Follow the control unit instructions for replacing the faulty part.
At the end of the operation the control unit signals the result; in case of error the display shows the cause that
generated it and the solution to implement.
Warning:
When a device is replaced, all the parameters of the replaced device are restored to the new device, as these
parameters are also stored on the control unit. The only exception to this is the values stored in the actuators, and
the data related to scenarios.
To recreate the scenario as it was before replacement of the device, proceed as follows:
• call the scenario, so that all actuators involved go into the statuses stored in the scenario;
• place the device in the position desired for the scenario;
• save the scenario in the control unit again, as described in paragraph 6.5 “Saving a scenario”, page 61], checking that the actuators are in the desired position.
N.B.
• It is not possible to renew the infrared receiver (Eikon 20516, Arké 19516, Idea 16956; Plana 14516) via the diagnostics menu; after identifying the faulty device it is then necessary to remove it and reconfigure the replacement
receiver as if it were a new device and finally re-associating the buttons of the remote control.
• If replacing an actuator with relay output (Eikon 20535, Arké 19535, Idea 16975; Plana 14535) associated with
the Load Control function, it is necessary from the control unit to force the new actuator ON and then bring it back
to the desired operating condition.
• If replacing a thermostat (Eikon 20513-20514, Arké 19513-19514, Idea 16953-16954; Plana 14513-14514) via
the Diagnostics menu, the control unit resets it in Local mode and in the OFF status.
74
Diagnostics and maintenance
8.2 Remote communications management.
8.2.1 Remote control.
To enable or disable remote control through the TP interface/telephone communicator 01848, follow the procedure below:
Setup  Diagnostics  Remote Diagnostics
Select Enabled or Disabled and confirm with Save.
To manage the communications, refer to the instruction sheet for the TP interface/telephone communicator
01848 or the instructions manual of the communicator 01942.
It is then possible to run system diagnostics with the GSM communicator that will inform the user about the
number and type of faulty devices with the respective physical address.
The remote diagnostics can be run for a maximum number of 8 control units provided that the 8 systems
belonging to them (one for each control unit) are connected to a BUS via the appropriate Routers and
in at least one of these there is a GSM communicator.
To perform this operation, keep meticulously to the procedures described in the instructions manual of the
GSM communicators 01941, 01942 and interface 01848 (that must be combined with 01941).
8.3 Information on the control unit and system.
The procedure is as follows:
Setup  Information
Then select the information that you want to view:
• System information: HW version, SW version, etc.
• System status: Clock ok, etc.
• Database occupation: Devices n/255, Groups n/480, etc.
75
Installation rules - Compliance with regulations
9. Installation rules.
Installation should be carried out in compliance with the current regulations regarding the installation of electrical
systems in the country where the products are installed.
The article must be installed only in a SELV environment.
10. Regulatory compliance.
LV directive
EMC directive
Standard 50428
• Other devices in the system: see the relevant instructions sheet.
11. Supplementary declarations made by the manufacturer.
• The By-me control unit meets the prescriptions of the EN 50130-4 and EN 50090-2-2 standards.
• Operating temperature: -5°C - +45°C (class 3K5).
76
Section
Intrusion detection
77
78
Table of Contents
1. General characteristics of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3. System components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Passive infrared motion detector and with dual technology and recess-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
Digital keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Back-up unit for recess-mounting and on DIN rail (60715 TH35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Siren for outdoor use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Siren for indoor use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Contact interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Relay actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12 Dual technology detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 Transponder reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Smart card reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15 Radio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
88
90
96
99
102
109
113
116
118
126
130
133
135
138
140
4. Powering up the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6. S.A.I. Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 SAI Key management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Message Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4Antitamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Walk test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Events List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 List of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
149
151
153
155
156
156
157
Setting parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Back-up unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Siren for outdoor use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 IR presence detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Dual technology surface-mounting detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Radio-frequency interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Smart card reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Transponder reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 Relay actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Back-up unit for DIN rail (60715 TH35). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11 Indoor siren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12 Dual technology recess-mounting detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.14 Digital keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15 2-input contact interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.16 12 V contact interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
158
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
159
159
159
160
160
160
160
161
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Turning on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Temporary partitioning from control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Partitioning via connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Delayed detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Alarm management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
162
162
162
162
163
7.
8.
9. Summary of indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
79
General characteristics of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The intrusion detection alarm system is used, in residential and commercial sectors, to make intrusion detection alarm
systems with up to 30 zones and, via a contact interface and/or radio interface, to manage technical alarms.
The modular appliances are made with the support hooking system and colours of the Eikon, Arké, Idea
and Plana series.
The system features:
•wiring on two wires. Fast and simplified installation, also in the case of restructuring, using a single pair of
wires for connections, which distributes both the extra low supply voltage (29 V d.c.) and the monitoring
and control signals for the devices.
For the connections use the twisted pair and sheathed cable Vimar 01840.Y (2x0,50 mm , rated voltage to
2
earth 400 V, suited for installation with Category I power cables)
•polarized shunted connection for all devices, without any particular order, respecting the polarities
marked on the terminals.
•infrared detectors with of 17 beams on 4 planes. Vimar patent offering a better angle of detection than
the conventional types with 14 beams on 3 planes.
•dual technology detectors. Available in both recess- and surface-mounting versions, they offer extremely
high performance both in detecting intruders and in preventing false alarms.
•digital keypads. Utmost simplicity and extraordinary flexibility in managing activation/deactivation (total
or partial) of the system via differentiated numerical codes (up to at most 30 PIN codes).
•transponder keys. Absolute safety and reliability when switching the system on and off. They also permit
switching on the system partially according to the configuration of the connectors. They offer billions of
encrypted combinations from which the system auto-assigns the one that will then be acknowledged.
They work without a battery, so they have unlimited, maintenance-free operation.
•remote control. Can switch the system on and off, using the RF interface as connector.
•back-up unit. Houses the batteries (not supplied) that in the event of a power failure supply the system
for the time prescribed by the standards. Available in the recess-mounting version or for installation in a
consumer unit.
•contact interfaces. Available in three different types (with 1 or 2 inputs or with 12 V d.c. outputs), they enable connecting the bus system with detectors such as: magnetic contacts for doors and windows, cord
contacts for the protection of roller shutters, impact contacts for the protection of doors and windows,
infrared barriers. In addition, they can be used to generate technical alarms.
•simplified configuration. By pressing the front push-button of the devices connected to the BUS, the
components dialogue with each other and self-learn the configuration parameters.
When configuration is complete it is always possible to identify any device by pressing the push-button on the
control unit.
•partitioning. Up to 30 different zones; each zone can freely be partitioned. Each user can be assigned a
partition and it is also possible to actuate partial activation/deactivation.
•RF interface. Allows using the sensors and remote controls of the Radio Frequency system to extend coverage
in places where it is not possible to add any cables. It works as a connector so it is possible to switch the system
on totally or partially by means of the remote controls. In addition, they can be used to generate technical alarms.
80
General characteristics of the system
•optical anti-tamper. All the devices are protected against attempted tampering, including disconnection
and short-circuiting of the connection line; the related messages are managed via BUS. The modular
Eikon, Arké, Idea and Plana devices are equipped with an infrared optical anti-tamper: each device
protects itself by emitting an infrared ray at the back that alerts the system upon the slightest attempt at
tampering. This solution, patented by Vimar, requires no additional mechanical devices, it eliminates the
risk of false alarms and simplifies and reduces the work of installation.
•system customization. The control unit permits customizing according to the characteristics of the rooms
and the methods of using the system, the parameters of the various devices (e.g., trigger time of the
detectors and perimeter sensors, detection threshold, sensitivity of the anti-tamper).
Connection diagram for the intrusion detection alarm system incorporated in the automation system
230 V ~
01401
BUS
01806
01829.1
20483
20485
20487
BUS 2
BUS
+
-
BUS 1
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
AAA NiMH 1,2 V
AAA NiMH 1,2 V
Setup
PROG
29 V d.c.
230 V ~
01401
01845
01804.01
01803.01
21509
20490
01820 - 01821
01822 - 01823
01825-01826
20493
8
BUS
+ -
12-30 V
12-24 V
01942
AUX
01738
01744
In the above diagram the control unit 21509 is configured in Area 00 and Line 00; the line coupler 01845
(Router) is used for integration with the line on which the automation system devices are configured (see
par. 4.4.12 on page 33).
N.B. The intrusion detection alarm system is powered by the back-up unit 01804; the output “AUX 29 V
d.c.” of the power supply 01401 (intrusion detection alarm system line) is connected with the 29 V input
of the back-up unit that powers the BUS via the “BUS” terminal.
81
General characteristics of the system
Connectable devices
The total number of connected devices, in any case, must always be less than or equal to 60 (the transponder
keys must not be included in the count). The table gives the minimum and maximum number of “addressable” devices for each system.
As regards the number of effectively “connectable” devices, refer to the system card that determines the number
according to the required operating time.
Connectable devices
Product
Control unit
minimum nr.
maximum nr
1
1
Connector0
**
Digital keypad
0
Back-up unit 01804 or 01807
1
2
Auxiliary battery holder unit 01803
0
2
Siren for outdoor and indoor use
0
4
Relay actuator
0
Contact interfaces
0
IR detectors for recess and surface mounting
0
Power supply
1
2
Transponder key
0
28
Dual technology surface and recess mounting detectors
0
Transponder reader
0
Smart card reader
0
Radio interface
0
Touch screen
0
Remote control
0
)
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
**
4
*
40
The maximum number of relay actuators, contact interfaces, I.R. detectors, dual technology detectors,
digital keypads and touch screens is determined by the number and type of devices in the system.
) The total number of connectors, transponder readers, smart card readers and radio interfaces must always
be less than or equal to 16
**
N.B. The total number of connected devices, in any case, must always be less than or equal to 60 (the
transponder keys, control unit, power supplies and remote controls must not be included in the count).
The total number of sirens for indoor use must be no more than 4.
82
General characteristics of the system
Project criteria
Making a burglar alarm system involves the following phases:
•determining the rooms to protect;
•identifying the number of zones in which you want to split up the system;
•determining the number of detectors and their location;
• choosing the location of the control unit, connectors, any relay actuators, contact interfaces, any radio interfaces
with the RF sensors to be associated
After setting the system project you move on to sizing it.
Sizing the system
The two main rules to observe for sizing the system correctly are the following:
• observe the maximum length of the connection cables between the devices (see following paragraph);
• correct sizing of the power supply sources according to the size of the system you intend to make; it is fundamental to permit an adequate operating time (24 h) in the event of a 230 V~ mains power failure.
• if the input of the devices connected on the bus (except for the control unit and the back-up unit) is greater than
320 mA, it is necessary to add a second back-up unit connected to a second power supply 01401.
Maximum length of connections
The following rules must be observed:
• maximum length of the connections between the back-up units and the most distant device: 180 m;
• maximum distance between a device and the most distant device: 360 m;
• if using two back-up units you need to connect them at a greater distance apart than 40 m.
• maximum distance between back-up unit and its power supply 01401: 1 m.
• maximum distance between back-up unit and auxiliary battery holder unit 01803: 1 m.
Note. Obviously, the rules are the same for both types of backup unit (recess-mounting and DIN rail).
83
General characteristics of the system
A: 180 m max
AUX + Power supply 01401
BUS + -
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
B: 180 m max
Maximum length per section
AUX + Power supply 01401
BUS + -
C > 40 m
A: 180 m max
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
B: 180 m max
A = max distance between back-up unit and the most distant device
B = max distance between back-up unit and the most distant device
C = distance between two back-up units
Maximum length of the line
84
General characteristics of the system
Checking power input
To be able to size the system correctly, therefore checking the necessary number of back-up units, there is a
system card to fill in at the time of preparing and sizing.
This card, summarising the system configuration and programming, is particularly helpful when expanding
the system and/or for subsequent maintenance.
The card must be completed carefully following the instructions it gives and taking account of the following: normally is required, for burglar alarm systems, requires a minimum operating time of 24 h in the event of a power
failure (the operating time is 8 h if there is a communicator).
In these conditions the back-up unit 01804… can deliver a current of 60 mA for a time of 24 h.
If the total system consumption is less than or equal to 60 mA it is therefore possible to use just one back-up unit.
For consumption above this limit you need to determine the back-up units and auxiliary back-up units 01803... to
use by filling in the system card. The auxiliary back-up units 01803... supply another 60 mA for 24 h.
To ensure an operating time of 24 h, the system power input must not however exceed 240 mA (2 back-up units
01804... and 2 auxiliary back-up units 01803...).
Note
In the event of a mains power failure, the control unit gives a battery power message and disables switching on
the display backlighting so as to reduce consumption (passing on to a consumption of 30 mA); also the siren for
outdoor use no longer draws current from the bus and, in this manner, the buffer battery of the back-up unit has
a longer life.
If the voltage powering the siren for outdoor use has a very low value it means that the battery is running down;
this causes a short alarm cycle, only if enabled.
85
Installation
2. Installation
Installation of the back-up unit 01804 and 01807.
Make the connections to the line, but leave the battery's quick couplers disconnected.
IMPORTANT!
When connecting two or more back-up units it is mandatory to observe the polarity of the BUS and power
supply line.
The colours of the two line wires help observe the polarities.
Polarity reversal trips the 500 mA time-delayed fuse or thermal fuse in the back-up unit.
Installation of the siren for outdoor use (01806)
• For the cable passage use the PC port;
• After securing the siren, make the connections as shown in the figure and connect the battery respecting the polarities; polarity reversal breaks the protection fuse;
•After making the connections, leave the enclosure open to be able, afterwards, using the push-button,
to configure the siren in the configuration procedure for the entire system;
Horn
Battery
Battery connection terminal
PC (cable passage port)
Terminal for connection to the
BUS
Configuration button
Flash lamp bulb
86
Installation
Installing modular flush-mounting appliances (control unit, digital keypads, connectors, IR
detectors, contact interfaces, relay actuators, RF interface).
Hook the appliances to the supports in the desired positions taking care that the optical tamper is positioned at
the bottom (see figure below).
The only connections to make are the ones to the bus.
It is necessary to observe the set polarity (each component has its terminals marked with + and -).
IMPORTANT!!
The detectors must be fitted taking care that the lens is always facing downwards (also the configuration
button and the LED must always be facing downwards).
The anti-tamper protection on all the flush-mounting components is optical (Vimar patent).
- an infrared LED on the back of the appliance emits a beam of IR rays, with variable power, onto the bottom of
the flush-mounting box;
- a receiver detects and checks the reflected ray;
If there is a fault, such as a decrease in reflection (an attempt at extracting the device from the box) and/or break
in the beam (attempted break-in), the system will generate an alarm.
Note
The anti-tamper system is based on the reflection of the infrared rays from the bottom of the flush-mounting box;
it is therefore necessary for it to be integral and of a colour other than black (black does not reflect IR rays).
87
System components
3. System components.
3.1 Control unit
3.2. Passive infrared and dual technology detectors
3.3 Connector and transponder key
3.4 Digital keypads
3.5. Back-up unit for recess-mounting and on DIN rail
3.6 Siren for outdoor use
3.7 Siren for indoor use
3.8. Power supplies
3.9 Contacts interface
3.10 Relay actuator
3.11 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting
3.12 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
3.13 Transponder reader
3.14 Smart card reader
3.15 Radio interface + remote control
3.1 Control unit.
The control unit with a touch screen display governs the operation of the entire system. It displays all the control
information and is used for preliminary programming, configuration and, more generally, manage the system in its
various states of operation.
The control unit permits splitting up the system into 30 separate zones (zone 31 is reserved for configuring the
back-up units, the sirens and for a radio interface or contact interface to implement the Panic function) and saves
up to 80 events such as switching on/off, alarms, etc.
Control unit main screen.
The control
unit's main screen displays the icons relating to the options most frequently used by the user.
Antintrusione
•
•
ntintrusione
Impianto
attivato •
ntintrusione
OK
Impianto
Nessun
Allarme the
attivato
Menu Setup
OK
Nessun Allarme
•
Menu Setup
Impianto
Antintrusione
attivato
: deactivates
signalling the current alarm;
Impianto
OK
attivato
Nessun
Allarme
OK
Menu
Setup
Allarme
:Nessun
displays
a chronological list of the detected
Menu Setup
alarms;
: deactivates the system (when the system is deactivated the displayed icon is that, if selected, activates
intrusion detection alarm system);
: used to obtain a quick partitioning that will involve all the connectors (done by any user or connector).
Note.
On a line on which there is a control unit 21509, a second control unit cannot be configured (21509 or 2155020550-14550 + 01960 or the 2-module intrusion detection alarm system and/or automation control units).
88
System components
Alarm System
SAI
on
OK
No Allarm
Menu Setup
As already illustrated above, the icons are selected by touching the desired one.
If, after a time-out of approximately 90 s, no operation is carried out, the control unit display switches off and activates the screen save (if enabled) showing the time, day and date (setting what you want to be displayed is done
using the “Settings” menu).
If personal security codes have been set (installer PIN, different users, etc.), access is only possible after entering
the code; each PIN will enable using the menus for which the user has been enabled (see paragraph 4.4.4).
89
System components
3.2 Passive infrared motion detector with dual technology, recess-mounting
3.2.1 Passive infrared motion sensor
The passive infrared presence detector is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion of heatemitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation
and the intrusion detection alarm system, it is able to control a relay, with the intrusion detection alarm system
off, that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation section).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20485: 2 Eikon modules
194855: 2 Arké modules
16935: 2 Idea modules
14485: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 8 mA
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor and of the anti-tamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
Indicators
• detects the motion of warm bodies in its area of coverage by means of the Fresnel lens;
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking due to detecting intrusion or attempted break-in of the device;
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore
it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm. This characteristic is useful to highlight the path followed by any intruder.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase;
The area of detection, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4
planes (Vimar patent).
90
System components
Installation
For the infrared presence detector to work properly you need to follow these installation rules:
- do not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat;
NO
NO
NO
NO
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control unit and shows
it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without
the system immediately triggering an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards, leave
by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating any alarm.
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Activation delay (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous);
3) Pulse threshold (default value 3): the detector, when it detects the presence of a warm body in its area
of coverage, produces a sequence of pulses; they are considered valid only if they have a greater duration than
that of the threshold fixed by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm, it is necessary to exceed the number of pulses (the threshold value)
set by the user; the greater the set value the greater the "tolerance" with which the device will signal an alarm
condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) Time threshold (default value 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which
an alarm message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
91
System components
5) Brightness threshold (default value 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed
with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
At bottom left there is a rear view of the infrared detector.
6) Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for
the associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any
additional movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the
end of this time a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
Area of coverage of the infrared detector lens
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
A
1,2
B
C
D
0
m 0
1,5
8
A = 3 beams +6
B = 3 beams +0
C = 3 beams -20
D = 3 beams -30
RIVE
LATO
RE P
IR
BUS
A
C
B
C
B
10
Rating
A
C
B
C
B
A
B
C
B
Angle of detection
8m
D
1,5 m
D
D
112
• Explored solid angle:
- 112 horizontal
- 36 vertical
- 17 sectors on 4 planes
• Range: 10 m max (8 m typical)
3.2.2 Adjustable passive infrared motion detector.
This device, available for the Eikon and Arké series, is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion
of heat-emitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation and the intrusion detection alarm system, it is able to control a relay, with the intrusion detection alarm
system off, that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation section). The
detector is equipped with an articulated lens for installation at the top of a room and with lids for adjusting the cover.
The technical specifications are similar to the infrared detector 20485-16935-14485.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20486: 2 Eikon modules
19486: 2 Arké modules
Horizontal axis adjustment: 40°
Vertical axis adjustment: 22°
92
System components
3.2.3 Dual technology presence detector.
The dual technology sensor incorporates a microwave sensor and an infrared sensor and is able to signal people
or animals passing through its area of coverage. The dual technology enables making the sensor insensitive to the
most common causes of false alarms.
The sensor functions in "AND" mode, this means that, when either sensor detects motion in the area of coverage
it remains on pre-alarm awaiting confirmation from the other sensor as well. Once this condition occurs the device
sends the signal to the control unit.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20487: 2 Eikon modules
19487: 2 Arké modules
16937: 2 Idea modules
14487: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- Infrared and microwave sensor
- Operation: in “AND” mode with system on and only infrared with system off
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
Indicators
• Detecting the motion of warm bodies in the area of coverage by means of an infrared sensor.
When the system is active, the device detects the presence of bodies in motion also via a microwave sensor;
if the microwave sensor and the infrared sensor simultaneously detect the motion an alarm signal is sent (AND
function).
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking in the event of an intrusion alarm or attempted tampering with the device; the LED continues to blink
until the alarm that caused it is cancelled or the system is turned on again. Therefore it is not enough to turn off
the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
93
System components
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase.
The detection zone, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4 planes
(Vimar patent) and by a microwave detector with an area of coverage of 80° on the horizontal plane and 30° on
the vertical plane.
Side view
Front view
80° microwaves
30° microwaves
1,2 m
12
A = 11 rays
B = 9 rays
C = 3 rays
C
2
4
6
10
A
B
8
8
10 m
6
4
2
m
105° infrared
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Anti-tamper (default 0 that is disabled): the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be set with
a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
2) LED management: LED on, off and blinking can be associated with particular states of the device or system.
3) Activation delay (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous);
4) Pulse threshold (default value 3): the detector, when it detects the presence of a warm body in its area
of coverage, produces a sequence of pulses; they are considered valid only if they have a greater duration than
that of the threshold fixed by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm, it is necessary to exceed the number of pulses (the threshold value)
set by the user; the greater the set value the greater the "tolerance" with which the device will signal an alarm
condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
5) Brightness threshold (default value 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed
with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
At bottom left there is a rear view of the infrared detector.
6) Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for
the associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any
additional movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the end
of this time a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application.
If the detector is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, configuration must always be
performed first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this, the
Automation group must be added to the Router using the specific menu Configuration  Router  Router
Management.
94
System components
Installation
For the dual technology presence detector to work properly you need to follow these
installation rules:
- do not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat;
- do not put any metal items nearby;
- do not put two or more detectors in overlapping areas of coverage.
NO
NO
NO
NO
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control unit and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating an alarm.
Example Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system you have 30 s to get out; if you go back in after 30 s have passed and therefore with
the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it signals an alarm.
Device reset
On the control unit Configuration
the red LED lights up.
 Reset management  Reset device and press detector button until
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
95
System components
3.3 Connector
The connector is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or the associated partitioned zones) after
recognising the code emitted by the transponder keys.
It is supplied in the following versions
20482: 2 Eikon modules
19482: 2 Arké modules
16932: 2 Idea modules
14482: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with active infrared sensor built in
- Consumption: 10 mA
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the anti-tamper system.
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit.
The connector is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a transponder key with over 1000 billion possible combinations.
Note: Do not put two connectors next to each other on the same box.
Operation
It reads the code of the transponder key to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal operation it turns
the system on and off sending the code to the control unit.
Indicators
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking
until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough
to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
The LED blinks even when the key code has not been acknowledged.
• green LED blinking:
- the key code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
96
System components
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on in total mode;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the transponder must activate an actuator located in the same zone as the connector when the key is brought near and the system is on.
3) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the transponder must activate an
actuator located in the same zone as the connector when the key is brought near and the system is off.
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
INSE
RITO
RE
BUS
97
System components
• Transponder key
The transponder keys (01815), which need neither maintenance nor batteries,
are special devices, of the size of a key ring, whose function is similar to that of
conventional remote controls.
Each key is equipped with a unique code that is different for each one (1000 billion possible combinations) and, depending on the configuration assigned to the
connectors, it is possible to turn the alarm system on and/or off or partition it.
The transponder keys are closely correlated to the connectors that, in the phase
of configuration, store the codes they contain and send them to the control unit
for recognition.
Operation
The inductive coupling between the connector, which contains the primary winding of a transformer, and
the transponder key, which contains the secondary winding (coil in a small capsule), generates energy that
activates the secondary winding, which responds by modulating and transmitting the code.
The code is transmitted by setting the transponder key into contact (as shown by the position of the arrow) with
the connector, which is recognised and signalled to the system.
The keys can be called SAI and Special SAI.
• SAI: used to switch the system on/off with any one of the connectors in the system; it switches on the
partitions and therefore the zones matched with the connector.
Each connector can be coupled with up to 24 SAI keys, whose code can be recognised by all the connectors
• Special SAI: allows turning the system on/off only via the connector through which it was configured
and it activates only the zones associated with it.
Each connector can be coupled with up to 4 Special SAI keys.
The Special SAI key can be associated, on the same connector, with different partitions to the SAI key.
98
System components
3.4 Digital keypad
By means of a code typed on the keypad, this device allows the system to be activated or deactivated according to the association of the partitions into which the system is subdivided.
It is supplied in the following versions
20483: 2 Eikon modules
19483: 2 Arké modules
16933: 2 Idea modules
14483: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button (button C)
- Warning buzzer: 85 dB(A) at 10 cm from the keypad
- LED signalling each time the button is pressed; the OK button has a two-tone red/green LED
- It stores up to 30 different 5-digit codes (100,000 combinations)
Operation
The device is used for total or partial activation and deactivation of the burglar alarm system.
Using the 12-key pad it is possible to type in a 5-digit PIN (access code) which then allows the user to
select the partitions to be switched on or off; a partition is a set of zones that are switched on or off at
the same time.
Each PIN must be associated on the control unit with one or more partitions; this PIN is used to activate
or deactivate only the partitions with which it has been associated.
Up to 9 different partitions can be created on the control unit.
Start-up procedure
1- reset the keypad (see Reset procedure of the device on page 147)
2- configure the keypad (see Add bus devices procedure on page 146)
3- enter a 5-digit PIN to be used as an access code on the control unit (see SAI key management –
Registering new key and PIN digital keypad page 152)
4- enter at least one partition (Partition – Partition management page 149)
5- associate the PIN with the partition(s) created (partition – association of partitions - keypad codes
page 151)
99
System components
The digital keypad is used in a simple manner to switch the system completely or partially on and off as well as
display the state of the system.
This all happens by means of these simple operations:
- enter a 5-digit PIN code and view the state of the system
- select the partitions to switch on/off
- confirm the operations and view the new state of the system
Procedure for entering PIN code and displaying system status
Key in the 5-digit PIN (access code) on the keypad and then press OK:
- if the PIN is not recognized as valid, the OK button blinks red for 5 seconds;
- if the code is recognized as valid, the button backlighting switches on for the currently active partition (on) in the
system and the OK button blinks green.
Procedure for turning the system on/off
Each numerical key takes on the meaning of signalling and controlling the corresponding partition; button 1 controls partition 1, button 2 controls partition 2 and so on.
The back-lighting of the individual keys provides a visual check of the on or off status of the individual
partitions in the system; if a partition is active, the corresponding key is backlit. For example, if partition
2 is active, button 2 will be backlit.
Button 0 takes on a special meaning; via button 0 all the partitions associated with a certain PIN are
switched on or off.
On pressing button 0, if there are any partitions associated with the PIN that are active, they will be
switched off (button 0 LED off if the system is completely off)
On pressing button 0, if the system is completely deactivated, all the partitions associated with the PIN
will be switched on (button 0 LED backlit if the system is completely active).
For instance, if a PIN is associated with partitions 2, 4 and 6, on pressing button 0 they will be switched
on or off together (that is it is not necessary to key in buttons 2, 4 and 6 individually).
If, on the control unit via the Partitions menu  Partition Association  Keypad Codes, the completely
On and completely Off options have been selected for a PIN, button 0 will switch the system COMPLETELY
on and off and the backlighting of button 00 will indicate the system status (completely on/off).
The backlighting of all the buttons is timed.
Summing up, then, if the PIN has been acknowledged as valid (green LED OK blinking), it is possible to switch
on and off each single partition that, in the start-up phase, was previously associated with the PIN itself.
Pressing a backlit key switches off the corresponding partition (the key goes out); vice versa pressing a
key that is not backlit turns on the corresponding partitioning (the key is lit).
Confirm the operations and view the new state of the system
After selecting the desired partitions press OK to confirm the command.
After confirmation the control unit will run the command and the new system status will be displayed with the
backlighting of the keys (each key indicates switching on/off the associated partition). The keypad moreover emits
an audible warning that allows the user, in combination with the backlighting of the buttons, to identify the current
status of the system; specifically:
- 1 beep if the system has been activated
- 2 beeps if the system has been deactivated
- 3 beeps if the system has been partially activated
100
System components
Notes:
- Button C is used as the delete key; pressing button C while entering the PIN or during the partition on/
off selection phase causes all the operations performed to be cancelled.
- Button C is the same button also used during the configuration procedure.
- A PIN code added to a keypad is also recognized by all the other keypads in the system (up to at most 30 PIN
codes).
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value allows us to decide whether, after entering a recognized PIN code
and requesting a system status change, the keypad must activate an actuator located in its zone when
the system is active.
3) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value allows us to decide whether, after entering a recognized
PIN code and requesting a system status change, the keypad must activate an actuator located in its
zone when the system is not active.
4) Buzzer: (default ON). Possibility of turning the system on/off indicator on/off.
5) Button beeping: (default OFF). Possibility of turning the audible warning on/off on pressing a key.
6) Partition visibility: (default OFF). Possibility of viewing the connected partitions being turned on/off
without having to enter the password.
If this setting is enabled, on pressing the OK button the keypad will show the system status with the backlighting of the keys (each key indicates the associated partition).
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration
device until the red LED lights up.
 Reset management  Device reset and press button C on the
Hold down the button C of the device until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
When the LED stops blinking red/green and is off, the reset phase has concluded.
101
System components
3.5 Back-up unit for recess-mounting and on DIN rail (60715 TH35)
3.5.1 Back-up unit for recess-mounting
The back-up unit contains 2 lead batteries (not supplied) connected in series and kept charged by the power
supply; they are used to power the system in the event of a power failure.
It can be powered by the power supply 01400 or by using the AUX output of the power supply 01401.
It is equipped with an audible warning with the function of a siren for indoor use.
It is supplied in the following versions
01804.04: white Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.B boxes
01804.14: grey Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894 boxes
01804.01: white Arké and Plana, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.01 boxes
01804.N: next Eikon, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.N boxes
01804.SL: silver Plana, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.SL boxes
01804.…
Note: For the Eikon series use art. 01804.14.
Technical characteristics
- Input on the power supply in case of flat batteries: 150 mA
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Output voltage: BUS 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Max. output current: BUS 320 mA
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Level of sound starting at 3 m (service audible warning): 80 dB (A)
- Batteries that can be contained: 2x12 V - 2 Ah
- Installation: recess mounting or surface mounting
- Type of protection: against opening the cover with a microswitch
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The back-up unit has 2 input terminals to be connected to the power supply 01401 at 29 V d.c. (AUX + - output)
Comprises:
- a decoupling coil between power supply and bus;
- an audible warning with the function of a siren for indoor use;
- the compartment for housing the batteries.
102
System components
The back-up unit has 6 output terminals:
• BUS + - : power supply for the bus;
• CENTR + - : terminals not used;
• BATT_EXT + - : connection with the auxiliary battery holder unit 01803;
• A: connection with the auxiliary battery holder unit for protection against wire cutting.
By powering the back-up unit via the AUX output of the power supply 01401 it is possible to supply not only
the BUS, but also the video door entry indoor station (21550-20550-14550 +01963 or 01955) and an auxiliary
back-up unit.
- Rated supply voltage of the control unit (Vn): 29 V ±1 V d.c.
- Rated output voltage for auxiliary back-up (Vn): 27 V ±1 V d.c.
- Rated supply current for auxiliary back-up (In): 150 mA d.c.
Characteristics
• Built-in audible warning;
• Sound emission modulated in frequency and possibility of choosing different sounds to associate with the
types of alarm;
• Possibility of selecting an audible warning to signal the operations of turning the system on/off (beep);
• Self-protection against wire cutting;
• Programming the maximum duration of the audible alarm warnings;
• Checking the status of the batteries and its communication to the control unit;
• Housing for 2 batteries of 12 V and 2 Ah with the function of back-up (buffer) in the event of a mains failure;
• Equipped with battery-charging circuit (buffer-battery))
• Input at 29 V d.c. (power supply voltage from power supply) and output at 29 V d.c. (voltage of the bus);
During the phase of programming it is possible to associate a different sound for each type of alarm so as to
obtain a sound differentiation; this allows you to understand the type of alarm in progress immediately.
The alarm signals have decreasing priority according to the following table:
Priority
Attempt at opening the cover
Alarmed system
The siren no longer communicates with
the rest of the system (the wires have
been cut)
3 (max)
2
1 min.
The duration of each type of sound can be selected in a time interval ranging from 5 s to 5 min.
The system offers the possibility of selecting 4 different types of sound to combine them with the various types of alarm:
- opening the cover (attempt at tampering with the device)
- alarmed system (detected intrusion or attempted tampering)
- attempt at tampering
- watchdog or wire cutting
103
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Anti-tamper: used to turn the protection against opening the cover of the back-up unit on/off (default NO).
2) On/Off Beep: used to provide an audible warning whenever switching the system on/off (default OFF).
3) System tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the system device tamper
alarm.
4) Backup tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the back-up unit tamper alarm
5) Intrusion alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the intrusion alarm
6) Watchdog alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the watchdog alarm
7) Sound duration (default 40 s): Used to set the duration of the alarm warning to a value between 5 s and 5
min in steps of 5 s
The available sounds and respective characteristics are given in the following table:
Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Inactive
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
Example
Setting Antitamper 0, Backup tamper sound 1, Intrusion alarm 2 and Watchdog alarm 4 we obtain:
- in the event of a tamper alarm in the system the back-up unit will not generate any sound signal;
- in the event of a device tamper alarm the back-up unit will generate the high frequency sound with modulation
up and down;
- in the event of an intrusion alarm the back-up unit will generate the high frequency sound with modulation up only;
- in the event of a Watchdog alarm, the back-up unit will generate the two-tone low frequency sound.
104
System components
60
Technical characteristics
Rated voltage: 12 V
Capacity: 2 Ah
Maximum dimensions of the battery: see figure alongside.
0,5
Back-up unit battery
The system is powered, in the event of the 230 V~ electric mains failing, by two lead batteries of 12 V 2 Ah (not
supplied) that are housed in the device. The two batteries are connected in series to supply the line with the rated
voltage of 24 V.
178 0,5
0,5
35
Connection terminals
from power supply
Connection
terminals to bus
Connection
terminals for
monitor 20550
Connection
terminals to
the auxiliary
back-up unit
01803…
Antitamper
Configuration
push-button
Configuration
LED
Jumper to
enable antitamper
on auxiliary back-up unit
(remove to enable)
105
System components
3.5.2 Auxiliary battery holder unit
The auxiliary battery holder unit contains 2 lead batteries (not supplied) connected in series and kept charged by
the main back-up power supply 01804; they can extend the duration of the power supply to the system in the
event of a power failure.
It is supplied in the following versions
01803.04: white Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.B boxes
01803.14: grey Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894 boxes
01803.01: white Arké and Plana, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.01 boxes
01803.N: next Eikon, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.N boxes
01803.SL: silver Plana, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.SL boxes
01803.…
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 27 ±1 V d.c.
- Rated supply current (In): 150 mA d.c.
- Max. output current: BUS 320 mA
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Batteries that can be contained: 2x12 V - 2 Ah
- Installation: recess mounting or surface mounting
- Type of protection: against opening the cover with a microswitch.
The auxiliary back-up unit has 3 input terminals to be connected to the back-up unit 01804.
Two terminals are used for hooking up the batteries and the third terminal is used for self-protection against wire
cutting.
IMPORTANT: The auxiliary battery holder unit 01803 must be connected as near as possible to the backup unit 01804; in any case, their distance must never be any greater than 1 m.
106
System components
3.5.3 Back-up unit with decoupling coil, output 800 mA, power supply 29 Vd.c., installation on DIN rail
(60715 TH35), it occupies 6 modules size 17.5 mm
The back-up unit 01807 can be used as an alternative to the recess-mounting back-up unit 01804; it takes up 6
modules and, when used with lead batteries 12 V 2.2 Ah, it can be installed in a consumer unit coupled with the
battery holder bracket 01809.
It has 2 dedicated inputs for a total of 4 batteries of 12 V (not supplied) and terminals for connecting an external tamper.
The back-up unit 01807 must be powered by using the AUX output of the power supply 01401.
Front view and connections.
01807
BACK-UP UNIT
29V
800 mA
By-me
BAT1
+ -
BAT2 TAMPER
+ - A C
Grade 1
Class II
CONF.
29 V
+ -
BUS OUT
+ - V+ V-
LED indicators:
- green LED at top right: power supply voltage on
- two-colour LED at bottom right:
- red LED on steady: configuration and reset
- red LED blinking: tamper alarm or when the device is powered
- red/green LED blinking: automatic address change
Terminals:
The backup unit 01807 has 12 terminals:
BAT1 + - : battery 1 input (12+12 V)
BAT2 + - : auxiliary battery 2 input (12+12 V) (to be connected if battery 1 is not sufficient)
A C TAMPER: external tamper input
+29 V + - : power supply input from power supply unit 01401 (AUX output).
BUS + -: bus output
OUT V+ V-: power supply output for the central control module 01960 or surface-mounting control units
Note on the AC TAMPER terminal: If you want to protect the device against tampering, it is possible to
connect these terminals to a switch connected to the system for opening the consumer unit housing the
device.
107
System components
If the control unit tamper is enabled, an alarm will be signalled if the A-C contact is opened.
If not used, the two terminals can be left disconnected, disabling tamper control from the control unit.
NOTE: For the battery installation details, see the instructions sheet provided with the battery holder
bracket 01809.
Technical characteristics
- Max. absorption on the power supply in the event of flat batteries: approximately 200 mA (with 4 12 V batteries
or with 2 24 V batteries)
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Input consumption 29 V: 800 mA
- Output voltage: BUS 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Consumption: BUS output:
Total current
800 mA
-
Battery current
100 mA (BAT1) + 100 mA (BAT2 if used)
-
Output current OUT (if used)
150 mA
=
Current on the bus
output OUT: 150 mA (terminals for connection to the module 01960 or surface-mounted control units).
battery 1 output: 27V DC (max 100 mA batteries completely flat) - for back-up unit battery
battery 2 output: 27V DC (max 100 mA batteries completely flat) - for an auxiliary battery on stand-by: 30 mA.
- Control unit rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 V ±1 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Checking the status of the battery and its communication to the control unit:
- Battery-charging circuit (buffer-battery)
- Type of PS: A
- Low battery voltage: 20 V
- Type of SD: 5.6 Ah at 36 h (80%)
- Relative humidity: 30-75%
- Weight: 215 g
- Dimensions: 105.5x90x61 mm
Deliverable current according to the number of back-up units and the number and type of 12 V batteries.
1 back-up unit 01807
2 back-up unit 01807
Battery type
2 batteries
4 batteries
6 batteries
8 batteries
Duration
2.2 Ah
120 mA
240 mA
360 mA
480 mA
12 h
2.2 Ah
60 mA
120 mA
180 mA
240 mA
24 h
7 Ah
400 mA
600 mA
1000 mA
1200 mA
12 h
7 Ah
200 mA
400 mA
600 mA
800 mA
24 h
108
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper: Used to activate or deactivate tamper input control (antitamper).
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration
the device; the red LED will light up.

Reset management

Device reset and press the button on
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
Important: The maximum distance between the back-up unit and the batteries is equal to 1 m.
3.6 Siren for outdoor use
Equipped with polycarbonate enclosure resistant to the harshest atmospheric conditions, the siren for outdoor use
enables audible (can be heard far away) and visual warning of all alarm conditions. The siren is self-powered, it is
controlled by a microprocessor and is equipped with an indicator lamp (blinking flash) built in.
This device is supplied in a single version:
01806: for surface mounting.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Consumption: 10mA
- Protection class: IP34
- Operating temperature: -25 - +55 °C (for outdoor use)
- Sound pressure level at 3 m: 103 dB (A)
- Maximum battery that can be housed: 12 V - 2 Ah
- Type of installation: surface
- Configuration button and LED
Audible
warning
Visual indicator
109
System components
The siren for outdoor use has 2 terminals for connection to the bus.
Characteristics
• Additional protection with tropicalized steel cover;
• Frequency modulated sound emission, with the possibility of associating different sounds according to the
type of alarm;
• Moving coil exponential horn with high acoustic efficiency;
• Protection against:
- wire cutting;
- breakage of the lamp filament;
- tampering;
• Anti-sabotage device against oxygen lance (anti-flame device);
• Programming the maximum duration of the alarm warning;
• Battery test circuit with flat battery signal on the control unit and turning off the blinker when this condition
occurs;
• Housing for lead battery of 12 V and 2 Ah (not supplied);
• Input while charging battery: 60 mA.
The siren is able to:
- detect, via microswitch, opening of the polycarbonate outer cover or ripping off the wall;
- detect cutting of the BUS cable;
- detect, via magnetic contact, opening of the metal safety cover;
- detect breakage or removal of the blinker;
- perform self-protection against the oxygen lance (oxyhydrogen flame) so that, if the temperature of the cover
rises above 100 °C, an alarm is generated;
- check for the presence of a moving coil horn;
All these types of protection can be turned on or off from the control unit at the time of programming.
During this phase it is possible to associate a different sound for each type of alarm so as to obtain a sound differentiation (to understand the type of alarm in progress).
It is possible to associate each type of alarm with only the blinking of the flash.
In addition, the siren also checks the battery charge level.
There may be the following cases:
- the battery is flat, the system assigns priority to the sound of the horn over the signal supplied by the blinker;
- the voltage on the bus is low when, due to a lack of mains voltage, the operation of the entire system is ensured
by the batteries of the back-up unit. In this case, to save energy, the siren battery-charging circuit is disabled.
Siren cycles
An alarm condition from the various sensors generates a single sound cycle lasting at most 5 minutes, with an
interval equal to 6 minutes between one alarm and the next. Each device can produce at most 2 alarms, up to
a total of 5 alarms. The following alarms are not signalled, but they are saved in an events list and shown on the
control unit display.
110
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper management: via the control unit it is possible to set all the tamper alarms for the siren 01806:
- audible warning if the voltage on the bus is too low (Low battery sound);
- checking there is the horn (Horn check);
- checking the filament of the indicator lamp (Filament broken);
- on/off status of the protection against the oxygen lance (oxygen lance check);
- on/off status of the protection against opening the siren covers (Microswitch check);
- on/off status of the protection against tampering with foam (Anti-foam check)
2) System tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the system device tamper
alarm.
3) Siren tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the siren 01806 tamper alarm
4) Intrusion alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the intrusion alarm
5) Watchdog alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the watchdog alarm
6) Sound duration (default 30 s): Used to set the duration of the alarm warning to a value between 5 s and 5
min in steps of 5 s
The available sounds and respective characteristics are given in the following table:
Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Not active (blinking only)
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
5
Modulation up and down at low frequency
6
Modulation only up at low frequency
Example
Setting System tamper sound 2, Siren tamper sound 6, Intrusion alarm 3 and Watchdog alarm 0 we obtain:
- in the event of a system tamper alarm the siren will generate the high frequency sound with modulation up;
- in the event of a device tamper alarm or attempted break-in with an oxygen lance, the siren will generate the low
frequency sound with modulation up only;
- in the event of an intrusion alarm, the siren will generate the multi-tone high-frequency sound;
- in the event of a Watchdog alarm, the siren will not generate any sound signal.
111
System components
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
figuration button; the red LED will light up.

Device reset and press the siren con-
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
Outdoor siren battery
Powers the siren in case of tampering the connection line with the rest of the system.
It must always be present since, in the event of an alarm, it supplies the energy necessary to develop the required
sound power and to supply the blinker, even when there is the connection to the bus and the mains voltage. It is
kept charged via the connection line to the bus.
60
0,5
Technical characteristics:
Rated voltage: 12 V
Capacity: 2 Ah
Maximum dimensions of the battery: see figure below.
178 0,5
112
0,5
35
System components
3.7 Siren for indoor use
The siren for indoor use provides audible warnings (that can be heard far away) of all alarm conditions.
The device is self-powered and uses 3 rechargeable AAA NiMh batteries.
It is supplied in the following versions
20495: 3 Eikon modules
19495: 3 Arké modules
16945: 3 Idea modules
14495: 3 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975..)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption:10mA on stand-by
20mA max with batteries discharged
- Level of sound starting at 3 m (service audible warning): > 80 dB (A)
- Possibility of configuring four different types of sound to be combined with the different alarm signals
- System activation, deactivation and partitioning sound signal
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
Indicators
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking when powered or in case of tampering with the device.
The system offers the possibility of selecting 4 different types of sound and the audible warning for activation/
deactivation of the alarm system. By default the type 0 sound is set for all the alarms except for the intrusion alarm
for which the type 1 sound is set.
The following alarms can be signalled:
- system tamper alarm (tampering);
- optical anti-tamper alarm of the siren;
- intrusion alarm;
- alarm for watchdog or cutting wires.
113
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) On/Off Beep: used to provide an audible warning whenever switching the system on/off (default OFF).
3) System tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the system device tamper
alarm.
4) Siren tamper sound: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the siren for indoor use tamper
alarm.
5) Intrusion alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the intrusion alarm
6) Watchdog alarm: used to set the type of sound to be associated with the watchdog alarm
7) Sound duration (default 40 s): Used to set the duration of the alarm warning to a value between 5 s and 5
min in steps of 5 s.
The available sounds and their characteristics are given in the following table:
Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Inactive
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
The sound cycles of the siren for indoor use are the same as those already specified for the siren for outdoor use.
With the control unit it is moreover possible to turn the audible warning that identifies changes in the system status
on / off, namely:
•complete system activation: 1 beep
•complete system deactivation: 2 beeps
•partial system activation: 3 beeps
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
configuration button; the red LED will light up.
 Device reset and press the indoor siren
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
114
System components
Changing batteries
nr. 3
AAA HR03 NiMH 1.2 V
IMPORTANT: Use solely rechargeable AAA NiMH 1.2 V batteries.
Never use non-rechargeable batteries for any reason whatsoever; this is to avoid the risk of them exploding.
115
System components
3.8 Power supplies
3.8.1 Power supply 120-230 V ~
The power supply 01401 has a decoupling coil.
On each line, at most 2 power supplies can be installed with the associated back-up unit.
Front view and connections.
120-230 V~
Overload
Output overvoltage
Mains voltage
29 V AUX
29 V BUS
Technical characteristics
• Power: 120-230 V~ 50-60 Hz
• Consumption:
- 120 V: 700 mA
- 230 V: 450 mA
• Dissipated power: 9 W
• BUS output voltage: 29 V d.c. (SELV) with decoupling coil
• AUX output voltage: 29 V d.c. (SELV)
• Total max output current: 1280 mA (IBUS + IAUX)
• Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (from inside)
• 8 modules size 17.5 mm; installation on consumer units with DIN rails (60715 TH35)
Output connections
• AUX + -: if there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the output powers the back-up unit 01804 while if there
is only the automation system the terminals are not used.
• BUS + - : if there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the output remains unused, while if there is only the
automation system the output powers the + - BUS terminals of the control unit 21509.
116
System components
3.8.2 12 V power supply
The power supply 01830 is used in all systems containing devices (sensors, infrared barriers, etc.) that need to
be powered at 12 V with a buffer battery.
Front view and connections
120-230 V~
L
01830
N
OUT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
120-230V 50/60 Hz
350-260 mA
12V
1A
-5°C ÷ +45°C
By-me
Grade 1
Classe II
12V
+
-
ON
BATT
+
-
Low
Voltage
12 V
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: 120-230 V~ 50-60 Hz
- Max consumption 350 mA
- Battery charging current: max 220 mA
- Output voltage: 12 V d.c. (± 15%)
- Max output load: 1 A
- Output contact: NC, 28 V dc 100 mA max
• Voltage for opening contact N/C (“low battery” indicator): 11.5 V (± 5%)
• Battery charging time: max 72 h
• Batteries to use:
- with a load of 1 A, lead battery of 14 Ah 12 V
- with a load of 0.5 A, lead battery of 7.2 Ah 12 V
• Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (internal)
• Installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35) (occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm).
Terminals
L N: power supply terminals 120 - 230 V~
12 V: output terminals to power 12 V devices
BATT + -: input terminals for battery connection
“Low Voltage”: terminals for signalling “low battery” (via NC contact)
Notes: In the phase of installation, have a disconnection above the power supply.
If the LEDs do not light up, disconnect the power supply from the mains, check the output current on the
load and wait for 5 minutes before powering up the device again.
For further details, see the instructions sheet provided with the power supply 01830.
117
System components
3.9 Contact interfaces.
3.9.1 2-input contact interface
The device is used to connect the burglar alarm system with the normally closed magnetic alarm contacts,
electro-mechanical rope contacts to protect blinds and roller shutters and anti-impact seismic sensors to protect
windows. In addition, if a generic detector (gas detector, etc.) is connected to one of its inputs, it can be used to
generate a technical alarm. The 2-input interface enables independent connection of two contacts or a series of
contacts.
It is supplied in the following versions
20490.1: 2 Eikon modules
19490.1: 2 Arké modules
16940.1: 2 Idea modules
14490.1: 2 Plana modules
Each input represents a functional unit.
The 2 functional units are configurable on 2 separate groups in both SAI and automation, so it is possible to
differentiate turning on the two contacts by using the partitions appropriately and they can moreover also be
delayed differently.
The 2 functional units can control 2 separate relays configured on the groups associated with the interface.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- no. of inputs: 2
- Possibility of programming the interface activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the interface for blinds and of the anti-tamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
118
System components
Rear view of the contact interface module:
IN2
A2
INTE
RFA
CON CCIA
TATT
I
IN1
A1
C
BU
+ S
-
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
C = common output
A1 = input of the continuity wire
IN1 = input configurable as:
- input for contacts for roller shutters
- input for magnetic contacts
- input for technical alarm
A2 = input of the continuity wire
IN2 = input configurable as:
- input for contacts for roller shutters
- input for magnetic contacts
- input for technical alarm
Anti-tamper short-circuit (only input
2 has been connected).
R = 15 kΩ
R = optional resistor to control the short circuit on the wire.
WARNING: When connecting magnetic contacts, roller shutter contacts and detectors for technical
alarms, the maximum length of the cable must be no greater than 30 m.
Note: The maximum length of the cables for connecting the contacts with the interface must not exceed
30 m and connect no more than two cord contacts for roller shutters in series.
The contact interface has:
- 2 terminals for connection to the bus.(+ and -)
- a common output terminal (C)
- 2 configurable input terminals for electromechanical rope contacts (S), magnetic contacts (M), technical alarms (T).
- 2 terminals for the tamper continuity wire (A),
Characteristics:
• Detects opening NC magnetic contacts, cutting the line of the magnetic contacts and of the anti-tamper continuity wire, the movement of blinds or opening other NC contacts (technical alarm). To detect short circuiting on
the contacts line it is necessary to first connect a resistance of 15 kΩ in series with the line (see figure above).
• Used to activate signalling an audible panic alarm (see par. 11.6) or a silent one (see par. 11.2).
119
System components
Indicators
• red LED for signals in the phase of configuration and alarm:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting contact opening or attempted break-in of the device;
The red LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again;
therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
• green LED blinking for signalling:
- alarm detected with system turned off;
- alarm detected with device not configured;
- alarm detected in the WalkTest phase;
Both inputs are configured in the following way:
- press the configuration button and the orange LED will blink;
- let 3 s elapse, configuration will commence on input 1 and the red LED will light up;
- whereas if you press the configuration button before 3 s have elapsed, the LED will blink faster and configuration of input 2 will commence.
During the WalkTest phase the device detects whether any contacts are open, signalling it to the control unit and
highlighting it with the blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay; in this way the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm. The most common application of this function is to turn on the system
from inside the house and, afterwards, leave by opening the magnetic contact on the entrance door without the
system generating any alarm.
Example Time delay equal to 30 s. On activating the system you have 30 s to get out; if you go back in after
30 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it signals an
alarm.
If when turning on the system a magnetic contact has accidentally remained open (for example a window) in a
zone that is not excluded from the activation, the intrusion detection alarm system will not be turned on; the contacts interface LED will become blinking red and the control unit will display the zone belonging to that contact.
To be able to turn the system on, you will need to close the contact or exclude the zone to which it belongs from
activation (see par. 9.2).
If there is an open contact and the system is switched on with an activation delay set on the contacts interface
(for instance to allow the user to get out of the house), at the end of the set time the system will activate and
signal an alarm immediately.
120
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Input function 1: Input 1 can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts for roller shutters (S) or for
magnetic contacts (M) or for technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
2) Input function 2: Input 2 can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts (S) or for magnetic contacts
(M) or for technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
3) On delay (default 0): The delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = immediate).
4) Contact threshold (default 3): This value permits selecting the speed of action in the case of opening the contact. By setting the value to 0 or 1 (at 1 it is not as fast), the device checks the resistance of the line of contacts
and of that of the anti-tamper continuity wire. In this case, it is necessary to connect in series a resistor of 15 KΩ.
(see the drawing on page 119).
5) Roller shutters threshold (default 31): The degree of sensitivity of the check on blinds, dedicated solely for the
electromechanical rope contact, can be adjusted by setting a value between 0 and 31 with or without checking
the attempted short circuiting of the wire (0-31 sc, in which case it is necessary to connect in series a resistor of
15 KΩ. (see the drawing on page 119). In addition, by setting the Contacts Threshold to 0 you can check just
the continuity wire; this parameter is very useful in order to prevent activation of false alarms.
The alarm signal is generated only if the number of pulses generated by the contact exceeds the set threshold.
By setting the value to 0, the alarm signal is instantaneous.
6) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled): The degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be set
with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity obtained).
7) Open if ON (default No): This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator located in
the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is on.
8) Open if on standby (default No): This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator
located in the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is off.
Setting the types of contact to assign to the inputs (programmable on the control unit only for the automation program)
1) Type of contact for the input 1:
When the actuator activation message (ON or OFF) is sent, it is possible to select:
•
normal output
(on contact open off contact closed)
•
reversed output
(off contact open on contact closed)
•
toggle on up
(on /off alternately each time the contact is closed)
•
toggle on down
(on /off alternately each time the contact is opened)
Operation of messages to actuators
If the “magnetic contacts” or "technical alarm" function is enabled on the control unit, when the contact opens
the interface will send an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it switch over.
In the case of the "technical alarm" function, when the contact is closed again, the OFF message is sent too
The actuation messages are only sent if the Open if ON or Open if on standby settings are active.
IMPORTANT: If the settings of inputs 1 and 2 are different (for example Input Function 1 ="technical alarm", Input
Function 2 ="magnetic contacts"), the actuation messages will be sent only from the input configured as a
"technical alarm".
If an input is selected as a "roller shutters alarm" no actuation messages are sent for that contact.
121
System components
The 2-input contact interface can be configured either in a SAI program (intrusion detection alarm system)
or in an Automation program.
If the device has to be used in both applications (SAI and Automation) it is necessary for the interface to
be configured first in the SAI and then in the Automation; the automation group must then be added to
the router via the Configuration menu  Router  Router Management.
It must be underlined that if an input is selected in SAI, for instance as a roller shutter input or as a disabled input,
it is not possible to send ON or OFF messages to an actuator that may be in the Automation program.
The device will send commands in the automation groups only if the SAI zone to which it belongs is not activated
(that is to say if the intrusion detection alarm system is switched off or if partitioned with the zone at issue not
being active).
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
configuration button; the red LED will light up.

Device reset and press the device
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
3.9.2 12 V contact interface
The contact interface is the device used to connect the burglar alarm system with the normally closed magnetic
alarm contacts, electro-mechanical rope contacts to protect blinds and roller shutters and anti-impact seismic
sensors to protect windows. In addition, if a generic detector (gas detector, etc.) is connected to one of its inputs,
it can be used to generate a technical alarm. The 12 V interface enables directly supplying those types of sensors
that require a power supply of 12 V and 10 mA max.
It is supplied in the following versions
20491: 2 Eikon modules
19491: 2 Arké modules
16941: 2 Idea modules
14491: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA + input of the 12V output if connected
- Output: 12 V dc - 10% ( protection against short-circuiting) 10 mA max.
122
System components
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA + input of the 12V output if connected
- Output: 12 V dc - 10% ( protection against short-circuiting) 10 mA max.
- Possibility of programming the interface activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the interface for blinds and of the anti-tamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
Rear view of the contact interface module:
IN
A
C
INTE
R
CON FACCIA
TATT
12V I 12V
-OUT + BUS
+
-
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
+ -: 12V power supply output
C:Common output
A:Input of the continuity wire of the magnetic contact
IN: Input configurable as:
- S: Input for roller shutters
- M: Magnetic contact input
- T: Technical alarm input
Wiring diagram with generic IR sensor with power supply at 12 V dc, 10 mA max.
12 V
123
System components
Magnetic contacts.
Roller shutters contacts (anti-tamper short circuit)
R = 15 kΩ
R = optional resistor to control the short circuit on the wire.
WARNING: The maximum length of the cables for connecting the contacts with the interface must not
exceed 30 m. No more than two cord contacts for roller shutters may be connected in series.
The contact interface has:
- 2 terminals for connection to the bus.(+ and -)
- a common output terminal (C)
- 1 configurable input terminals for electromechanical rope contacts (S), magnetic contacts (M), technical alarms (T).
- 1 terminals for the tamper continuity wire (A),
- 2 terminals for the 12 V output for connecting the sensors
Characteristics:
• Detects opening NC magnetic contacts, cutting the line of the magnetic contacts and of the anti-tamper
continuity wire, the movement of blinds or opening other NC contacts (technical alarm). To detect short
circuiting on the contacts line it is necessary to first connect a resistance of 15 kΩ in series with the line
(see figure above).
• Used to activate signalling an audible panic alarm (see par. 11.6) or a silent one (see par. 11.2).
Indicators
• red LED for signals in the phase of configuration and alarm:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting contact opening or attempted break-in of the device;
The red LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again;
therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
• green LED blinking for signalling:
- alarm detected with system turned off;
- alarm detected with device not configured;
- alarm detected in the WalkTest phase;
During the WalkTest phase the device detects whether any contacts are open, signalling it to the control unit and
highlighting it with the blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay; in this way the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm. The most common application of this function is to turn on the system
from inside the house and, afterwards, leave by opening the magnetic contact on the entrance door without the
system generating any alarm.
124
System components
Example Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system you have 30 s to get out; if you go back in after 30 s have passed and therefore with
the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it signals an alarm.
If when turning on the system a magnetic contact has accidentally remained open (for example a window) in a
zone that is not excluded from the activation, the intrusion detection alarm system will not be turned on; the contacts interface LED will become blinking red and the control unit will display the zone belonging to that contact.
To be able to turn the system on, you will need to close the contact or exclude the zone to which it belongs from
activation (see par. 9.2).
If there is an open contact and the system is switched on with an activation delay set on the contacts interface
(for instance to allow the user to get out of the house), at the end of the set time the system will activate and
signal an alarm immediately.
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Input function 1: Input 1 can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts for roller shutters (S)
or for magnetic contacts (M) or for technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
3) On delay: (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = immediate).
4) Contact threshold: (default 3) this value permits selecting the speed of action in the case of opening
the contact. By setting the value to 0 or 1 (at 1 it is not as fast), the device checks the resistance of the
line of contacts and of that of the anti-tamper continuity wire. In this case, it is necessary to connect in
series a resistor of 15 KΩ. (see the drawing on page 121).
5) Roller shutters threshold: (default 31) the degree of sensitivity of the check on blinds, dedicated solely
for the electromechanical rope contact, can be adjusted by setting a value between 0 and 31 with or without checking the attempted short circuiting of the wire (0-31 sc, in which case it is necessary to connect
in series a resistor of 15 KΩ. (see the drawing on page 121).
This parameter is very useful in order to prevent activation of false alarms.
The alarm signal is generated only if the number of pulses generated by the contact exceeds the set threshold.
By setting the value to 0, the alarm signal is instantaneous.
6) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled): the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be set
with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity obtained).
7) Open if ON: (default No). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator located in
the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is on.
8) Open if on standby: (default No). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator
located in the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is off.
Operation of messages to actuators
If the “magnetic contacts” function is enabled on the control unit, when the contact opens the interface will send
an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it switch over.
If the “technical alarm” function is enabled on the control unit, when the contact associated with the technical
alarm opens the interface will send an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it
switch over. When the contact is closed again, the OFF message is sent.
The actuation messages are only sent if also the Open if ON or Open if on standby settings are active.
125
System components
Setting the types of contact to assign to the input (programmable on the control unit only for the automation program)
Type of contact for the input:
When the actuator activation message (ON or OFF) is sent, it is possible to select:
•
normal output
(on contact open off contact closed)
•
reversed output
(off contact open on contact closed)
•
toggle on up
(on /off alternately each time the contact is closed)
•
toggle on down
(on /off alternately each time the contact is opened)
Note. The 12 V contact interface can be configured either in a SAI program (intrusion detection alarm
system) or in an Automation program.
If the device must be used in both programs (SAI and Automation) it is necessary for the interface to be
configured first in SAI and then in Automation. The automation group must then be added to the router
via the Router Management menu.
It must be underlined that if an input is selected in SAI, for instance as a roller shutter input, it is not possible to
send ON or OFF messages to an actuator that may be in the Automation program. The device will send commands in the automation groups only if the SAI zone to which it belongs is not activated (that is to say if the
intrusion detection alarm system is switched off or if partitioned with the zone at issue not being active).
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
configuration button; the red LED will light up.

Device reset and press the device
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
3.10 Relay actuator
The actuator is a device that, thanks to the clean contacts of its relay, is able to repeat the signal of various types
of alarm according to the configuration that has been assigned to it. It can be used to activate a telephone dialler,
the repetition of the system status (on, off, alarm, etc.), the control of visual and/or audible signals (in advanced
applications), etc.
It is supplied in the following versions
20489: 2 Eikon modules
19489: 2 Arké modules
16939: 2 Idea modules
14489: 2 Plana modules
126
System components
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with active infrared sensor built in
- Rated relay data: 1 A 30 V d.c./120 Va.c.
- Consumption: 5 mA
- Programming the time interval in which the actuator output stays ON
- Programming the delay time for activating the relay, after the command from the control unit
- Programming the sensitivity of the anti-tamper device
- Programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Connecting a normally closed external contact (anti-tamper continuity wire)
- Selecting the relay operating mode (one or two-position stable)
- Can be controlled directly by a presence sensor to control lights
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The actuator has:
- 2 terminals for the BUS connection
- 2 terminals for an anti-tamper continuity wire (A and C)
- 3 relay terminals: common (0), normally open (1) and normally closed (2)
Indicators
• Switches over the output according to the command received;
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to attempted tampering with the device or opening the continuity wire (external tamper).
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or until the system is turned on again;
therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
• green LED:
- on steady it indicates that the relay contact is in position ON and therefore the contact is closed NO.
Note: It is possible to use the actuator for functions of access control, for example controlling electric locks,
assigning this actuator the same zone in the device from which it must be controlled (in this case the connector). For greater detail, please see the section on advanced functions (par. 11.3).
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Operation (default one-position stable): it is possible to choose the behaviour of the actuator relay setting it as
one-position stable or two-position stable.
In an alarm condition, to activate a phone dialler, this parameter must be in the condition of “one-position stable."
It is necessary to configure the relay as two-position stable if you want to connect it to the system status message selected on the control unit in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System menu Setup  Message
management.
127
System components
If a one-position stable actuator is configured in the same zone as a radio frequency device for sending technical
alarms, when there is an alarm signal the relay swill switch over for a time equal to the time set in the actuator
parameters.
3) External tamper (default value Yes): it is possible to turn on and off the control on the external contact
(anti-tamper) directly from the control unit.
4) On delay: (default 0) it is possible to select the lag time between receiving the ON command and actual
relay activation. On the control unit you select a time from 0 s to 250 s in steps of 1 s.
5) Off delay: (default 10) it is possible to select the lag time with which the relay is deactivated from the
time of receiving the related ON command (in case of one-position stable operation). On the control
unit you select a time from 0 s to 250 s in steps of 1 s. The set OFF delay must be greater than the
activation time.
Rear view of the relay actuator.
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
C:Output for normally closed external contact (for antitamper line)
1A
1
30 V ATTU
0
ATO
R
2
A
E
C
BU
+ S
-
A:Input for normally closed external contact (for anti-tamper line)
0:Common
1:Contact normally open
2:Contact normally closed
PHONE DIALLER
Antitamper
NC input
To enable operation of the phone dialler it is necessary to select the type of message to send, following
the instructions on page 153 (Message Management).
N.B.
Connect the normally closed contact of the actuator (terminal 2) with the NC input of the phone dialler so
that it activates in the event of an alarm.
128
System components
Example of technical alarm (gas detector) with connection of the relay actuator to the phone communicator.
BUS FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
GAS STOP
METANO
VIMAR BURGLAR
ALARM SYSTEM BUS
(e.g. IR detectors)
CONVENTIONAL
SAFETY
SYSTEMS
(e.g. gas detectors)
CONTROL PANEL
CONTACT INTERFACE
Main menu
Climate
Temperature Probe
Scenarios
Events Programme
Logout
Setup
ACTUATOR
SIREN
PHONE DIALLER
129
System components
3.11 Mini detector for surface-mounting
The passive infrared presence detector is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion of heatemitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation
and the intrusion detection alarm system, it is able, with the intrusion detection alarm system off, to control a relay
in an automation group that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation
section). If the SAI zone where the detector is configured is active (for total or partial system switch-on) the device
will not command the relays of the automation groups in which it is configured.
It is supplied in the following version:
01828: with installation on a wall and on corner walls.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: surface
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical anti-tamper device built in
- Absorption: 15 mA
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
- Possibility of programming the duration of actuation
Indicators
• detects the motion of warm bodies in its area of coverage by means of the Fresnel lens;
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting intrusion or attempted break-in of the device;
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore
it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm. This characteristic is useful to highlight the path followed by any intruder.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase;
130
System components
The area of detection, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4
planes (Vimar patent).
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Activation delay (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous);
3) Pulse threshold (default value 3): the detector, when it detects the presence of a warm body in its area
of coverage, produces a sequence of pulses; they are considered valid only if they have a greater duration than
that of the threshold fixed by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm, it is necessary to exceed the number of pulses (the threshold value)
set by the user; the greater the set value the greater the "tolerance" with which the device will signal an alarm
condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) Time threshold (default value 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which
an alarm message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
5) Brightness threshold (default value 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed
with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
6) Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for
the associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any
additional movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the end
of this time a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
Area of coverage of the infrared detector lens
A
1,2
B
C
D
0
m 0
1,5
8
A = 3 beams +6°
B = 3 beams +0°
C = 3 beams -20°
D = 3 beams -30°
A
C
B
C
10
Rating
B
A
C
B
C
B
A
B
C
B
Angle of detection
• Explored solid angle:
- 112 horizontal
- 36 vertical
- 17 sectors on 4 planes
• Range: 10 m max (8 m typical)
8m
D
1,5 m
D
D
112
131
System components
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application. If the detector
is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, the device must always be configured first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this,
the automation group must be added to the router using the Configuration menu
Management.

Router

Router
Installation
For the mini surface-mounting presence detector to work properly you need to follow these installation rules:
- do not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note: For the installation details, see the instructions sheet provided with the detector 01828.
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control unit and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating an alarm.
Example Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system you have 30 s to get out; if you go back in after 30 s have passed and therefore with
the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it signals an alarm.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
configuration button; the red LED will light up.

Device reset and press the device
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
132
System components
3.12 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
The dual technology sensor integrates a microwave sensor and an infrared sensor. It is able to signal people or
animals passing through its area of coverage. The dual technology enables making the sensor insensitive to the
most common causes of false alarms.
The sensor functions in "AND" mode; that is, when either sensor detects motion in the area of coverage it remains
on pre-alarm for 15 seconds awaiting confirmation from the other sensor. Once this condition occurs the device
sends the signal to the control unit.
It is supplied in the following version:
01829.1: for surface mounting
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Absorption: 15 mA (at rest), 20 mA (maximum absorption)
- Protection class: IP40
- Operating temperature: +5 - +45°C
- Installation: surface (with adjustable support supplied)
- Type of protection: against opening with mechanical switch
- Operation: in “AND” mode with system on and only infrared with system off
- Range: 10 m (the range of the infrared sensor is adjustable from 3 to 10 m with a trimmer)
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED.
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
For all the details, see the instructions sheet supplied with the device.
Indicators
• Detecting the motion of warm bodies in the area of coverage by means of an infrared sensor.
When the system is active, the device detects the presence of bodies in motion also via a microwave sensor;
if the microwave sensor and the infrared sensor simultaneously detect the motion an alarm signal is sent (AND
function).
133
System components
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking in the event of an intrusion alarm or attempted tampering with the device; the LED continues to blink
until the alarm that caused it is cancelled or the system is turned on again. Therefore it is not enough to turn off
the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase.
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the anti-tamper device can be
set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of
sensitivity obtained).
2) Activation delay (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous);
3) Pulse threshold (default value 3): the detector, when it detects the presence of a warm body in its area
of coverage, produces a sequence of pulses; they are considered valid only if they have a greater duration than
that of the threshold fixed by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm, it is necessary to exceed the number of pulses (the threshold value)
set by the user; the greater the set value the greater the "tolerance" with which the device will signal an alarm
condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) Time threshold (default value 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which
an alarm message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
5) Brightness threshold (default value 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed
with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
6) Duration of actuation (default 30): if within the set time, in the range between 10 and 250 s, the device detects
a greater number of pulses than the threshold set in point 3, with the system off, a message is sent to the actuator. Governing a one-position stable relay the actuation time must be shorter than the relay deactivation time.
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application.
If the detector is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, the device must always be
configured first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this, the
Automation group must be added to the Router using the specific menu Configuration  Router  Router
Management.
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control unit and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
134
System components
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating an alarm.
Example Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system you have 30 s to get out; if you go back in after the initial 30 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it signals an alarm.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management
configuration button; the red LED will light up.

Device reset and press the device
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
3.13 Transponder reader
The transponder reader is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or partially) after recognising
the code emitted by the transponder keys.
Operation is identical to that of the connector with the additional characteristic, after recognising the key, of signalling system on and off not only visually but also with a buzzer inside the device. Two different sounds signal turning
the system on and off respectively. It can also be integrated with the access control system.
It is supplied in the following versions
20470: 2 Eikon modules
16470: 2 Idea modules
14470: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
Rated supply voltage (Vn) BUS 29 V d.c.
Protection class: IP30
Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
Consumption: 20 mA
Configuration button
Indicator LED
It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –).
The reader is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a transponder key with over 1000 billion
possible combinations
Maximum number of keys that can be managed for the function of burglar alarm system. 24 SAI + 4
SPECIAL SAI.
135
System components
Operation
• The device reads the code of the transponder key to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal operation it turns the system on and off sending the code to the control unit.
• In the configuration phase it sends the code read to the control unit if the control unit has the “Register new key”
option active and if this code is already in the device
NOTE: The configuration phase is divided into two parts:
• in the first part the device is configured irrespective of its positioning in the system (Configuration CA); to do
this observe the instructions given in the Access Control system manual.IMPORTANT: Firstly it will be
necessary to associate the reader with at least one MASTER Key passing it over the reader four times;
the SLAVE keys will then be associated (that in practice are the ones to leave with the customer).
Indeed, the reader does not allow managing the intrusion detection alarm system with the MASTER key,
but the latter is necessary for adding new SLAVE keys in the future should the end customer request
them. The MASTER key must therefore be kept.
• in the second part (Configuration SAI) the device is configured in the burglar alarm system and its
operating mode is decided (ref. Add keys - “Access Contr. Key” and “Special Access Contr. Key). All
the "Slave" keys to use in the intrusion detection alarm system must then be added again, following the
procedures illustrated in chap.7.2.
Important:
The “access control” and “Special access control” keys can be added to the intrusion detection alarm system
only if the keys that are associated with the transponder reader were previously configured in it according to the
procedures stated in the Access Control system manual.
Note: The MASTER key used to unlock the reader (see the manual of the Access Control system) does
not work in the intrusion detection alarm system; it must be kept for adding any other keys to the reader.
Indicators
• red LED on steady:
- during Configuration SAI;
• red LED blinking:
- due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm
that generated it is deleted or until the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the
system to cut off the alarm.
- when the key code has not been acknowledged. The blinking ends after a few seconds.
• green LED blinking:
- the key code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on in total mode;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
For a description of the behaviour of the LEDs during the phase of Configuration CA, refer to the Access Control
System manual.
136
System components
Settings (programmable via the control unit)
1) Tamper threshold: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical anti-tamper
in the transponder reader. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity)
2) Open if On (default No). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the transponder
reader when the key is brought near to the transponder reader and the system is on.
3) Open if on standby (default No). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the
transponder reader when the key is brought near to the transponder reader and the system is off.
4) Buzzer (default No). Value that permits setting an audible warning when, after the reader has recognised
the code of a key that has been brought near, the system is turned on or off.
IMPORTANT:
• When using the “Special Key” for switching on the intrusion detection alarm system, it is first of all
necessary to press the reader configuration button and then pass the key over it.
• Whereas, to switch off the system it is sufficient to pass the key over the reader.
• If using a “SAI Key” or an “Access Control Key CA”, for both switching on and switching off the system it is
not necessary to press the reader configuration button, but only pass the key over it.
• Any “SAI Keys” already configured with a connector (Eikon 20482, Arké 19482, Idea 16932 and Plana 14482)
will automatically be associated with all the transponder readers that may have been added to the system at
a later time.
137
System components
3.14 Smart card reader
The smart card reader is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or partially) after recognising the
code on a smart-card. Operation is identical to that of the connector with the additional possibility of interacting
with the access control system.
It is supplied in the following versions
20471: 3 Eikon modules
16471: 3 Idea modules
14471: 3 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
- Consumption: 20 mA
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
- The reader is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a smart card with over 4 billion possible
combinations
- No limit on the number of stored cards
Operation
• The device reads the code of the smart card inserted to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal
operation it turns the system on and off sending the code to the control unit.
• In the configuration phase it sends the code read to the control unit if the control unit has the “Register New
Key/Key... CA” option active and if this code is already in the device
NOTE that the configuration phase is divided into two parts
• in the first part the device is configured irrespective of its positioning (Configuration CA)
IMPORTANT: Firstly it will be necessary to associate the reader with at least one MASTER Key passing it
over the reader four times; the SLAVE keys will then be associated (that in practice are the ones to leave
with the customer). Indeed, the reader does not allow managing the intrusion detection alarm system with
the MASTER key, but the latter is necessary for adding new SLAVE keys in the future should the end customer
request them.
The MASTER key must therefore be kept.
138
System components
• in the second part (Configuration SAI) the device is configured in the burglar alarm system and its operating mode is decided. All the "Slave" keys to use in the intrusion detection alarm system must then be
added again, following the procedures illustrated in chap.7.2.
Warning: The MASTER key must used as instructed in the instructions manual of the Access Control
system, it does not work in the intrusion detection alarm system; it must be kept for adding any future SLAVE
cards to the reader.
Indicators
• red LED on steady:
- during SAI configuration and reset;
• red LED blinking:
-system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that
generated it is deleted or until the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the system
to cut off the alarm.
-when the key code has not been acknowledged. The blinking ends after a few seconds.
• green LED blinking:
- the smart-card code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on in total mode;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
For a description of the behaviour of the LEDs during the phase of Configuration CA, refer to the Access
Control System manual.
Settings that are programmable via the control unit
1) Tamper threshold: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical anti-tamper
in the transponder smart card reader. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity)
2) Open if On (default No). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the smart card
reader when the smart card is inserted in the smart card reader and the system is on;
3) Open if on standby (default No). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the
smart card reader when the smart card is inserted in the smart card reader and the system is off.
139
System components
3.15 Radio interface
The radio interface allows using the radio frequency devices to extend coverage in places or accesses where it is
not possible to add any cables and devices via BUS.
In addition it permits using one or more radio controls as a key to switch the system on/off
The device turns the system on and off (completely or the associated partitioned zones) after receiving the code
emitted by the remote controls.
It is supplied in the following versions
20493: 2 Eikon modules
19493: 2 Arké modules
16943: 2 Idea modules
14493: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
-Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 29 V d.c.
-Protection class: IP30
-Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
-Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
-Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
-Consumption: 20 mA
- Frequency of reception and transmission: double at 433 MHz and 868 MHz
-Configuration button
-Indicator LED
-It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –).
-The receiver is governed, for turning the system on and off and partitioning it, by one or more remote
controls with over 65,000 possible combinations.
-Maximum number of radio-frequency devices that can be stored: 40 for each radio interface
-Maximum number of radio interfaces that can be installed in a system: 4.
140
System components
List of Radio frequency devices that can be used
VIMAR code
DESCRIPTION/COMPOSITION
01819
Two-way remote control
01737
Passive infrared intrusion detector, battery power supply (supplied).
01738
Magnetic contact for doors and windows, battery power supply (supplied).
01744
Water detector for protection against flooding, battery power supply (supplied).
01747
Siren for outdoor use, battery power supply (supplied)
00912
9 V 12 Ah alkaline battery for siren for outdoor use
N.B. The detectors 01737 and 01738 are equipped with an input terminal on which can be connected a NC
contact or a roller shutters contact; to enable this it is necessary to use the dip switches on the card of the
devices (see the manual of the radio interface 20493-16943-14493).
Operation
The device receives the transmissions of the radio wave signals emitted by the radio-frequency devices and by
the remote control.
• Normal operation: receives the information from the radio-frequency devices (tamper alarm, burglar
alarm, technical alarm, low battery). It receives the codes from the remote controls and sends them to the
control unit; in addition it receives information from the control unit on the system status and sends it to the
siren and remote controls.
• Configuration: in the phase of adding radio frequency devices it saves the characteristics of the
component that has responded and communicates some information to the control unit. This procedure is
described on page 146.
• Supervision: this function checks that the radio frequency devices configured in the system work properly; if a device fails to signal its presence for a time of 4 h, the interface sends a "no device" message
to the control unit. To obtain this function the “Supervision” parameter must be active.
Note: If the intrusion detection alarm system is turned on and a contact has accidentally been left open (a window
for instance), the system will not turn on and the control unit will display the alarm message and the zone to which
the contact left open belongs. If you repeat the process for turning it on, the system will activate itself as normal
even with the contact open.
141
System components
Indicators
• red LED on steady:
- during configuration and reset;
• red LED blinking:
- due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that
generated it is deleted or until the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to
cut off the alarm.
• green LED blinking:
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on not partitioned;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- it blinks for a few seconds after the phase of resetting the device.
Settings that are programmable via the control unit
1) Tamper threshold: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical antitamper in
the radio interface Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity)
2) Supervision (default Off). Supervision of the Radio Frequency detectors on (On) or off (Off);
3) Ret. Att.Zones 1-10: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
4) Ret. Att.Zones 11-20: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
5) Ret. Att.Zones 21-30: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
6) Associated RF devices: radio-frequency devices configured in the interface.
If a radio frequency detector for alarms of a technical type (water detector) is configured in the same zone
as a relay actuator (one-position stable), this will switch over when the detector signals the alarm..
Note: If it is necessary for the "PANIC" button of the remote control 01819 to activate the audible panic alarm,
the interface must be configured in zone 31.
• Remote control (art. 01819)
The remote control has 4 keys to transmit 4 different commands to the radio interface; the latter sends these
commands to the control unit. Command transmission is indicated by the orange LED of the remote control
lighting up.
142
System components
Control transmission and confirmation LED
OFF button
PANIC button
ON 1 button
ON 2 button
Operation
Pressing the 4 keys on the remote control provides 4 different functions
• Button 1 OFF: Turning the system off (according to the partitions associated with the remote control code - see
the menu Partitions  Associate part.  RF remote controls  Associated partitions
• Button 2 ON 1: Turning the system on (according to the partitions associated with the remote control
code - see the menu Partitions  Associate part.  RF remote controls  Associated partitions.
• Button 3 PANIC: used to manage the panic signal.
• Button 4 ON 2: Turning the system on (according to the partitions associated with one of the users on the
control unit - see the menu Partitions  Associate part.  RF remote controls  Associated user.
• Command confirmation and transmission LED: signals transmission of the code and displays system on/off for
approximately one second after sending the code.
LED indicators:
• blinking orange: code transmission
• green: system off or interface in off zone
• red: system on or interface in active zone
The remote control has the function of a connector, moreover for key 3 it is possible to select:
PANIC FUNCTION WITH AUDIBLE WARNING: the radio interface must be configured in zone 31. In this
way, on pressing the PANIC button the siren is activated.
PANIC BUTTON FUNCTION WITHOUT AUDIBLE WARNING but with a message: the radio interface and an
actuator must be configured in the same zone from 1 to 30. The actuator must be connected to a channel
of the dialler. In this way, on pressing the PANIC button the message is sent
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: the radio interface and an actuator must be configured in the same zone from
1 to 30. In this way, on pressing the PANIC button the state of the actuator is switched over (one-position stable
actuator)
To silence the sirens turn the system on and off with the remote control by pressing
the ON (1 or 2) and OFF butAntintrusione
tons in sequence, or on the control unit with the operation “Stop Alarm”
The various functions are mutually exclusive.
.
Impianto
attivato
OK
Nessun Allarme
Menu Setup
143
Powering up the system
4. Powering up the system
• Connect the power supply to the 230 V~ mains and check that the bus cables have the following connections
with Vimar cable 01840.Y (2x0.50 mm2, rated voltage to earth 400 V, suited for installation with Category I power
cables) or KNX certified:
- red cable (+)
- black cable (–)
N.B. The bus is polarized so it is recommended to check its polarization before connecting all the
devices.
• Power up the system by connecting the electric mains;
• Connect the batteries of the sirens paying attention to the polarities;
Under these conditions the system is idle:
- there is no communication on the bus;
- the control unit is on stand-by.
• Check that on the connecting terminals of all the devices connected to the system there is the supply
voltage (min. 27 V d.c. - max 30 V).
NOTE: If there is no mains voltage, on the connecting terminals of all the devices connected to the system there
must be a voltage of 24 V d.c. (for at least 24 h), supplied by the buffer batteries.
IMPORTANT:
• The maximum distance for connections between the power supply 01401 and the back-up unit 01804
or 01807 is equal to 1 m.
• The maximum distance for connections between the back-up unit 01804 or 01807 and the auxiliary
battery holder unit 01803 is equal to 1 m.
144
Configuration
5. Configuration
The menu permits configuring the system, setting its management and performing the fault-diagnosis operations
To configure a system, up to 30 different zones can be created and in each one of them associate a number of
devices; in a room, for example, to manage the partitions in the best way, the perimeter detectors can be configured
in one zone and the infrared ones in another.
WARNING: "Zone 31” is reserved to the sirens, the back-up units and possibly the contact interfaces or RF
interfaces that are used for advanced applications (see chap.11 of this manual). If one or more contact or RF interfaces
are configured in zone 31 it is possible to activate a sound signal of the siren for outdoor use, even with the system
switched off or with any partitioning of the system.
This function only applies to intrusion detection alarm system devices such as contact interfaces 20490.119490.1-16940.1-14490.1, 12 V contact interfaces 20491-16941-14491 and radio interfaces 20493-16943-14493.
In short, therefore, if one or more of these devices are configured in zone 31 and detect an alarm, the siren
generates the sound signal whatever the system status.
To configure the system it is necessary, first of all, to create the groups/zones for the intrusion detection alarm
system; the procedure to follow is similar to the one for creating home automation system groups (Automations,
Load Control, HVAC control, etc.). See also the Automation section on page 29.
n Create an intrusion detection alarm system group/zone.
The groups/zones to which the SAI devices must be associated are created with the control unit Setup menu.
These zones will then be able to be activated simultaneously or partially and will be managed with the Setup
menu that is accessed from the main screen of the intrusion detection alarm system.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Add
Set the index and the name of the group/zone and save by touching Save.
There are 30 groups/zones available plus zone 31 reserved solely for the Backup unit, the siren for outdoor
use and the devices that can be configured for the panic alarm.
n Rename Group/Zone.
The menu enables renaming the groups/zones of the system
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group/
zone

Edit group name
Enter the name of the group and confirm by touching Save.
Carry out the same procedure on all the groups to rename.
n Remove group/zone.
The menu enables removing the groups/zones of the system
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group/
zone to remove  Remove group.
Delete all information associated with the selected Group?  Yes
The control unit confirms removal and goes back to displaying the list of groups/zones.
145
Group/zone definition
n Add SAI device to group/zone.
Press, for approximately 1 s, the configuration button of the SAI device to add to the selected group/zone;
the red LED of the device will light up. Completion of this operation is confirmed by a message on the control
unit and by the red LED going out on the device.
If the control unit signals that there is already a device with the same address, this device must be reset and
reconfigured (so that it changes address).
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group/
zone for adding the device  Add
In the phase of configuration, it is recommended to proceed by configuring first always the siren
01806 since it is the only device in the system whose address cannot be changed.
The SAI radio interfaces can be added to any group/zone; the device is recognized and integrated in the
group/zone.
the SAI control unit manages up to 60 bus devices, among which 4 RF radio interfaces (20493,16943,14493).
n Remove bus devices
Used to remove the bus devices configured in the groups/zones.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group/zone in which the device
to remove is configured  Associated devices  Select the device to remove  Remove device
Proceed to remove the device  Yes
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
n Add RF device to group/zone.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group/
zone where the RF interface has been inserted
Device parameters
RF device
 RF devices
 Add

 Associated devices  Select the RF interface 
Select the group/zone where you want to configure the
Insert the battery in the RF device to be associated with the chosen group/zone and follow the instructions
given in the OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT column of the table shown on the following page.
Each SAI radio interface enables configuring up to 40 RF devices; on the control unit, each of the RF
devices configured in a radio interface is marked by a number (shown on the right) that indicates the
zone to which it belongs.
n Remove RF devices
Used to remove the RF devices linked to the relevant interface.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups  Select the group/
zone where the RF interface has been inserted
 Associated devices  Select the RF interface 
 Remove device
Device parameters  RF devices  Select the RF device to remove
Proceed to remove the device  Yes
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
146
Configuration
Code
DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT
01819
Two-way remote control
Press the OFF and ON 1 buttons together; the control
unit signals successful saving.
Passive infrared intrusion detector.
Insert the battery into the detector; the red LED briefly
lights up and the control unit signals successful saving. To configure the external N/C contact it is necessary to move dip-switch 2 onto ON.
01738
Magnetic contact for doors and windows.
Insert the battery into the contact; the red LED briefly
lights up and the control unit signals successful saving. To configure the external N/C contact it is necessary to move dip-switch 2 onto ON.
01744
Water detector for protection against
flooding
Insert the battery into the detector; the red LED
briefly lights up and the control unit signals successful saving.
01747
Siren for outdoor use
Insert the battery 00912 into the siren; the control unit
will signal successful saving. Then turn on the system;
the siren will confirm with 6 beeps
01737
n Reset bus devices
• As regards the passive infrared presence detectors (20485, 20486, 16935 and 14485), the contact interfaces
(20490.1, 20491, 19490.1, 19491, 16940.1, 16941, 14490.1 and 14491), digital keypads (20483, 16933
and 14483) mini surface-mounting detectors 01828, sirens for indoor use (20495, 16945 and 14495) radio
interfaces (20493, 16943 and 14493), the procedure, that we will indicate with A, is similar to that of the
automation devices, namely:
Setup  Configuration  Reset management  Device reset
Press the device configuration button and release it only after the red LED has gone out.
• For all the other SAI devices, the procedure, which we will indicate with B, is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Reset management  Device reset
Press and release the device configuration button and select Back on the control unit; finally press
the device button again and release it only after the red LED has gone out.
147
Configuration
Device
Infrared detector
Adjustable infrared detector
Dual technology recess-mounting IR detector
Digital keypad
Backup unit
Backup unit for DIN rail (60715 TH35)
Siren for outdoor use
Siren for indoor use
2-input contact interface
Contact interface 12 V
Relay actuator
Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting
Dual technology surface-mounting detector
Transponder reader
Smart card reader
Radio interface
Connector
Reset
type
Notes
A
A
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
B
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
B
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
B
B
B
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
B
The RF radio interface is reset according to the device reset procedure that will delete its address and all the
radio frequency devices stored in it.
With this menu you can change the parameters of all the configured bus devices in the system
Setup
n Parameters.
148
 Configuration  Groups Intrusion detection alarm system groups  With a
select the group/zone  Associated devices  Select the device  Device parameters
S.A.I. Setup
6. S.A.I. Setup
6.1. Partitions
This menu is fundamental as it permits creating groups of zones in the system (partitions) that can be turned on/
off and allows adding/removing zones to/from these partitions
In the phase of configuring the partitions, it is important to bear in mind that each zone can be added to one and
only one partition; on the contrary, the control unit will display the following error message:
“Unable to continue. Partitioning not complete“. In addition, error messages will be displayed if there are any
empty partitions (that is without any associated zones) or empty zones (that is without any devices) associated
with the partition.
The By-me intrusion detection alarm system, in both the phases of turning on and off, enables creating different
partitions of the system, differentiating them for each user; this is whether using SAI Keys or Special SAI Keys.
The SAI Keys function with each connector of the system (each one of which can have a different partition) while
the Special Keys only function on the connectors that, via the control unit, have been associated (it will then be with
the control unit, by associating the connectors, that you choose which partitions these will turn on/off)
With the remote control 01819 it is possible to partition the system with the "ON 1" button or to the "ON 2" button
(that will be associated with a user); for “ON 1" simply set the partitioning for the code of the RF remote control.
The different partitions, lastly, can be associated with the PINs of the numerical keypad 20483-16933-14483; each
set code corresponds to a specific list of partitions that allows easily turning the system on/off totally or partially.
The operations to carry out are, in sequence
1. Configure connectors, digital keypads, detectors and all the other burglar alarm devices.
2. Add the various SAI Keys, SPECIAL Keys, set the PIN codes of the keypad, etc.
3. Create the various partitions associating the respective zones.
4. Associate the various partitions with the connectors, SPECIAL Keys, PIN codes of the keypads, RF remote controls
to the control unit, etc.
6.1.1 Partition management
This menu is used to create at most 9 partitions; it is moreover possible to name and delete the partitions and
associate the zones with these partitions.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Partitions  Partition management 
Add
Set the index and the name of the partition and select Next; a list of the configured groups/zones will be
displayed.
Touching them one by one, associate the partition just created with one or more zones from among the ones not yet
assigned to other partitions; the association will be highlighted by the ' icon.
Select Save to store the new partition in memory.
Each zone that is removed from a partition becomes free and can therefore be associated with another
partition; remember that a zone can be assigned to one and only one of the partitions defined in the phase
of configuring the system.
149
S.A.I. Setup
If a zone must be able to be managed, for example, by two users with a different keypad PIN, it is wise to
add this zone on its own to a partition and then associate this to both PINs
If you want to change a previously configured partition, the menu to use is the following one:
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Partitions  Partition management 
Select the partition to change
• Associated zones: used to change the zones associated with the selected partition.
• Change name: used to change the name of the selected partition.
• Remove partition used to remove the selected partition
6.1.2 Partition association
This menu permits associating partitions to devices such as connectors, keys, keypads, remote controls in
the intrusion detection alarm system.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Partitions  Partition association
• Users
This is used, by the users recognized by the system, to associate the corresponding partitions to be turned on or off.
Select the desired user and touch the partitions to be associated; the linking will be highlighted with the '
icon.
By selecting Totally On, the user can turn on the entire system, while if only some partitions are marked
the user only turns on the zones belonging to the indicated partitions.
By selecting Totally Off, the user can switch off the entire system otherwise he can turn off only the
zones belonging to the associated partitions.
Selecting the Events Program. User finally permits turning on the system by an events programme
according to an assigned profile.
• Connectors
This is used to associate the connectors with the corresponding partitions to be turned on or off.
Select the desired connector and touch the partitions to be associated; the linking will be highlighted with the
' icon.
By selecting Totally On, the connector turns on the entire system, while if only some partitions are
marked it turns on the zones belonging to the indicated partitions.
By selecting Totally Off, the connector switches off the entire system otherwise it can turn off only the
zones belonging to the associated partitions.
• Interfaces
This option is used to associate a user with the selected interface.
Select the desired communicator or USB interface
 Associated user  Select the desired user  Save
Now, with the request to turn on from the interface, the system will turn on according to the association of
the set partitions for that specific user
150
S.A.I. Setup
• Special keys
This is used to associate the special keys with the corresponding partitions to be turned on or off:
Select the desired key and touch the partitions to be associated; the linking will be highlighted with the ' icon.
By selecting Totally On, the key turns on the entire system, while if only some partitions are marked it
turns on the zones belonging to the indicated partitions.
By selecting Totally Off, the key switches off the entire system otherwise it can turn off only the zones
belonging to the associated partitions.
• Keypad codes
This is used to associate the PIN codes of the digital keypads with the corresponding partitions to turn on or off.
Select the desired keypad and touch the partitions to be associated; the linking will be highlighted with the
 icon.
By selecting Totally On the PIN can turn the system on and off completely and partially, while if some
partitions are marked the PIN only turns on and off the zones belonging
to the indicated partitions. The digital keypad with which changes are made to the system status (on,
off, etc.) emits an audible warning that signals the operation has been performed.
For the characteristics and parameters of the digital keypad, see par. 3.4 of this manual.
• RF remote controls
This allows associating the radio remote control with both the user and the partitions to turn on and off:
Select the desired RF remote control
 Associated partitions  Select the partitions to associate  Save
The partitions, highlighted by the  icon, are associated with the “ON 1” button
Turning these partitions on/off (and therefore the associated zones) can be differentiated also according to the
user profile matched with the selected RF remote control:
Select the desired RF remote control
 Associated user 
Select the desired user  Save
The partitions associated with the selected user are associated with the "ON 2" button of the previously
selected RF remote control.
N.B.: If there is more than one remote control, to know which one you want to partition you need to
identify it by following the procedures illustrated in paragraph 6.2.3.
6.2. S.A.I. key management
This menu is used to add, remove and identify the transponder keys and the codes of the keypad that are necessary for turning the system on/off, as well as monitoring them.
The SAI keys that turn on the zones associated with the connectors are copied onto all the connectors
automatically; these keys can then be used on all the connectors present. The SPECIAL SAI keys turn on
only the zones associated with the keys and only via the connector through which the enabling operation
was performed for that key (therefore they can only be used on that connector).
There can also be SAI keys and Special SAI keys belonging to connectors of the Access Control System
(transponder and/or smart card reader); before being configured in the intrusion detection alarm system (as key
for Access Control CA or as Special Access Contr. CA) they must be associated with their respective device
according to the procedures for the Access Control system.
151
S.A.I. Setup
The “Special” keys can be configured on a number of connectors to each one of which a dedicated partition can
be associated for each special key with which it is associated.
The PIN codes of the keypad 20483,16933 and 14483 are managed by the system as if they were SAI keys and
therefore, once configured, they are automatically copied onto all the other keypads in the system.
6.2.1 Register a new key and digital keypad PIN.
This is used to configure and enable the transponder keys and digital keypads that are to switch the system
on and off according to the desired type
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Key management  Key configuration  Add
The following modes of configuration are possible
- SAI (numbering from 1 to 24)
- Special SAI (numbering from 25 to 88)
- Access Control CA (as SAI key)
- Special Access Contr. CA (as SPECIAL SAI key)
- Special CA validator (as SPECIAL SAI key)
- Keypad PIN code (numbering from 1 to 30).
Select the desired mode and touch Next.
• SAI and Special SAI
-Move the key near to one of the connectors; the control unit will save the code. Touch Next to confirm.
-Repeat this operation for all the keys to store in memory.
During this phase all the SAI keys must be enabled with the same connector and the Special SAI keys
must be saved in their connector (that is the one on which they must work).
• Keypad PIN code
-Enter the 5-digit PIN on the keypad you want to save and press the ok button on the keypad.
-Check that the control unit display shows the PIN is correct and touch Next to confirm.
6.2.2 Remove the key and digital keypad PIN.
Used to delete the transponder keys and digital keypads.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Key management  Key configuration

Select the key or keypad code to remove
 Remove key or
Remove code  Yes
6.2.3 Identification of SAI key, PIN code of the digital keypad and RF remote controls.
This menu is used, on bringing the keys near to one of the connectors on which it is saved, to identify the
information on the SAI key (key number, type, etc.); in addition, it is used to identify the codes for the digital
keypads and radio remote controls in the system.
Main menu  Intrusion Detection Alarm System  Setup  Key management  Key identification
152
• Move the key near to the connector that, in its turn, will transmit the code to the control unit; in the case of
the "Special" key, if this is enabled on the same connector, the control unit will display the information regarding that key.
With this procedure all the types of key configured in the system are identified
S.A.I. Setup
• To identify the PIN of the keypad it is necessary to enter this PIN on the keypad and press the ok button;
then press the 0 button and finally confirm with ok.
The control unit will display the keypad number (1, 2, etc. according to the number of keypads in the system),
the name of the device and the PIN code keyed in
• For the RF remote controls, simply press the ON 1 or ON 2 button; the control unit will display the code of
the RF remote control.
6.2.4 Associate special key with connectors.
After identifying a Special SAI key it is possible to associate the key with more connectors in other zones:
Main menu  Intrusion Detection Alarm System  Setup  Key management  Key configuration
 Special key  Associated connectors
It is then possible, after selecting the connector, to turn the key on it on or off
Before completing the operation it is necessary to save the settings by touching Save.
If all the connectors are deselected for a special key, the key is automatically removed from the system
Therefore if you want to associate the special key with a new connector, removing it from all the others, it is
first necessary to select the new connector and then deselect the other connectors
6.3 Message Management
With this menu it is possible to set the zone to which one or more of the available messages are to be sent,
in order to assign a special function to the devices present in the same zone; it is moreover possible to select
the length of the time interval within which the control unit continues to send the set message. Thanks to these
options it is possible, for example, to send a message to a zone where a relay is configured that will switch over
when this message arrives.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management
The system is able to send the following messages:
- System status (on, off)
- Alarm (intrusion)
- Tamper alarm (tampering)
- Low battery (the battery of the back-up unit is running down)
- No mains (no voltage on the bus).
N.B.: Except for "System Status", it is possible to associate the management of a number of messages to the
same zone provided that the actuator configured in it is set as one-position stable.
6.3.1 The System Status message.
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the System Status message
is to be sent.
It is moreover possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; the value of the time of duration can be set within the range of between 0 s and 20 min
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over on turning on the system (if the actuator is
set as two-position stable, it will switch over onto the previous status only by turning off the system).
153
S.A.I. Setup
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  System status
 Destination
Select the Zone or set the ID address of the group for which the message is intended.
Touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  System status
 Signal duration [min:s]
Set the duration; touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
6.3.2 The Alarm message.
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the alarm message generated
by any system device is to be sent.
It is moreover possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; the value of the time of duration can be set within the range of between 0 s and 20 min.
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over when an alarm message arrives (if the
actuator is set as two-position stable, it will switch over automatically at the end of the set time).
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  Alarm  Destination
Select the Zone or set the ID address of the group for which the message is intended.
Touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system
Signal duration [min:s]
 Setup  Message Management  Alarm 
Set the duration; touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
6.3.3 The Tamper Alarm message.
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the message is to be sent.
It is moreover possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; the value of the time of duration can be set within the range of between 0 s and 20 min
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over on turning on the system (if the actuator is
set as two-position stable, it will switch over onto the previous status only by turning off the system).
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  Tamper alarm
 Destination
Select the Zone or set the ID address of the group for which the message is intended.
Touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  Tamper alarm
 Signal duration [min:s]
Set the duration; touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
154
S.A.I. Setup
6.3.4 The Low Battery message.
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the “Low Battery” message
generated by the back-up unit is to be sent if the batteries discharge due to a protracted mains power shortage.
It is moreover possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; this value can be set within the range of between 0 s and 20 min.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  Low battery
 Destination
Select the Zone or set the ID address of the group for which the message is intended.
Touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  Low battery
 Signal duration [min:s]
Set the duration; touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
6.3.5 The No Mains message.
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the “No Mains” message
generated by the back-up unit is to be sent.
It is moreover possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; this value can be set within the range of between 0 s and 20 min.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  No mains
 Destination
Select the Zone or set the ID address of the group for which the message is intended.
Touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Message Management  No mains 
Signal duration [min:s]
Set the duration; touch Next  Set and select Save to confirm.
6.4 Anti-tamper
With the control unit it is possible to enable or disable the anti-tamper system for all the system components and
for the control unit itself; the latter manages its own optical anti-tamper device on its back.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Anti-tamper
The following options are available:
 Anti-tamper sensitivity: can be set to 0 (disabled) or a value from 1 to 15.
 Anti-tamper default: setting it to On activates also all the tampers of devices configured afterwards
(and not those already previously configured).
Set the desired options and touch Set; finally select Save to confirm.
155
S.A.I. Setup
6.5 Walk test
The Walk test is a function that allows checking the angle of detection of the volumetric sensors, contact interfaces, etc. (configured in the zones from 1 to 30) and, more in general, checking that the system works properly
without the sirens for outdoor use sounding.
During the Walk test, the system behaves as if it were normally turned on but:
• the sound of the sirens and indoor audible warnings is blocked;
• the alarm signals from the devices are signalled and shown on the control unit display;
• the entry and exit delays are cancelled that is the sensors configured as delayed behave as if they were instantaneous;
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  Walktest
 Running the test
- Move in front of the IR sensors and check that the motion is detected and signalled on the LED of the detector
and on the control unit display;
- Generate an alarm on the perimeter devices (magnetic contacts) and on those for detecting technical alarms
(gas detectors, etc.); check that the alarm is detected and there is the relevant signal on the LED of the contact
interface and on the control unit display;
To end the test touch End; a list of the devices that detected the alarm during the Walk test is displayed.
To view the details of a walk test event it is necessary, after selecting it, to touch
the corresponding menu item.
Select Exit to return to the main menu.
6.6 Events List
By selecting this option you can view the main operations performed by and on the system,such as, for example,
the days elapsed since activating the system, alarms occurring, switch ons and offs, etc.
The maximum number of events that can be saved is 80.
Main menu  Intrusion detection alarm system  Setup  List of events
The list of recorded events is displayed; selecting the desired event displays the properties of the event such as
date, time, type of event, device generating the alarm and the zone, if any, to which a signal has been sent (if set
with the Message Management menu).
To view the details of an event it is necessary, after selecting it, to touch the corresponding menu item.
On the page with the event details it is possible, by touching
Options, to view the next and previous event
or delete the list of events.
156
S.A.I. Setup
6.7 List of alarms
Antintrusione
Impianto
attivato
OK
Nessun
Allarme
icon on
the main
Menu Setup
By touching the
screen of the intrusion detection alarm system, it is possible to view the
alarms that occurred with the date and time of the alarm, the zone and the devices involved, the type of alarm
and the zone, if any, to which a message associated with this type of alarm is sent.
Alarm System
SAI
on
OK
No Allarm
Menu Setup
The possible types of alarm are the following:
• Intrusion alarm
• Intrusion alarm input 1 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Intrusion alarm input 2 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Panic alarm
• Roller shutters alarm input 1 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Roller shutters alarm input 2 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Continuity wire alarm
• Continuity wire alarm 1 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Continuity wire alarm 2 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Entrance tamper alarm
• Tamper alarm input 1 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Tamper alarm input 2 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Tamper alarm
• Microswitch alarm
• Flame alarm (only for siren for outdoor use)
• Broken filament alarm (only for siren for outdoor use)
• External tamper alarm (only for relay actuator)
• No device
• No mains (only for back-up unit)
• Low battery
• Technical alarm
• Technical alarm input 1 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• Technical alarm input 2 (only for contacts interface with 2 inputs)
• No horn (only for siren for outdoor use)
157
Setting parameters
7. Setting parameters
By scrolling through the list of zones of the intrusion detection alarm system it is possible to select them to display
the configured devices and if necessary refer to and modify the operating parameters.
7.1 Back-up unit
The available parameters are:
- Anti-tamper No or Yes
- Beep On/Off. No or Yes: to have the beep at the time of turning the system on and off
- Sound (can be selected to identify a system tamper alarm, cover tamper alarm, intrusion alarm, watchdog);
- Sound duration: up to 5 min (can be set in steps of 5 s).
7.2 Siren for outdoor use
The available parameters are:
- Tamper control:
- Low battery: On or Off
- Horn control: On or Off;
- Filament check: On or Off;
- Thermal lance check: On or Off;
- Microswitch check: On or Off
- Anti-foam check: On or Off;
- Sound (can be selected to identify a system tamper alarm, siren tamper alarm, intrusion alarm, watchdog);
- Sound duration: up to 5 min (can be set in steps of 5 s).
7.3 IR presence detector
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s;
- Pulse threshold: can be set to a value of from 1 to 10.
- Time threshold: can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s;
- Brightness threshold: can be set to a value of from 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
- Duration of actuation: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
7.4 Connector
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Open if ON
- Open if on STAND-BY
7.5 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
The available parameters are:
- Anti-tamper: No if disabled, Yes if enabled
- LED control: Yes or No
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s
- Pulse threshold: can be set to a value of from 1 to 20
158
Setting parameters
7.6 Radio frequency interface
The available parameters are:
-Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
-Supervision: can be turned off (Off) or on (On).
-Zone ON delay from 1 to 10: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
-Zone ON delay from 11 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
-Zone ON delay from 21 to 30: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
-Associated RF devices: to select the remote controls and the radio-frequency detectors.
7.7 Smart card reader
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
- Open if ON: Yes or No
- Open if on STAND-BY: Yes or No
7.8 Transponder reader
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
- Open if ON: Yes or No
- Open if on STAND-BY: Yes or No
- Buzzer: Yes or No
7.9 Relay actuator
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Operation: one-position stable or two-position stable;
- External tamper: No or Yes;
- On delay: 0 = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 250 s in steps of 1 s;
- Off delay: 0 = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 250 s in steps of 1 s.
7.10 Backup unit for DIN rail (60715 TH35)
The available parameters are:
- Anti-tamper: Yes or No.
7.11 Siren for indoor use
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Beep On/Off: see siren for outdoor use;
- Sound: see siren for outdoor use;
- Sound duration: see siren for outdoor use.
159
Setting parameters
7.12 Dual technology recess-mounting detector
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- LED enabling: Yes or No
- Actuation duration: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
- Brightness threshold: can be set to a value of from 0% to 100% in steps of 1%
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 12 s;
- Pulse threshold: can be set to a value of from 1 to 10;
- PIR time threshold: can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s.
7.13 Mini IR detector for surface-mounting
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Actuation duration: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
- Brightness threshold: can be set to a value of from 0% to 100% in steps of 1%
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 12 s;
- Pulse threshold: can be set to a value of from 1 to 10;
- PIR time threshold: can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s.
- Duration of actuation: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
7.14 Digital keypad
The available parameters are:
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Open if ON: Yes or No;
- Open if on STAND-BY: Yes or No;
- Buzzer: Yes or No;
- Button beeping: Yes or No;
- Partition visibility: Yes or No.
7.15 2-input contact interface
The available parameters are:
- Input 1 operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- off.
- Input 2 operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- off.
160
Setting parameters
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s.
- Contact threshold: from 0 to 3;
- Roller shutters threshold: from 0 to 31 with or without check on short circuit.
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Open if ON: Yes or No
- Open if on STAND-BY: Yes or No
7.16 12 V contact interface
The available parameters are:
- Input 1 operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- off.
- On delay: 0 s = instantaneous It can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s.
- Contact threshold: from 0 to 3;
- Roller shutters threshold: from 0 to 31 with or without check on short circuit.
- Tamper threshold: 0 = tamper switched off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Open if ON: Yes or No
- Open if on STAND-BY: Yes or No
161
Using the system
8. Using the system
There follow the main operations to carry out for normal system use.
8.1 Turning On
The system is turned on directly from the control unit or the transponder key set in contact with the surface of
the connector in the position shown by the arrow, entering the code either on the keypad or with the remote
control 01819 or with a smart card and reader.
N.B. If the control unit is in one of the submenus related to the SAI Setup menu, the above operations
for turning on are not carried out.
The system is turned off: Antintrusione
Impianto
- directly from the control unitattivato
with the
icon, first keying in a password (if set beforehand);
OK
- setting the transponder key
inAllarme
contact with the connector (which turns off all the zones and silences any
Nessun
Menu Setup
alarms).
- via transponder reader;
- via smart card reader;
- via the radio interface (by remote control);
- via the phone dialler;
- via the touch screen;
- via Web Server.
Turning off the system is signalled on the display of the control unit and the LEDs of the connectors will go back
out if there are no alarms in the system.
In this way all the non-partitioned zones associated with that specific connector are turned on (activated).
The control unit display and the LEDs of the related connectors will be signalled in this way:
- if the connector LEDs are green and on steady the system is completely switched on;
- if the connector LEDs are green and blinking the system is switched on in partitioned mode;
- if the key is not recognised the red LED of the connector blinks;
Antintrusione
Impiantopartitioning from control unit
8.2 Temporary
attivato
OK
Nessun Allarme
By touching
the
icon it is possible to cut off some zones irrespective of the connector, key or remote
Menu Setup
control used to turn on the system. Excluding a zone from being turned on in any way is highlighted by there
not being the  icon alongside the name of the zone.
After turning the required zones on/off, confirm with Save.
This partitioning will be added to the others no matter how the intrusion detection alarm system will be
turned on and until you return to the menu to reactivate the zones.
8.3 Partitioning via connector
When the system is turned on with a connector, all the zones associated with it will be turned on while the other
zones will remain partitioned (off).
8.4 Delayed detectors
All the detectors can be programmed as instantaneous or delayed so as to allow the user to leave a protected
room (when turning on the system) or enter it (turning the system off obviously within the set delay time).
162
Using the system
8.5 Alarm management
The possible alarms are:
- intrusion alarm;
- tamper alarm;
- technical alarm;
- panic alarm;
- no mains alarm;
- low battery alarm.
• Intrusion alarm
Intrusion alarms, generated only with the system switched on, cause a high-power sound to be emitted by
the sirens for outdoor use and by the siren for indoor use in the back-up unit; the intrusion alarm counters are
zeroed each time the system is subsequently switched on and at this time the memory LEDs are switched off.
• Tamper alarm
The alarm is generated with the system turned both on and off and it can be caused by:
- tampering with one or more devices for attempted extraction, cutting wires on contact interface, etc.;
- damaged device;
- cutting the bus.
• Technical alarm
It is generated with the system either on or off, provided that the corresponding input has been enabled. No
sound signal is generated; the control unit saves the alarm and, via the relay actuator, turns on the phone dialler
(where applicable) that calls the set numbers.
• Panic alarm
It is generated by a device (an ordinary NO or NC button, remote control, etc.) connected to a contact interface
or a radio frequency interface configured in zone 31. No messages are displayed on the control unit and the
alarm signal can be blocked
by turning the intrusion detection alarm system on and off or directly on the control
Antintrusione
Impianto
unit by touching the
icon.
attivato
OK
In addition, it is possible to Nessun
obtain
a silent alarm if the contact interface is configured in another zone where there
Allarme
is also a relay actuator (toMenu
turn onSetup
the phone dialler for instance).
• No mains alarm
It is generated in the event of a power failure with the transmission of a message that makes a relay switch over
(to turn on the phone dialler for instance).
• Low battery alarm
It is generated with the transmission of a message that makes a relay switch over if the batteries of the back-up
unit are running down due to extended mains power failure.
163
Summary of indicators
9. Summary of indicators
Problem
Cause
Solution
During the phase of adding a
device the control unit display
shows The device is already
present in the system”.
There are 2 devices with the
same address.
The device's red LED in the configuration
phase is on. In the control unit exit from
the Add device menu and enter the
Reset device procedure; now carry out
the procedure described on page 147.
During an alarm signal the siren
does not emit any sound but
the flasher makes its visual signal.
The parameter of the siren
sound setting is disabled or
the horn wire is not connected.
From the “Configuration - Groups
- Intrusion detection alarm system
groups - Select group/zone 31 Associated devices - Device parameters.
On displaying the list of configured
devices, select Siren and set the type
of sound (see page 111).
The control unit display shows
the flat battery message.
Battery flat or damaged or fuse
blown.
Check the battery charge, its connection
and the integrity of the fuse on the electronic card of the back-up unit.
During the phase of configuring
the transponder keys they are
not saved.
The connector is not able to
acquire the codes.
From the “Intrusion detection alarm system - SAI Setup - Key configuration
- Key management - Add” menu, proceed again with saving the transponder
keys according to the desired type.
Check moreover that the key is positioned correctly on the connector (the
LED of the device must be blinking green).
After supplying power to the
system the various components
do not switch on.
The twisted pair does not
power the devices (the twisted
pair is not live)
Check the power supply on the input of
the power supply.
Check that the output voltage is 29 V d.c.
If there is no voltage, check that the circuit wiring is correct, that the twisted pair
is not shorted and check that the polarities of the devices are respected.
164
Summary of indicators
Problem
Cause
Solution
In the test/configuration phase
one or more devices fails to
turn on.
The twisted pair is broken
or has been damaged during
installation.
Check that the output voltage of the power
supply is greater than 24 V.
if it is lower, check the current supplied; if
it exceeds 320 mA check the power input
of the single components starting with the
siren for outdoor use.
If none of the above is found, check there is
voltage on the relevant devices; if it is lower
than 24 V check the connections and/or
that the the relevant length of the duplex
cable is not damaged.
If there is no mains supply, the
system will send a message to
the control unit.
The back-up unit is not able to
power the system
Check the system power input; check the
state of the battery; check the fuse of the
back-up unit; check the polarity of the
devices is correct.
The system generates the tamper alarm.
Incorrect setting of the antitamper threshold.
Decrease the value of the anti-tamper
threshold of the devices and check the
cover of the back-up unit and of the outdoor siren is closed properly.
Attempting to turn on the system will display this message:
“Partitioning is not complete. Unable to continue."
At least one zone is not associated with any partition.
Partitioning via the "Partitioning" menu
(see page 148).
Attempting to turn on the system will display this message:
“At least one zone of the
system is empty. Unable to
continue."
At least one zone has been
created, but there are no
devices inside it.
Delete all the empty zones.
165
Glossary
10. Glossary
Alarm
Signal of a state of danger for life, property or the surrounding environment.
Intrusion alarm
Alarm generated by a presence, entry or attempted intrusion in a surveilled place.
Tamper alarm (tampering)
Alarm generated by the detection of attempted tampering with the device. This function is often indicated with the
term 24 h to specify that it is always on.
technical alarm
Alarm generated by systems other than a burglar alarm such as, for example, gas detection, water, smoke, etc.
Self-powering
Characteristic of an appliance, operating with a power demand, to have its own power supply.
Self-protection
Capacity of various devices and connections to recognise and generate an alarm signal when faced with attempted tampering and/or alteration of their physical and functional state.
Path of last exit/first entry
Place where a detector is usually installed that is programmed with a time lag to allow exit or entry without immediately causing an alarm.
Detector
Device able to generate an intrusion signal in response to detecting an abnormal condition indicating the presence of danger.
Intrusion detection alarm system
This is an alarm system to detect and indicate the presence, entry or attempted entry of an intruder in a place
that may or not be surveilled.
Zone
Part of the system comprising a specific group of detectors and/or connectors.
Partitioning
Set of zones that can be switched on/off at the same time.
166
Glossary
Operating states of the system
System on
The system is defined to be On when it is working and able to generate an intrusion alarm from one of the zones
into which it has been divided.
System in Configuration
The system is defined to be in Configuration when, after setting this operating mode with a suitable sequence of
commands, the control unit is set up for programming the devices.
When the system is in the phase of Configuration, it inhibits the reception of alarm signals and therefore the sound
of the sirens.
Partitioned System
The system is defined to be Partitioned when only some zones are active and can therefore generate a burglar
alarm. The technical and tamper alarms are always active in all the zones of the system regardless of the partitions on/off.
System on stand-by
The system is defined to be on stand-by when it is working and able to generate a tamper alarm or a technical
alarm but not an intrusion alarm.
Walk test
It is a particular operating mode of the system that permits checking and/or testing the operation of the detectors
and contact interfaces without generating audible alarm signals.
Types of alarm
Signal on control unit
Meaning
PIR alarm
Alarm generated by one or more detectors.
Tamper alarm
Alarm generated by attempted tampering to the detriment of one or more
devices.
Contacts Alarm
Alarm generated by a contact interface that detects the opening of one or
more contacts connected to it.
Technical alarm
Alarm generated by a contact interface connected to a device for detecting
technical alarms.
Non-resp.
Alarm generated by the state of malfunctioning of one or devices.
N.B. Every type of alarm is always displayed with an indication of the device that generated it and the zone to
which that device is assigned.
167
168
Section
Speaker system
169
170
Table of Contents
1. General characteristics of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2. Devices and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Transmitter devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Receiver devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Acoustic speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
Accessory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
173
174
174
175
3. Topology and installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.1 Installation topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.2 Installation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4. System constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Absorption of the devices and sizing of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Number of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
178
181
182
5.Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Control buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Zone priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Microphone call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Baby-Control function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Audio monitoring function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Alarm clock function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Timed shutdown function (Sleep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Silencing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 Voice communications function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10.Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
6. System components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Audio input with 2 RCA connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 FM radio tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Control device with two buttons and amplifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Stereo amplifier with 2 outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Docking Station for iPod/iPhone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Microphone module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 IR control module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 Line decoupler for Bus/speaker system for By-me power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 Shunt for By-me control devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Branch shunt for speaker system devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
186
187
189
191
193
195
197
200
205
205
205
7. Group/zone definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Audio groups management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Audio zones management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Audio zone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Alarm clock function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Viewing audio zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Docking station management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Details menu of the RCA source associated with the IR interface IR 20586-14586. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Adding devices to a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 Removing devices from a group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Editing device parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
206
206
206
206
208
208
210
213
214
214
214
8.Types of system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Audio zones with receiver modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Audio zones with voice call function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Audio zones with Baby Control function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Audio zones with audio monitoring function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Audio zones with voice communication function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Audio zones with central switch-off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
216
218
219
220
221
222
9. Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
171
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The By-me speaker system enables creating systems able to transmit up to 4 audio sources in different rooms at
the same time with high signal quality (CD quality).
Thanks to the various system devices, integration with all the existing By-me controls and the range of coordinated
speakers, it is possible to create mono or multi-channel systems completely integrated in the By-me system.
In the various rooms there is total freedom of choice and control and it is possible, thanks to the multi-channels,
to transmit different music in different rooms.
The possibility of free distribution of the transmitter and receiver nodes and of the commands keeps the wiring
simple allowing perfect integration with the controls and actuators of the home automation system.
The performance, numerous functions, installation flexibility and above all the quality of the sound enable using the
system both in the residential sector (from apartments to villas) and in the tertiary sector (health centres, shops,
cafés, restaurants, supermarkets).
The main characteristics can be summed up in the following points:
1. 2-wire system (uses the By-me BUS cable art.01840.B) with in-out linear wiring that enables perfect
integration with the By-me automation devices (that can be connected to the “audio” branch through a
special branch shunt for By-me devices 01903 or through the special terminal on all the devices of the
speaker system).
2. Possibility of using the By-me controls (buttons, touchscreen and also the ones connected to the automation line) for system control (switching on/off, volume adjustment, source selection, song selection or
radio station, etc.).
3. Distributed architecture (therefore with no central node that requires star wiring) that enables installing
transmitters and receivers at any point in the system.
4. 4 simultaneous stereo channels, with CD audio quality.
5. Up to 30 independent audio zones.
6. Possibility of using the BUS as an FM antenna (in this case the auxiliary external antenna is not necessary).
7. Possibility of programming the maximum audio levels for each zone.
8. Possibility of making microphone calls.
9. Audio monitoring function.
10. Baby control function.
11. Integration with the scenarios and events programmes of the By-me system (for instance radio alarm function).
172
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The speaker system is composed of the following categories of devices:
• Transmitter devices
• Receiver devices
• Acoustic speakers
• Accessory modules
2.1 Transmitter devices
The transmitter devices enable transmitting the sound coming from a sound source (e.g. HiFi system, CD
player, portable MP3 players, etc..) to the system receivers.
Each transmitter configured in the system occupies one of the 4 available channels and can be connected to any
point of the system.
20582-19582-14582: Input module with 2 RCA connectors.
Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
Flush-mounting 2M mechanism.
01900: FM radio tuner with RDS on 2 DIN modules.
Managed via By-me control units and touchscreen, displaying RDS
info (tuning, station, song, etc..). 8 tuning memories available.
Possibility of using internal antenna (BUS) or external antenna with
coaxial connector (type F).
20585-19585-14585: Docking station for iPod/iPhone.
Flush-mounting 2M mechanism with docking station for iPod/
iPhone.
Capable of controlling the iPod/iPhone (play/pause, skip + /-).
Capable of charging the iPod/iPhone if connected to the auxiliary
power supply 5V, 1A, 2M.
20586-19586-14586: Microphone call module
Call enabling calling different services available (2M flush mounting).
Front buttons for activating the call, general or selective, built-in
microphone.
173
Devices and functions
2.2 Receiver devices
The receiver devices enable listening to the audio transmitted through one of the channels in the system.
These devices are also equipped with a high quality audio amplifier that enables direct connection to the acoustic
speakers.
20581-19581-14581: Output and control module with amplifier
1+1W. Flush-mounting 2M mechanism. Power supply from By-me
bus or 32Vdc (via specific auxiliary power supply 32V, 1M) with
dedicated input
01901: Output module with amplifier 10+10W
Mechanical /DIN 6M.
Power supply 110-230V~, 50-60Hz
2.3 Acoustic speakers
The system has a complete range of acoustic speakers, both flush-mounting and surface-mounting (including
versions for ceilings, light walls, etc.).
20588: Flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker 4+4M, 10W 8Ω
20587: Flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker 3M, 3W 8Ω
01906: Passive IP55 acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
01907: Surface ceiling-mounting passive acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
01908: Surface wall-mounting passive acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
174
Devices and functions
2.4 Accessory modules
The accessory modules are those devices that, while not having any direct use by the user, are needed by the
system for its operation or for creating the various possibilities of wiring/construction (see chap. 3 and 4).
01902: Decoupler for By-me power supply
Decoupling module to be used at the By-me power supply output (or
at the output of a line coupler).
Enclosure/DIN 2M
01903: Branch shunt module for By-me Automation devices
Retrofit enclosure
01904: Branch shunt module for speaker system devices
Retrofit enclosure.
20580-19580-14580: Auxiliary power supply 32V
Power supply 110-230V~, 50-60Hz
Output 32 Vdc, 3W.
Flush-mounting 1M mechanism.
20584-19584-14584: Control of stereo sources with remote control
(not supplied) via cable with IR transmitter (supplied).
The device must be associated with an RCA input module.
175
Topology and installation rules
3. Topologies and installation rules
The new type of transfer of musical information in digital form over the same BUS where the By-me data packets
transit requires some constraints for the wiring and in the construction of the system, while maintaining perfect
integration with the By-me home automation system.
To facilitate installation a coloured BUS cable art.01840.B (dark blue in colour) has been introduced to identify the
part of the system or branches of the bus dedicated to the speaker system easily and with no error.
3.1. Installation topologies
The speaker system lends itself to various constructions according to the needs and dimensions of the system.
Example 1: speaker system on the same logical branch (Area/Line), but with separate wiring.
Speaker system branch
01902
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
By-me branch
01401
Power supply
In this case the separation is purely with the wiring and not the logic: the speaker system devices and the By-me
devices are configured on the same line.
Example 2: dedicated logic branch
01401
Power supply
01845
Line coupler
01902
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
01401
Power supply
176
01902
01401
Power supply 01401 and decoupler for
By-me power supply
OPTIONAL: to add if necessary
Topology and installation rules
In this case, the speaker system devices are configured in a different line to the other By-me devices. The second
power supply and the dedicated decoupler are optional and must only be included when necessary for reasons
of consumption.
Example 3: By-me automation and speaker system on the same branch
01902
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
01401
Power supply
01903
20582
20581
20581
20581
By-me branch:
free wiring
By-me branch:
max 10 devices
free wiring
20582
01904
20581
01901
01901
20581
01401
01902
20582
20581
By-me branch. Free wiring
Speaker system branch. By-me devices cannot be connected; In-out wiring
(linear, not star); Max length 300 m; Max number of speaker system devices: 64.
The shunt for the By-me control devices enables creating By-me branches that
contain max 10 automation devices. Max no. of shunts 01903=64
The speaker system shunt 01904 enables shunting speaker system branches.
Decoupler for By-me power supply/speaker system. It must be inserted
between the power supply and the audio line; none of the By-me devices
between the decoupler and the power supply are “seen” by the speaker
system.
This explains how it is possible to make a completely integrated system with the By-me automation and speaker
system devices on the same branch.
177
System constraints
Warning: By-me devices are not connected directly to the branch of the speaker system (blue branch)
but through special shunts or through the devices of the speaker system (that have a special terminal).
3.2 Installation rules
The following installation rules are compulsory in the sections of By-me Bus dedicated to the speaker system:
1. Free wiring is not permitted in the sections dedicated to the speaker system, but only the in-out linear type. For shunting it is necessary to use the special branch shunt for the speaker system art.01904.
2. No more than 2 branch shunts can be wired per speaker system (art.01904) between a transmitter
and a receiver: this is because the branch shunt introduces strong signal attenuation.
3. The section of BUS dedicated to the speaker system is separated from the power supply (or from
the line coupler if used) by the special “By-me power supply/speaker system decoupler” art.01902.
4. In the sections dedicated to the speaker system (dark blue sections) it is possible to connect only
the devices of the speaker system: the By-me devices (where applicable) must be connected either
through the specific branch shunt for By-me devices (art. 01903, max. 10 By-me devices) or through
the dedicated terminal in each speaker system device (branch with max. 3 By-me devices).
5. Finally, the devices at the ends of the speaker system branches (at the start and at the end of the
blue lines) must be terminated via the special jumpers present in each device. This applies to any
device, whether it be a By-me power supply/speaker system decoupler or a normal transmitter or
receiver.
4. System constraints
In order to ensure correct system operation and complete functionality, it is necessary to respect constraints to
be taken account of in the installation.
4.1 Distances
The following table illustrates the constraints of the system related to the distances between the transmitters and
the receivers.
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 300 m
ter with no intermediate shunts
See fig. A
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 200 m
ter with 1 intermediate shunt
See fig. B
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 100 m
ter with 2 intermediate shunts
See fig. C
178
System constraints
A
Max 300 m
20581
20582
L
R
+
- +
-
Recess-mounted speakers
3 modules
20587
20587
B
Max 200 m
01901
Receiver
01904
20582
Transmitter
L
+
20587 +
-
L
+
-
R
R
-
+
-
20581
20588
20588
Recess-mounting speakers 8 modules
(4+4)
20587
Recess-mounting
speakers 3 modules
C
Max 100 m
01904
Shunt
20582
Transmitter
01901
Receiver
01904
Shunt
ax
M
Max
0
20
m
+
00
x2
Ma
200
m
L
m
+
20582
Transmitter
L
R
-
+
-
-
20588
+
-
R
01901
Receiver
20587 +
-
+
-
Recess-mounting speakers
8 modules (4+4)
20588
20587
L
01908
R
01908
Surface-mounting speakers
20581
Recess-mounting
speakers 3 modules
179
System constraints
The following table illustrates the constraints of the system related to the distances between the receivers and
the speakers.
Distance between receiver 1+1W and speakers
10 m
See fig. D
Distance between receiver 10+10W (art.01901) and
speakers
30 m
See fig. AND
D
20581
L
R
+
- +
20587
-
Max 10 m with
cable sect. 1
mm2
20587
Recess-mounting speakers 3 modules
AND
01901
Receiver/DIN
Amplifier 10+10 W
Max 30 m with cable sect. 1,5 mm2
L
+
01908
R
-
+
-
01908
Surface wall-mounting speakers 10 W min.
180
System constraints
4.2 Absorption of the devices and sizing of the system
Since the system is completely integrable with By-me automation and uses the power supplies 01401, the limits
of absorption to calculate for each line in the system apply generally: max. 2 By-me power supplies 01401 and
therefore max. 2x800mA.
The speaker system devices have different absorptions than the conventional By-me devices and this must therefore be taken into consideration when sizing the system.
The following table, useful for correctly sizing the system, gives the absorptions of the devices.
Device
Absorption
Notes
TX flush-mounting 2M 2-RCA
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
TX /DIN with FM radio
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
IR control for stereo
20 mA
Equivalent to 2 By-me device
TX docking station for iPod/iPhone
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
RX with amplifier for flush mounting 1+1W (if
powered via BUS)
150 mA max
Equivalent to 15 By-me devices
RX with amplifier for flush mounting 1+1W (if
powered via power supply 20580-14580)
20 mA
Equivalent to 2 By-me devices
RX with amplifier 10+10W /DIN, 230V ac
20 mA
Equivalent to 2 By-me devices
Microphone call module
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
WARNING: The absorptions given in the table are to be considered only for the audio devices and do not
take account of any other automation devices that may be connected to the By-me branch shunting terminal.
The high absorption of the receiver 1+1W (if powered directly by the BUS and not through the auxiliary power
supply ) has limits also as regards its distance from the system power supply, especially if it is present in a number
of points on the same branch.
With 1 receiver 20581-19581-14581 powered by Bus
300 m
With 2 receivers 20581-19581-14581 powered by Bus 150 m
With 3 receivers 20581-19581-14581 powered by Bus 100 m
With 4 receivers 20581-19581-14581 powered by Bus 75 m
These data refer to the case in which there is a number of receivers 1+1W (art.14581,19581 20581) on the same
branch and on the same side in relation to the By-me power supply 01401 (see figure below).
Receivers 1+1 W
01401
01902
20581
20581
20581
20581
Max 75 m
181
System constraints
Whereas, in the case in which the devices are always on opposite branches in relation to the By-me power supply,
the distance must be calculated in relation to the power supply counting the devices on the branch.
01902
01401
Receivers 1+1 W
Receivers 1+1 W
20581
20581
Max 150 m
20581
20581
Max 150 m
Therefore depending on the number of transmitters and receivers (and on their type) it is possible to calculate the
absorption of the system and therefore the number of power supplies necessary, that in any case can be at most
2. If you want to install numerous receivers 1+1W (art. 20581-19581-14581) it is advisable to use the auxiliary
power supplies 20580-19580-14580.
4.3 Number of devices
As regards the number of devices that can be used on the branches of the speaker system the following restrictions apply:
Description
Number
Notes
Maximum No. of inputs (transmitters)
4
4 stereo channels
Maximum No. of “Audio” devices
(inputs, outputs, accessories)
64
Limit fixed by the input impedance of the
“audio” nodes.
No. of receivers not powered by
Bus
64 – no. of inputs – no. of Total: max 64 devices (transmitters, receivaccessories (shunts, decou- ers, accessories). Each receiver can choose
plers, etc).
the audio channel from the 4 available ones
No. of receivers powered by BUS A receiver powered via BUS The limits of the By-me power supplies
20581-19581-14581
consumes as much as 15 01401 apply: 800mA
By-me devices: therefore max
4 devices per power supply
No. of branch shunts for the speak- 2
er system (art.01902) between a
transmitter and a receiver
Given the strong attenuation of the signal due
to the shunts, it is necessary to make sure
that the path between a transmitter and a
receiver does not pass more than 2 of them.
Max. No. of microphone modules 8
20586-19586-14586
Possibility of making up to 8 different
selective calls
No. of By-me “audio” shunts
01903
64 – no. of inputs – no. of Each shunt enables shunting a By-me
other accessories
branch beginning from the “audio” branch.
No. of By-me devices that can be 10
connected to the By-me “audio”
shunt 01903
182
In each shunt created by the decoupler
I can connect max 10 By-me devices
Functionality
From what has been illustrated so far in relation to the topology, installation criteria and system constraints, we
can summarise that:
• Installation is linear (in-out) with the possibility of shunting via the special branch shunts for the speaker
system 01904.
• By-me devices must not be connected directly to the branch of the speaker system but only through
the shunt 01903 or through the devices of the speaker system (special terminal on each device in the
speaker system).
• A decoupling device is necessary between the power supply or in any case between the By-me bus and
the audio transmission line: Bus line/speaker system decoupler 01902.
• Between the power supply and the By-me power supply/speaker system decoupler the line maintains
the By-me characteristics (free wiring, max 128 By-me devices).
• The shunts for the By-me branch 01903 enable shunting a By-me line with max 10 devices and free wiring from the audio transmission line.
• The maximum distance between the transmitter and receiver is:
- 300 m if there are no shunts 01904 in between
- 200 m if there is one shunt 01904 in between
- 100 m if there are 2 shunts 01904 in between.
• The maximum number of speaker system devices is 64 (including the shunts, decouplers and miscellaneous
accessories).
• From each speaker system device it is possible to shunt a mini By-me line with max. 3 devices.
• 2 power supplies can be used according to the absorption of the system; the second power supply can be
connected at any point on the audio transmission line (not necessarily at the end as in the previous diagram),
but the connection must always be made through the Bus line/speaker system decoupler 01902.
5. Functionality
As mentioned above, the main function of the speaker system is to transfer an audio signal from one point of the
system to another; thanks to the system devices, moreover, it is possible to create a wide range of functions so
as to satisfy every type of requirement:
• The transmitter module can be connected to any audio source (MP3, DVD players, Hi-Fi systems) through the
RCA connectors.
• The FM tuner transmitter module transmits the radio signal.
• The call microphone module enables making voice communications associated with different services.
• The receiver modules enable transmitting the audio source with a different power output according to the context
and the environment.
• The IR stereo control module enables controlling the Hi-Fi system connected to an RCA transmitter module.
183
Functionality
5.1 Control buttons
The buttons perform commands that affect the whole zone with which they are associated.
For instance it is possible to configure the By-me rocker switches to carry out actions such as switching the
speaker system on and off, adjusting the volume, switching the audio source (channel) and skipping to the next/
previous track.
Rocker switch for switching on and off (brief pressure) and adjusting the volume (long pressure)
Rocker switch for switching to the audio source (top button) and skipping to the next track (bottom
button)
Warning: The button for passing on to the next track takes on a different meaning depending on the transmitter
being controlled: in the case of the FM tuner it will pass on to the next station memory, while in the case of an
iPod/iPhone or a HiFi system it will pass on to the next song.
5.2 Zone priority
If more than one zone is connected to the same channel, it is possible to associate a priority level to each one of
these zones; parallel to this, the only actions performed will be by the command modules (buttons) associated
with the zone that, at that moment, has the highest priority.
5.3 Microphone call
Besides playback it is possible to make voice calls by using the special microphone call module.
The call occupies one of the available channels and is transmitted by the receivers involved in the call; if the channel is already used, all of the receivers tuned onto that channel will stop, unless involved in the call, until the end
of the call.
It is not possible to make two calls at the same time.
The following types of call are possible:
• General call that involves all the audio zones present in the system and controlled by the local button.
• Selective call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration and controlled by the local button.
• Baby Control call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration and
controlled by the local button.
• Audio Monitoring call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration
and controlled by the local button.
184
Functionality
5.3 Baby control function
The microphone module enables activating the selective call when the volume perceived by the microphone
exceeds a set threshold. If installed in a child’s room, the system puts the parents’ room into audio contact (Baby
Control) according to the loudness of the noise.
The call is automatically deactivated if it remains below the threshold for a certain timeframe or if it is locally silenced
by pressing the microphone module button.
The service must be turned on/off with the local button; obviously, the zones involved in the call associated with
it can be configured at the user's discretion.
5.4 Audio monitoring function
Remote activation of the microphone module is possible and as a result also the call associated with the audio
monitoring service.
To do this it is necessary to configure a By-me push-button within the same group in which the microphone module is configured or to configure a specific button on the touchscreen.
Obviously, the zones involved in the call associated with it can be configured at the user's discretion.
5.6 Alarm clock function
This function, activating one of the scenarios created by the user, enables turning on an audio zone for a specific
time period (configurable)
5.7 Timed shutdown function (Sleep)
On activating this function an audio zone is switched off after a specific (configurable) time interval. On receiving
an OFF message the receiver switches off even if it is in the timed switch-off period.
5.8 Silencing function
At the time of a certain event, the volume of a zone is automatically limited to a value of low loudness (configurable).
This function is used during a video door entry call.
5.9 Voice communications function
The system does not permit implementing intercommunicating communications but, by using the microphone
module and the receivers, it is possible to make one-way voice communication between two zones.
5.10 Scenarios
The speaker system devices can be integrated in the By-me Automation scenarios enriching the application
opportunities offered by the system.
185
System components
6. System components
The By-me automation system enables controlling a speaker system using the control unit for configuring the
devices and for setting the operating parameters.
6.1 Control unit.
The control unit governs the operation of the entire system. It displays all the control information and is used for
preliminary programming, configuration and, more generally, manage the system in its various states of operation.
Control unit main screen.
To access the screen that displays the speaker system control menus it is sufficient to touch Audio in the main
menu of the control unit.
Main Menu
Events
Alarm System
Audio
Power Management
Logout
Setup
Audio
Zone 23
Audio Library 2° Floor
FM Radio
102.5 MHz
Menu Setup
The control unit will now display the icons relating to the options most frequently used by the user:
- Touching
Menu displays the control unit's main menu;
Audio
- Touching
Setup displays the management menus of the audio zones;
Zona 23
Audio Biblioteca 2° Piano
Radio FM
102.5 MHz
- Touching
displays another menu with which you can either switch off the zone
Menu Setup
Audio
Zona 23
of the audio signal to transmit
in the audio zone
Audio Biblioteca 2° Piano
Radio FM
102.5 MHz
- Touching
displays
the control menu of the associated transmitter module.
Menu
Setup
186
or change the source
System components
6.2 Audio input with 2 RCA connectors, automatic adjustment of the input sensitivity, integrated line terminator.
This device is used, via the 2 RCA connectors, to acquire, digitalize and transmit a generic analogical audio source
(for instance a Hi-Fi system, CD player, portable MP3 player, etc.) over the By-me Bus.
The By-me Bus is galvanically decoupled from the audio inputs.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20582: 2 Eikon modules
19582: 2 Arké modules
14582: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Protection class: IP30
- Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
- Possibility of manual control of the input sensitivity.
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Consumption: 35 mA.
- Possibility of programming the relevant group via the control unit
- Push-button for configuration and manual setting of the input sensitivity.
- Two-colour LED for configuration and manual setting of the input sensitivity.
Indicators
• red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
• green LED on steady: the device is lit;
• green LED blinking fast: control phase to increase the input sensitivity
• green LED blinking slow: control phase to decrease the input sensitivity
• orange LED (fixed or blinking): volume approaching the highest threshold
Operation
This device enables transmitting via bus the audio signal from an analogue sound source (all the audio sources
marked with the "headphones" or "line out" symbol are suitable).
When the device is active the LED, if enabled via the control unit, is a steady green light; whereas the LED
becomes orange if the level of the input signal is near the maximum threshold.
The optimal setting for the level is obtained when the LED is mainly lit green and the orange LED rarely comes on.
Note: An input signal volume that is too high can distort the audio signal.
187
System components
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
To adjust the sensitivity of the audio inputs on the device manually, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to increase the sensitivity.
The LED blinks quickly; if the maximum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will return
to its normal operating status.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to decrease the sensitivity.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will
return to its normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration push-button is pressed, the sensitivity adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and
vice versa in approximately 60 sec.
As in normal operation, also while making the adjustment, the orange LED will light up to indicate that the intensity
of the input audio is approaching the maximum threshold.
The optimum adjustment is reached when the orange LED is seen to light up with a certain frequency. A LED that
is always green indicates too low an input signal; a LED that is always orange indicates too high an input signal.
Settings that can be configured via the control unit
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal
If the device is active the green LED is lit.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Select the type of signal supplied on the RCA connectors; use the LEFT input for mono signals.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
188
System components
6.3 FM radio tuner with RDS, coaxial connector for external FM aerial, integrated line terminator, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm.
The FM tuner 01900 is able to send the digital audio signal and the RDS messages received by radio over the
bus. The FM tuner receives the radio stations (with the related RDS information) in the 87.50 - 108.00 MHz band
and in addition allows saving up to 8 different radio stations, to then be able to call them up with commands sent
over the Bus by the By-me control devices or save in the scenarios.
N.B. If the radio function is included in the scenarios, together with the groups of the receivers also the
radio module must be added so as to save the station to call up.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Dissipated power: 1 W
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 2 modules
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Possibility of manual control of the input volume
- Push-button for configuration and manual setting of the input volume
- Two-colour LED for configuring and indicating ON/OFF status of operation
- F-type female connector for external antenna
- 2 jumpers to insert the line termination
- Jumper to select the type of antenna (1 = external antenna on connector F; 2 = use the Bus cable as an antenna)
Indicators
• red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
• green LED on steady: the device is lit;
• green LED blinking fast: control phase to increase the input volume
• green LED blinking slow: control phase to decrease the input volume
- orange LED (fixed or blinking) : input signal approaching the highest threshold
Operation
The FM radio receiver with RDS 01900 is used as a digital audio signal transmitter within the speaker system.
It therefore receives the FM radio signal of the station tuned to, digitalizes it and sends it to the various receiver
devices of the system that requested it.
The main functions of the device are:
• Enabling or disabling the transmission of the audio content related to the FM radio (ON / OFF)
• Selecting a specific radio station
• Tuning onto the previous or next frequency in steps of 50 kHz
• Automatic frequency search with SNR above a given settable threshold
• Saving up to 8 different radio stations
• Possibility of calling up a specific memory/station (also from a scenario)
• Scanning the memories in succession in both increasing and decreasing directions
• Scenario management, calling up a specific radio station on activating the scenario
• Compatibility with the call mechanism: the device frees the audio transmission channel if the call takes place on
the same channel it uses (the "call" is a service provided by the microphone module).
• Sending information related to the tuned frequency
• Sending information related to the strength of the radio signal received (RSSI)
• Sending information related to the On / Off status
189
System components
• Sending information related to the value of the tuning memory (from 1 to 8).
• Sending, if available, RDS information received from the broadcasting radio station.
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
• To set the type of antenna, that is to say external on connector F or internal on the bus, you need to use the
jumper situated next to the antenna connector, that is:
1.Antenna on connector F: Connect together pins 3 with 5 and 4 with 6
2.Antenna on bus: Connect together pins 3 with 1 and 4 with 2
To set the FM radio input volume manually, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to increase the sensitivity.
The LED blinks rapidly; when the maximum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED returns to
its normal operating status.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to decrease the sensitivity.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED returns to its
normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration push-button is pressed, the sensitivity adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and
vice versa in approximately 90 sec.
Just as in normal operation, during adjustment the illumination of the orange LED indicates that the input audio
intensity is approaching the maximum threshold.
The optimal setting is reached when the orange LED lights up rather frequently; the green LED on steady indicates
too low an input signal while the orange LED on steady indicates too high an input signal.
Settings that can be configured via the control unit
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal.
If the device is active the green LED lights up to indicate information on the volume of the radio, otherwise it is off.
If this parameter is set with the value 0, the green LED always remains off.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Selects the type of signal to transmit over the bus
• Percentage level of SNR: Default value 10%.
It is used during automatic frequency searching
• RDS On: default value On.
This value allows the device to send the RDS information over the bus (when available).
If set to Off, the device sends no information.
• RSSI On: default value On.
This value allows the device to send the RSSI (received signal strength indication) information over the bus.
If set to Off, the device sends no information.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device;
- deletes the scenarios;
- deletes the saved stations.
190
System components
6.4 Control equipment with two toggle switches and 8 ohm 1 + 1 W amplifier, incorporated line
terminator, to be completed with 1 or 2 module interchangeable buttons
This device enables playing the audio data received on the Bus through the speakers connected to its outputs. In
addition, on the front of the device there are two rocker switches that can be configured for audio or automation
functions (control of lights, roller shutters, etc.).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20581: 2 Eikon modules
19581: 2 Arké modules
14581: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Auxiliary power supply (possible in the case of high consumption): 32V d.c.
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the speaker system bus
2) 2 for a bus output for connecting up to 3 By-me devices
3) 2 for the auxiliary power supply at 32V
4) 4 for the connection to the 2 audio speakers
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Consumption on the bus: 150 mA max. if powered via BUS
20 mA if connected to auxiliary power supply
- Possibility of programming the relevant group of both buttons and receiver via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Central red configuration LED
- Two front rocker switches with the following possible functions:
1) On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
2) Changing track and audio source
3) Sleep (timed switch-off)
4) Audio monitoring (implementable only if configured in a group with a microphone call device)
5) ON/OFF switch
6) Dimmer control
7) Roller shutters control
8) Activation of 2 scenarios
- Two green LEDs located in the middle of the 2 rocker switches with functions that can be configured via the control unit
Configuration
Configuration must be done with the device without the button cap to be able to press the central configuration button.
• Functional units: 3 (2 buttons, 1 audio receiver).
Each functional block can belong to at most 4 groups except for the receiver functional block that can belong to
one group only.
• Selection of the functional block in the configuration phase:
- Press the central button;
- Within 3 s, press the right-hand button to select the right functional block or the left-hand button to select the
left functional block; the red LED will light up.
If neither button is pressed within approximately 3 s the red LED will light up; in this case, the selected functional
block is the third one, the one for the audio receiver;
191
System components
- With the red LED on, the control unit will configure the functional block; at the end of this operation the LED will go out.
Parameters
• For the functional blocks related to the two buttons it is possible to set the operating mode:
- On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
- Changing track and audio source
- Sleep (timed switch-off)
- Audio monitoring
- ON/OFF button;
- dimmer control;
- roller shutters control;
- scenario command;
• Operation as On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment:
- pressing the top button for less than 0.5 s switches on the associated audio zone with the saved volume and
channel;
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s increases the volume until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s decreases the volume until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for less than 0.5 s switches off the associated audio zone.
• Operation as changing track and audio source:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a change audio channel message and then the associated audio
zone "listens" to the next audio source;
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to change track.
• Operation as Sleep button:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a timed switch-off request.
• Operation as audio monitoring:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a request to activate the audio monitoring service configured in
the associated microphone module;
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to switch off the audio monitoring service configured
in the associated microphone module;
• Operation as OnOff:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a request to switch on the associated audio zone
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to switch off the associated audio zone.
• Operation as dimmer control:
- pressing the top button for less than 0.5 s switches on the associated load with the dimming at the saved point;
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s increases the brightness of the associated load until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s decreases the brightness of the associated load until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for less than 0.5 s switches off the associated load.
• Operation as roller shutters control:
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s opens the roller shutter completely; it stops when fully open or when
briefly pressing the button (either above or below);
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s closes the roller shutter completely; it stops when fully closed
or when briefly pressing the button (either above or below).
• LED parameters:
- LED disabled;
- LED with normal operation;
192
System components
- LED with reverse operation;
- LED always on for location in the dark;
- central LED with normal operation;
- central LED with reverse operation;
- central LED always on for location in the dark.
If the functional block belongs to more than one group, the command is confirmed with a change in LED status
that lasts approximately 3 s.
If a double button is used, it is necessary to set the central LED behaviour to make the status visible. In this case,
configure the left-hand button only.
• Parameters of the audio zone to which the receiver belongs (3rd functional unit)
- priority
- sleep time (timed switch-off);
- max volume of the zone
- max switch-on volume
- call volume
- max silencing volume
- behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a general call
- behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a selective call made to it
Scenarios
Each rocker switch can be dedicated to activation of one or two scenarios. The receiver can belong to up to 4
different scenarios and, for each scenario, save the status (volume and channel) to retrieve when activating the
scenario
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
6.5 Stereo amplifier with 2 outputs for speakers 8 ohm 10 + 10 W , power supply 110-230 V
50-60 Hz, integrated line terminator, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 6 modules
size 17.5 mm.
The stereo amplifier 01901 enables playing the audio signal received on the Bus through the speakers connected
to its outputs.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: 110-230V~, 50-60Hz
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the speaker system bus
2) 2 for a bus output for connecting up to 3 By-me devices
3) 2 for the power supply at 110-230V~
4) 4 for the connection to the 2 audio speakers
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
193
System components
- Consumption on the bus: 20 mA
- Possibility of programming the receiver zone via the control unit
- Configuration button
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 6 modules
- Red/green two-colour LED:
1) on red during configuration
2) blinking red following overheating of the amplifier
3) green to signal the state of the receiver, depending on the LED control parameter (which can be set at the
time of configuration).
Configuration
During configuration, the audio receiver block saves the parameters and settings to work in its audio zone. This
functional block can belong to only one group.
At the time of configuration, when the control unit asks you to press the device button, it is sufficient to press the
device configuration button. The red LED emits a steady light that goes out at the end of configuration or after
pressing the configuration button again.
Parameters
• LED control
• Power reduction
Besides these parameters there are the typical ones of the relevant zone:
• Priority;
• Sleep time (timed switch-off);
• Max volume of the zone
• Max. switch-on volume
• Call volume
• Max. silencing volume
• Behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a general call
• Behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a selective call
Scenarios
The receiver can belong to up to 4 different scenarios and, for each scenario, save the status (volume and channel) to retrieve when activating the scenario.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
194
System components
6.6 Docking station for iPod and iPhone devices, supplied with power supply - 2 modules.
(The article is composed of 2 appliances of 2 modules each, can be installed also separately)
The docking station is a transmitter device that enables connecting audio sources such as iPod/iPhone (or other
mp3 players, CD players, etc.) to the speaker system; the docking station acquires, digitalizes and sends over
the By-me bus the signal of one of the analogue audio sources connected to it.
The device not only sends an audio signal to the receiver devices, but also remotely controls the iPod/iPhone
(play/pause, skip+/- song, database navigation, playback property settings), by sending the appropriate commands over the bus.
The By-me bus is galvanically decoupled from the audio inputs (connector for iPod/iPhone or 3.5mm stereo jack).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20585: 2 Eikon modules
19585: 2 Arké modules
14585: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
- Protection class: IP30
- Possibility of manual control of the input sensitivity.
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- 30-pin connector for Apple iPod/iPhone devices.
- Auxiliary 3.5 mm stereo jack for external audio sources (iPod/iPhone audio automatically excluded when the jack is in).
- Push-button for configuration and manual setting of the input sensitivity.
- Two-colour LED for configuration, manual setting of the input sensitivity and indication of the ON/OFF status of operation
Indicators
• red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
• red LED flashing for about 60 s: indicates either no or incorrect voltage on the input terminal (5V -1A)
for charging the iPod/iPhone;
• green LED on steady: the device is lit;
- green LED blinking fast: control phase to raise the device input sensitivity
- green LED blinking slow: control phase to lower the device input sensitivity
- orange LED (fixed or blinking) : input signal approaching the highest threshold
When the device is active the LED, if enabled via the control unit, is a steady green light whereas it becomes
orange if the input audio signal approaches the value beyond which distortion is produced.
Operation
The docking station enables connecting an iPod/iPhone to the speaker system and controlling its main
functions of navigation and playback; in addition, the device charges the batteries of the iPod/iPhone.
The remote controls are always available (both from the control unit and from the controls of the speaker
system) and are the following:
• Play/Pause: starts/stops playback of the selected song.
• Skip Next/Previous: plays the next or previous song in the playlist.
If the device remote control mode is also enabled, via the control unit it is possible to navigate within the database
of the connected iPod/iPhone and if necessary select the songs to play.
195
System components
The additional controls of the remote control mode are the following:
• Select the navigation category (choose from Playlists, Artists)
• Next/Previous Playlist: displaying the next or previous Playlist
• Next/Previous Artist: displaying the next or previous Artist
• Next/Previous Album: displaying the next or previous Album
• Next/Previous Song: displaying the next or previous Song
• Display information on the the song currently being played: title of the song, name of the artist and title of the
album.
• Select the song playback mode (Shuffle):
1.Shuffle OFF
2.Shuffle Songs
3.Shuffle Albums
• Select the song playback mode (Repeat):
4.Repeat OFF
5.Repeat 1 Song
6.Repeat all Songs
Warning: The changes to the Shuffle and Repeat settings that are made while the iPod/iPhone is connected to the docking station have effect only as long as the device remains connected and therefore do
not change those previously set. These settings will be restored as soon as the Apple device is disconnected from the docking station.
IMPORTANT: The 30-pin connector can be used only for connecting and charging iPod/iPhone devices.
The list of compatible Apple products is given on the label on the outside of the packing of the docking
station 20585-19585-14585.
The 3.5mm auxiliary jack input enables connecting different sound sources to the iPod/iPhone (for example, MP3
players, CD players etc.); inserting such a jack automatically cuts off the audio coming from the iPod/iPhone.
Warning: It is not possible to control external players connected via the auxiliary jack and therefore not
even receive information about them.
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
To manually adjust the sensitivity of the audio inputs on the device, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to increase the sensitivity.
The LED blinks rapidly; when the maximum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED
returns to its normal operating status.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to decrease the sensitivity.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED
returns to its normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration push-button is pressed, the sensitivity adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and
vice versa in approximately 60 sec.
Just as in normal operation, during adjustment the illumination of the orange LED indicates that the input audio
intensity is approaching the maximum threshold.
The optimal setting is reached when the green and orange LEDs alternate quite frequently; the green LED on
steady indicates too low an input signal while the orange LED on steady indicates too high an input signal.
196
System components
Settings that can be configured via the control unit
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal
If the device is active the green LED is lit, otherwise it is off; if this parameter is set with the value Off, the green
LED always remains off.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Select how the input audio signal must be handled.
By setting Stereo, the right and left channels are treated as independent; with the Mono setting only the "left"
channel audio line is used that is then duplicated on the "right" channel.
• Control: Remote/Local (default value Remote).
- Remote: it is possible (via the control unit or touchscreen) to control the connected Apple device completely,
however this disables the interface for the local controls of the iPod/iPhone.
- Local: the local interface remains active for navigation on the iPod/iPhone, while remote control is reduced to
only the Play / Pause and Skip Next / Previous controls
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
6.7 Microphone for selective or general call, voice activation function to control the children
(Baby Control) and for audio monitoring - 2 modules
The microphone 20586-19586-14586 is a transmitter device capable of picking up the signal detected by the
built-in audio source and transmitting it, via a call procedure, to specific zones in the system (selective calls) or
to all the zones (general call). The zones involved in the call switch over the receivers onto the carrier channel
signalled by the call, they play back the audio content picked up by the microphone and finally, after the end of
call message, they recommence the operation immediately prior to the call.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20586: 2 Eikon modules
19586: 2 Arké modules
14586: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the speaker system bus
2) 2 for a By-Me bus output for connecting up to 3 By-Me devices
- Operating temperature: -5 to +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975..)
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Configuration button
- Central red configuration LED
- Maximum number of microphones that can be installed in the system: 8
197
System components
- Front right-hand rocker switch that can be configured with the following functions:
- If configured in an audio output group:
1) On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
2) Changing track and audio source
3) Sleep (timed switch-off of an audio zone)
- If configured in a Call group
1) Audio Monitoring command, if configured with a remote call module
2) General and Selective Call Command if configured with the local call module (primary function
of the button associated with the interchangeable buttons provided in the package).
- If configured in an automation group:
1) ON/OFF switch
2) Dimmer control
3) Roller shutters control
4) Scenario control
- Front lower left-hand push-button associated with the module's Baby Control function
- Two green LEDs located in the middle of the 2 rocker switches with functions that can be configured via the control unit
- Jumpers to insert the audio line termination
Configuration
• Functional Units: 2 (right-hand rocker switch and microphone transmitter).
The functional unit related to the button, when not associated with the transmitter on which it resides, can belong
to at most 4 groups; the microphone transmitter functional unit can belong to one group only.
• Selection of the functional unit in the configuration phase:
a. Press the central button;
b. Within 3 s press the right rocker switch to select the "right rocker switch" functional unit
or the lower left-hand button to select the "microphone transmitter" functional unit; the red LED lights up.
c. With the red LED on, the control unit will configure the functional unit; at the end of this operation the LED
will go out.
Operation
In the standard configuration of the front buttons, the following functions can be used:
• “Push To Talk” general call.
Instantaneous call on pressing the top right-hand front button and directed to all the system's zones; they will
transmit the voice signal picked up by the device's microphone as long as the button is kept pressed.
The call ends when the button is released.
By using the control unit or EasyTool Professional LT, it will be possible to set the behaviour of every zone following
a General call (for example the behaviour of the zone if switched off, the call playback volume, etc.).
• “Push To Talk” selective call.
Instantaneous call on pressing the bottom right-hand front button and directed to a subset of system zones; by
using the control unit or EasyTool Professional LT, it is possible to set the zones receiving the selective call by
accessing the device parameters (on the control unit the parameter is "Call Zone").
Only the audio zones corresponding to the selected ones, indicated in the selective call start message, will switch
onto the call channel and will transmit the user message as long as the button is kept pressed.
The call ends when the button is released.
By using the control unit or EasyTool Professional LT, it will be possible to set the behaviour of every zone following
a Selective call (for example the behaviour of the zone if switched off, the call playback volume, etc.).
198
System components
• “Baby Control” service.
To turn this function on/off simply press and then release the bottom front left-hand button that will be followed
by the LED signal.
Once the function has been activated, if the volume of the voice signal picked up by the microphone exceeds the
set threshold, a selective call is sent to a set of system zones; the threshold value can be set with the control unit
("Baby Control Threshold" parameter) or with Easy Tool Professional LT.
The call remains active until a few seconds after the audio has returned under the threshold value to then reactivate automatically when later on the threshold gets exceeded.
By using the control unit ("Baby Control Zones" parameter) or Easy Tool Professional LT, it is possible to set the
zones intended for the Baby Control service
The typical application of this function is monitoring children during their rest.
• Audio Monitoring.
This function enables remote activation of the call microphone with a By-me automation button provided that both
devices are configured in the same group.
It is then possible to monitor the audio of a specific room; this audio monitoring function is accomplished with
the By-me button that activates a selective call, initiated by the microphone module, for a set of system zones .
By using the control unit ("Audio Monitoring Zones" parameter) or Easy Tool Professional LT, it is possible to set
the zones for Audio Monitoring.
IMPORTANT:
• As an alternative to the standard configuration, that is forgoing "Push To Talk Calls" and maintaining the "Baby
Control" and "Audio Monitoring" function, the two right-hand buttons of the microphone 20586-19586-14586 can
be used as By-Me automation commands (lights, roller shutters, audio).
To do this, simply configure the right-hand rocker switch of the microphone in a lights or audio group.
• If there are a number of microphones 20586-19586-14586 in an installation, only one active Call is permissible
(general or selective) in the system irrespective of audio channel availability.
• During call playback, the central LED of the rocker switches of the microphones 20586-19586-14586 signal
there is a call by blinking (obviously this happens if the rocker switch is configured for the call functions).
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
199
System components
6.8 Interface for transmitting By-me commands to IR receiver, together with 3 m cable.
The IR interface enables controlling audio sources (stereo combo, CD/DVD players, etc) learning and emulating
the commands of the original remote control of the equipment to control. Associated with an RCA transmitter (art.
20582-19582-14582) it then allows having sound sources controlled directly by the By-me system.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20584: 2 Eikon modules
19584: 2 Arké modules
14584: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Terminals: 2 for the By-me bus
- 2.5mm jack connector
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: recess-mounting 1 module
- Consumption: 20 mA
- Possibility of programming the group via the control unit (it must be associated with an RCA input module)
- Possibility of recording and repeating max. 12 buttons of an infrared remote control
- Configuration button
- Two-colour LED for configuring and indicating infrared transmission and reception
- 3 m cable with 2.5mm jack and IR transmitter (supplied)
Indicators
• red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
• green LED on steady: the device is lit;
• blinking green LED: reception of a By-me command that requires sending IR commands
• blinking red LED: error in managing/recording an IR control
• blinking orange LED: reception of the By-me command for starting the learning phase and waiting for
the configuration button to be pressed
• orange LED on steady: starting recording phase and waiting for an IR remote control button to send an infrared code
Operation
The device is able to save the button of an infrared remote control and repeat its operation after a By-me
command. When the interface is active the LED, if enabled on the control unit, is lit steady on green; it
flashes briefly each time a By-me command is received that involves sending IR commands.
It is possible to acquire up to 12 actions (action = repetition of an infrared remote control button) that, in the control
unit menu, are named as follows:
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
Action 5
Action 6
Action 7
Action 8
Action 9
Action 10
Action 11
Action 12
200
System components
Operation is ensured when, starting with the actions, the following commands thus named on the control unit are coded:
Command
Meaning
On
Powering up the device, selecting the source and starting playing
Off
The device goes onto stand-by
Skip next
Next track/memory
Skip previous
Select previous track/memory
Play
Start playing
Stop
Stop playing
Pause
Pause playing
Resume
Exit pause and start playing again
Sel. Source 1
Select source 1
Sel. Source 2
Select source 2
Sel. Source 3
Select source 3
Each command can be coded as the sequence of 1, 2, 3 or 4 actions and this corresponds to consecutively
pressing up to 4 buttons on the remote control of the controlled device.
Configuration
The IR interface 20584-19584-14584 is configured by the control unit in two phases:
1.Record button of a remote control (action)
2.Associate actions with the actual command.
Creation of an action and recording the key of a remote control
 Configuration  Groups  Audio groups 
Select the group where the IR interface was
added  Associated devices  Select the IR interface
 Add
 Device parameters  A Acquired actions
Setup
Set the index of the action and select Next  Acquire action
Press the configuration button of the interface 20584-14584; the orange LED will be lit steady.
Move the remote control near to the IR interface (to a distance of about 10 cm) and continuously press
the button you want to record.
Select lastly Save.
If acquisition is successful, the interface LED will flash green; the action will then be displayed on the
control unit in the list of configured actions (A1, A2, etc.).
If the acquisition is not successful carry out the following check:
- position the remote control towards the window of the IR interface at a distance of about 10 cm;
- if the orange LED does not become red or green (flashing) check the operation of the remote control button
on the audio device;
201
System components
- check that the infrared frequency of the audio device is between 30kHz and 60kHz;
- if the LED is blinking red try the entire sequence again.
As regards the remote control, you should save the buttons that are generally used for the ON, OFF, SKIP, PLAY,
STOP, PAUSE and source selection (in the case of a multi-source device) operations and in the table below
note down the reference between the name of the memory used and the corresponding remote control button.
Action
Remote control button
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
Action 5
Action 6
Action 7
Action 8
Action 9
Action 10
Action 11
Action 12
The following page gives an example of configuring the remote control buttons and filling in the above table.
Modifying an action
 Configuration  Groups  Audio groups  Select the group where the IR interface was
added  Associated devices  Select the IR interface  Device parameters  Acquired actions
 Select the action to modify
Setup
The available options are the following:
• Acquire action
-Press the interface configuration button and then the remote control button to be associated.
• Remove action
-Proceed to remove the action?  Yes.
The selected action is deleted and the control unit confirms the operation has concluded.
202
System components
Associate actions with the actual command.
This menu is used to create the commands associating up to 4 already recorded actions.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Audio groups  Select the group where the IR interface was added
 Associated devices  Select the IR interface  Device parameters  Associate commands
Select the command to associate (switching on, off, etc.); 4 selection fields (Action 1, Action 2, Action 3
and Action 4) are then displayed, each one of which represents an action associated with the command.
The 4 fields will show dashes if there is no associated action.
It is now possible in each field to choose any of the recorded actions; the fields are indexed from 1 to 4 that is
the order in which the actions will be performed by the command.
Lastly touch Set that causes the data to be transferred to the IR device.
Other parameters
On the screen for the parameters of the IR interface there are also:
• LED management: (default 1= enabled). If the device is active the green LED is lit.
• Half time [sec]: (default value 1 s). Time in seconds that must pass between one repetition of an
IR button and another one, that is between consecutive actions mapped within the same command.
If the consecutive actions refer to the same button, the inter-time is not applied.
Example.
Action
Remote control button
Action 1
POWER
Action 2
SKIP+
Action 3
SKIP-
Action 4
PLAY
Action 5
STOP
Action 6
PAUSE
Action 7
CD
Action 8
RADIO
Action 9
AUX
Action 10
-
Action 11
-
Action 12
-
203
System components
Command
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
On
Action 1
Action 7
Action 4
None
Off
Action 5
Action 1
None
None
Skip next
Action 2
None
None
None
Skip previous
Action 3
None
None
None
Play
Action 4
None
None
None
Stop
Action 5
None
None
None
Pause
Action 6
None
None
None
Resume
Action 4
None
None
None
Sel. Source 1
Action 7
None
None
None
Sel. Source 2
Action 8
None
None
None
Sel. Source 3
Action 9
None
None
None
In the example above note that the On command is coded as the playback sequence of Actions 1, 7 and 4
that correspond to pressing the POWER, CD and PLAY buttons of the original remote control in sequence.
The operation of switching on is then associated with the actions of the three buttons indicated alternated by
the inter-time parameter that causes switching on the device, selecting the CD source and starting playback
as required for the Power On command.
Device reset
On the control unit select Configuration  Reset management  Device reset and press the device configuration button; the red LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
The Reset operation does not delete the memory of the infrared remote control buttons or the coding of any
commands.
Summary of signals of IR interface 20584-19584-14584
Problem
During the phase of adding a
device the control unit display
shows "Not a valid device".
Cause
Solution
There is no association with an
RCA 2-input device.
First add an RCA 2-input device and
then the IR interface to the group.
The green status LED does not
come on or does not flash.
The green status LED does not
come on or does not flash yet.
204
Check that the LED parameter is
enabled.
Before being able to receive
other types of commands, the
IR interface must be on
Send the on command (if enabled,
the green LED must be on steady to
receive other commands)
System components
Problem
Cause
The audio system is not controlled.
A command does not produce
the desired function.
Solution
Check that, on sending the By-me command, the green LED blinks.
Check the IR cable; it must be positioned about 1 cm from the receiver. If
necessary, before positioning the transmitter with the adhesive, test the send
sequence varying the position.
Check you have recorded the button
for the desired command with the corresponding By-me command.
While having been correctly
coded, it might not be sufficient to send the command
by pressing the associated IR
button just once.
Map the repetition of the same Button
on the same Command in consecutive
positions.
For example, the Play command could
be coded as Action 1 = Button 4, Action
2 = Button 4, Action 3 = None, Action
4 = None (this is presuming you have
saved the Play button of the remote
control on Button 4). This action causes
repeated pressing of the play button
associated with the Play command.
6.9 Decoupler for Bus line / speaker system for By-me power supply, integrated line terminator, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm.
The line decoupler 01902 is the device that divides the By-me system into:
- automation part (free wiring, BUS cable art. 01840);
- speaker system part (in-out linear wiring, BUS cable art. 01840.B).
The speaker system is therefore delimited by this device that depending on the case can be directly connected at
the output to the power supply 01401 or to the line coupler 01845 or directly to the Bus of the automation part.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 2 modules
6.10 Tap-off for By-me command devices, flush mounting (retrofit).
The shunt 01903 is used for shunting from the speaker system line (in-out linear wiring, Bus cable art.01840.B)
to make an automation branch (free wiring, Bus cable art.01840) to which can be connected up to 10 By-me
devices.
6.11 Branch tap-off for speaker system devices, flush mounting (retrofit)
The shunt 01904 is used for shunting two new audio branches from a speaker system line thus making it possible
to create a star. This solution is useful in all those cases where the linear wiring is difficult or not feasible.
205
Group/zone definition
7. Group/zone definition
To configure the system it is necessary, first of all, to create the groups/zones for the speaker system; the procedure to
follow is similar to the one for creating home automation system groups (Automations, Load Control, HVAC control, etc.).
7.1 Managing audio groups
7.1.1 Creating a group
When creating groups it is necessary to follow some rules concerning the logical subdivision of the parts
comprising the audio system.
The maximum number of groups relating to the transmitter modules is equal to 4 except for the microphone
call module whose maximum number is 8.
First create the groups where there are transmitters adding, for each group, a single transmitter (for example
Audio source 1, etc.); it is advised to choose names containing the name of the room.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Audio groups
7.1.2 Removing a group
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Audio groups  Select the group by scrolling through the list
It is a good rule to configure the transmitter devices first; then create the groups related to the receiver
modules and the control buttons (including those connected to the automation line).
 Remove group 
Delete all information associated with the selected group?  Yes
It is not possible to remove a group as long as it is associated with an Audio zone.
7.2 Managing audio zones
7.2.1 Creating an audio zone
Set the index and the name of the zone and select the relevant audio group for the desired zone; confirm by
touching
Save.
Main menu Audio  Setup Zone management  Add
The control unit confirms the operation and returns the screen to the list of registered zones.
7.2.2 Removing an audio zone
Main menu  Audio  Setup  Zone management  Select the zone to remove

 Remove zone
Proceed to remove the zone?  Yes
The control unit confirms the operation and returns the screen to the list of registered zones.
7.3 Audio zone settings
For each configured audio zone, this enables setting the parameters associated with it (not frequent).
Main menu Audio  Setup Zone setting  Select the desired zone
Then proceed to set the parameters by touching
206
the ones listed below:
Group/zone definition
n Priority
An audio channel can be transmitted from one or more zones simultaneously by tuning onto a specific
transmitter module.
The control buttons for the various zones can perform actions involving the transmitter module (change
radio station, play/stop a song); therefore the command generated by one zone could also
affect the sound in another.
This parameter determines the right to execute these commands, that will be performed if one zone has
a priority greater than or equal to another.
5= maximum priority
0= minimum priority
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
n Audio sources
One zone transmits the audio source selected by the user in the specific menu.
This parameter enables selecting which audio sources must be considered as active for this zone.
Scroll through the list of sources, select the one you want and confirm with Set.
n Switching off [min]
This parameter sets the time in minutes after which the zone is switched off; the time is counted by the
receivers from the moment the dedicated command is received.
0= minimum value
300= maximum value
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
n Max volume [%]
This parameter sets the maximum value of the volume used by the receivers in this zone as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
Note: For uniformity it is advised to create audio zones with receivers that all have the same sound power.
n Max switch-on volume [%]
This parameter sets the maximum value of the volume used by the receivers in this zone at the time of
switching on as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
Note: For uniformity it is advised to create audio zones with receivers that all have the same sound power.
n Call volume [%]
This parameter sets the value used by the receivers in this zone at the time of the voice microphone
call on as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
207
Group/zone definition
n Max silencing volume [%]
This parameter sets as a percentage the maximum value used by the receivers in this zone at the time
of the request for operation in Silencing mode.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Select the desired value and confirm with Set.
n General switch-on
This parameter determines if, when off, the zone must switch on when a general call arrives.
On= on, Off=off
Select the desired operation and confirm with Set.
n Selective switch-on
This parameter determines if, when off, the zone must switch on when a selective call arrives.
On= on, Off=off
Select the desired operation and confirm with Set.
7.4 Alarm clock function
It is possible to create the alarm clock function by taking advantage of the capacity offered by the By-me control unit.
It is basically a matter of activating one of the audio zones at a certain time, with a state of operation defined by
the user; it is possible to associate these two characteristics respectively with an "event" and with a "scenario".
For example, suppose you want to use an audio zone for waking up in the morning.
The first operation to carry out is to create a scenario that includes the audio groups related to the desired zone
including the group of the transmitter:
Scenarios  Setup  Add Create the scenario
To create a more complete setting, the scenario can also include the Automation groups (for more information
please see the relevant section in the manual on Scenarios).
The second operation to carry out is to create an event
Events Programmer  Setup  Add  Create the event
After setting the name, enable the timed function of the event setting the Periodical Clock mode; it is possible to
configure up to two On and Off events for each day of the week.
Afterwards, set the relevant parameter for the OUT outputs with the SCN Scenario type and select the audio
scenario previously created (for more information see the section of the manual on Events).
7.5 Viewing the audio zones
After creating the groups and then the audio zones, the main menu shows the zones created, that can be
scrolled through by moving
to the left (<) or to the right (>).
Audio
Zone 23
Audio Library 2° Floor
FM Radio
102.5 MHz
Menu Setup
208
Group/zone definition
For each zone the display shows the number and the description, the description of the group of the transmitter
module and, where applica-
Audio
module
Zona
23 associated with the channel (audio source), the description of the transmitter
Audio Biblioteca
2° Piano
ble, some
supplementary information (in this case the frequency for the FM tuner).
Radio FM
102.5 MHz
With the
icon a submenu is displayed in which touching
:
Menu Setup
- Switch off zone (dynamics depending on the status) switches off the zone;
- Change sound source selects the sound source to play.
When the same icon corresponds to the speaker symbol with ON written above, it means that the zone is off;
On touching it
it will switch on.
7.5.1 FM tuner control
FM Radio
98.25 MHz
Deejay
Scan
Save
The above figure shows the control screen for the FM tuner transmitter module.
In the middle zone there is the frequency being used, the related signal strength (RSSI) and, only if enabled,
the RDS text is displayed.
The word Scan indicates how it activates one of the three selectable setting modes, namely Mem,
Scan
andFMFreq.
Radio
Radio FM
Radio FM
98.25 MHz
The98.25 MHz
and
icons perform the action of increasing and decreasing according to the selected mode.
Deejay
Deejay
98.25 MHz
Deejay
Scan
Scan
In Mem
mode Scan
the frequency being used corresponds to the value of one of the station memories.
n Saving the radio stations
In the Scan or Freq mode it is possible, by touching
the
icon, to save the current
frequency in one of the 8 available station memories.
Save Station
Back
2
3
4
5
Next
Set the desired station number, select Next and confirm with Yes.
209
Group/zone definition
n Selecting stations in memory
Touching
and
Mem activates the mode for calling up previously saved stations; with icons
you can call up one of the 8 saved FM stations.
The number alongside Mem is the selected station number.
n Automatic search for radio stations
Touching
Radio FMRadio FM
Scan activates the automatic radio station search mode; with icons98.25 MHz
and
98.25 MHz
you move in one of the two directions.
Deejay
Scan
Deejay
Scan
The parameters affecting the search can be changed via the menu for the device parameters.
n Frequency selection
Touching
Freq activates the mode for setting the current frequency; with icons
and
you move in one of the two directions. Keep the icons pressed for scrolling faster.
7.6 Managing the Docking Station
The Docking Station is controlled with two menus:
- the song playback menu (Playback) that is accessed from the Zone Menu;
- the database navigation menu in the Docking Station that is accessed from the Playback Menu.
If no iPod/iPhone is connected to the Docking Station or a jack connector is connected to the socket of the
auxiliary source, the Zone Menu will show the notice Dockingstation? and it will not be possible to use the
Playback Menu or play back songs (the button at bottom left is inhibited).
Audio
Zone 23
Audio Library 2° Floor
Docking station
?
Menu Setup
If an iPod/iPhone is connected, the Docking Station sends a message to the control unit and it is then possible to
open the Playback Menu by touching the Details icon (the button at bottom left that is now enabled).
7.6.1 Playback Menu
The Playback menu of the Docking Station is composed of a main screen on which the middle part is
used for a full display of the relevant information on the tracks being played.
Docking station 1
Queen
Best of Queen...
We will rock
210
Group/zone
definition
Dockingstation
1
Dockingstation
1
Queen
Queen
Best
Queen...
Theofbuttons
to
Best ofused
Queen...
We will rockWe will rock
•
and
manage the iPod/iPhone are the following:
to play the previous or next track.
Dockingstation 1
Queen
•
toBest
access
the Navigation Menu of the
of Queen...
1
DockingstationDockingstation
1
We will rock
Queen
Queen
toQueen...
pause track playback and restart it
Best of Queen...• Best of
We will rock
We will rock
Docking Station.
Dockingstation 1
Queen
at the point where it was stopped.
Dockingstation
1
Best
of Queen...
We will Queen
rock
Dockingstation
1
Dockingstation
1
to the Zone
Menu.
Best of• Queen...to return Queen
Queen
We will
• rock
to set repetition
of a single
or of a group of tracks.
Best of Queen...
Besttrack
of Queen...
We will rock We will rock
•
to set random playback of a group of tracks.
Dockingstation 1 Dockingstation 1
theQueen
two icons
and
opens a new page for selecting playback mode; the 4
Queen Touching
options shownBest
belowofare
displayed and by touching
each one you can enable/disable the related
Best of Queen...
Queen...
playback
mode.
We will rock
We will rock
The icons corresponding to the selection made will then be on the Playback menu selection button.
no repetition
random group of tracks
single track
ordered playback
group of tracks
random group of albums
If the Docking Station is controlled Locally (that is to say directly from the iPod/iPhone) the Playback
Menu will not display the song being played and the tracks will be managed with the three command
and playback icons.
Docking station 1
I-Pod
locally
controlled
7.6.1.1 Operation
The main screen of the Playback Menu shows the relevant information on the Artist, Album, and Song
being played.
Dockingstation
Dockingstation
1
1
This information will always be displayed
the iPod/iPhone is on Play or Pause while if it is on Stop
I-Pod when
I-Pod
controllato
controllato
the displayed fields will be empty.
Dockingstation
1
Dockingstation
1
localmente
localmente
I-PodandI-Pod icons will not be displayed.
In the case of Stop and Pause thecontrollato
controllato
Dockingstation 1
I-Pod
Pressing each of controllato
the icons
localmente
ferred.
localmentelocalmente
,
and
of the main screen changes song playback as pre-
211
Group/zone definition
The information on the song being played is continually updated: when the iPod/iPhone starts playing a
track the control unit immediately displays the relevant information.
Dockingstation 1
Song playback
canI-Pod
also be changed by the events generated by By-me rocker switches configured in
controllato
audio Groups or by
the rocker switches of the receivers.
Touching
Dockingstation 1
I-Pod
Touching
controllato
localmente
Touching
Dockingstation
localmente 1
I-Pod
within
3 s of the
controllato
localmente
start of the song will play the previous song.
after 3 s of the start of the song will play the current song from the start
plays the next track.
7.6.2 Docking Station Database Navigation
Menu 1
Dockingstation
From the Playback menu, touching
Queen
accesses
the Navigation menu.
Best of Queen...
We will rock
The Docking Station database navigation menu is composed of a main screen on which the middle part
is used for a full display of the navigation information.
The icons and procedures with which the Database is navigated are the following:
Music Archive
Select
Brano:
by Artist
Archivio musicale
Archivio musicale
Selezione
per Playlist
Selezione
Brano:
per
Artista
• Move
Dockingstation 1
Queen
Dockingstation
of and
Queen...1
• Best
We
Queenwill rock
Music Archive
Select by Playlist
Archivio musicale
Selezione per Playlist
to the left
< and to the right > to display the categories or elements.
to select a category or one of its specific elements.
Dockingstation 1
Dockingstation 1
Best•of Queen...
to return
to the Playback Menu.
QueenQueen
We will rock BestBest
of Queen...
of Queen...
•
to playWethe
category.
will selected
rock
We will rock
Touching
menu.
or
when a specific category has been selected takes you back to the Playback
The docking station navigation menu is composed of different screens depending on the categories and
the selected elements; as a result the icons that can be displayed are the following:
212
•
to return to the selection menu of the Artists/Playlists category.
•
to select an artist and display his or her albums.
•
to return to the selection menu of the Artists category.
•
to select the album and display the songs it contains.
Group/zone definition
•
to return to the list of artists.
•
to return to the list of albums.
•
to return to the Playlist.
•
to return to the previous menu.
7.6.2.1 Operation
Dockingstation 1
The database of the iPod/iPhone can be browsed by Playlist or Artist and navigation is Queen
permissible also
while playing a song.
Best of Queen...
Dockingstation
1 of category currently selected is highlighted by the relevant
During navigation,
the type
identifying
image.
We
will rock
Queen
After selecting
the
desired
type
of
category,
it
is
possible
to
send
it
to
playback
with
the
icon
thus
Best of Queen...
We will rock to the Playback screen.
returning automatically
Pressing
you go back to the Playback menu.
7.7 Details menu of the RCA source associated with the IR interface 20586-14586
From the zone menu, it is possible to access the menu of commands associated with the IR interface.
As illustrated from page 202 to page 204, each command can be coded as a sequence of 1, 2, 3 or 4 actions
and this corresponds to consecutively pressing up to 4 buttons on the remote control of the controlled device.
More precisely, the association of the commands with the 4 menu buttons is the following:
Interfaccia IR
COMMAND
Play
COMMANDS
COMMANDS
Pause
Resume
COMMAND
Skip +
Sel. Source 1
Sel. Source 2
Sel. Source 3
Important:
All the commands are cyclic; for example:
Dockingstation 1
I-Pod
controllato
• Touching
localmente
1 time activates the Pause control; touching it again activates Resume; touching the icon yet
againInterfaccia
activatesIRPause and so on.
• Touching the
button 1 time activates Sel. Source 1; touching the icon again activates Sel. Source 2;
touching the icon yet again activates Sel. Source 3; touching the icon again activates Sel. Source 1 and so on.
213
Group/zone definition
7.8 Adding devices to a group
Used to add new devices to an existing group.
For all the details see the section of the manual on the methods of creating groups.
Setup Configuration  Groups Audio groups  Select the desired group  Associated devices
 Add
During group creation it is necessary to keep the following rules in mind:
1.Create the groups related to the transmitter modules first.
2.It is not possible to add any other devices to a group that contains the FM Tuner module or the Docking
Station.
3. In a group that contains the RCA input it is possible to add only 1 call microphone 20586-14586.
4.Only the functional blocks related to the push-button or rocker switch controls can be added to a group that
contains the call module.
5.Only the functional blocks related to the rocker switch controls can be added to a group that contains one or
more receiver modules.
6.It is not possible to add any rocker switch controls and/or push-buttons to a group without any transmitter
or receiver modules.
7.A receiver can only be configured in an audio group.
8.A rocker switch that has been configured in an audio group or in a call group cannot be configured also in an
automation group and vice versa.
NOTE: Since the quantity of data exchanged is very high, the device configuration procedure can even
take a few dozen seconds.
7.9 Removing devices from a group
Used to remove functional blocks from a group
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Audio groups  Select the group scrolling through the list  Associated devices  Select the functional unit to remove  Remove device 
Proceed to remove the device  Yes
7.10 Modifying device parameters
Device parameters can be modified in order to personalize and adapt the characteristics of the system to different
installation requirements.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Audio groups  Select the group scrolling through the list  Associated devices  Select the functional unit scrolling through the list  Device parameters
The modifiable parameters for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit and vary by type depending on the device considered (see the instructions sheets provided with each article).
7.10.1 Device parameters
n Functional unit – Audio output /DIN
• LED management: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On
• Output power reduction = Off, On
This parameter must be set On when the 3M, 3W 8Ω flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker is connected (art. 20587)
214
Group/zone definition
n Functional unit – RCA Audio Input
•LED management: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
n Functional unit – FM tuner
•LED management: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
•Search threshold: 0%, 100%
This is the threshold beyond which a station is considered as valid during an automatic search
•RDS text: Off, On
•RSSI : Off,On
n Functional unit – Microphone/Call
•LED management: Off, Normal
•Baby Control threshold = from 0 to 15 (0 = maximum activation sensitivity)
This is the threshold of the audio signal captured by the microphone, beyond which the "Baby Control"
function is activated
•Call zone: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a “Push to Talk” selective call
•Baby Control zones: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a selective call corresponding to the "Baby
Control" service
•Audio Monitoring zones: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a selective call corresponding to the "Audio
Monitoring" service
n Functional unit – Rocker switch for Audio control
•LED management: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On, Ctrl LED Normal, Ctrl LED.Reverse, Ctrl LED.On
•Operation: Default = On-Off/Volume
This functional block refers to a rocker switch control, configured automatically by the By-me control unit
to perform the functions of zone switching on/off and adjusting the volume.
The Operation parameter can be changed later on according to the type of control: On-Off/Volume, Skip
Channel/Track, Sleep Audio.
The LED control parameter can also have values for the double button with the central LED (except for
the rocker switch of the call microphone 20586-19586-14586).
Note: When “Skip Channel/Track” operation is selected LED control is automatically disinhibited:
the value of the “LED control” parameter becomes “Off”.
Skip Channel/Track Rocker switch DX audio/
operation
By-me automation
Parameter
LED control
OFF
Always ON
Rocker switch CX
By-me automation
OFF
Always ON
CTRL Always ON
Rocker switch SX
audio/By-me automation
OFF
Always ON
CTRL Always ON
215
Group/zone definition
n Functional unit – Rocker switch for Audio Monitoring
•LED management: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On, Ctrl LED Normal, Ctrl LED.Reverse, Ctrl LED.On
•Operation: Default = On Off
This functional block refers to a rocker switch control configured automatically by the control unit to
perform the function of switching audio monitoring on/off; the Operation parameter must always remain
set to Audio Monitoring.
The LED control parameter can also have values for the double button with the central LED (except for
the rocker switch of the call microphone 20586-14586).
n Functional unit – IR stereo control
•LED management
n Functional unit – Dock. iPod/iPhone Station
•LED management: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
•Control: Remote, Local
This enables controlling the iPod/iPhone from a remote position (that is from the By-me control unit and
with the touch screens) or directly with the iPod/iPhone.
216
Types of system
8. Types of system
This chapter, by way of example, illustrates some types of installation that can be made with the By-me speaker
system.
8.1 Audio zones with receiver modules and By-me controls
This example illustrates a typical installation in which one or more zones can play the audio source coming from
the transmitter modules.
Zone audio con moduli ricevitori e comandi By-me
+
L
-
20585
+L
20587
20582
01900
+
R
-
20587
+
R+
-
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20587
-
20581 + 20587
20531.23 +
20531.24
L
ZONA AUDIO 02
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
+L
-
01901
20588
+R
-
20588
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
ZONA AUDIO 01
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20585 and 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.4
audio amplifiers 20581 (receiver modules) with the relevant controls 20531.23 and 20531.24.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules and two groups for the receiver modules with
the control buttons.
Zones created: two audio zones associated with the corresponding groups of receivers.
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels.
The control buttons perform their actions on the entire zone in which they are configured.
217
Types of system
8.2 Audio zones with voice call function
Zone audio con funzione di chiamata vocale
20521
+ 20532.20
+
01904
L
L +
-
20582
20582
TX ingresso
01900
audio
Sintonizzatore
FM
20521
+ 20532.20
20586
Modulo di
chiamata
-
20587
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
R+
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 02
L
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
+L
-
20588
01901
+R
-
20588
20512
ZONA AUDIO 01
CHIAMATA GLOBALE
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.4 audio
amplifiers 20581 and 01901 (receiver modules) with the relevant control buttons 20531.23 and 20531.24,
No.1 touchscreen 20512, No.2 By-me controls 20521, and No.1 call module 20586.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module, and two groups
for the receiver modules with the control devices.
Zones created: two audio zones associated with two receiver groups.
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels. The selective call zone setting
parameter must first be defined in the call module.
At the time of the call the voice message replaces the sound source being played at that moment.
On pressing the general call (global call) button this will be transmitted throughout all the present zones; on pressing the selective call button it will be transmitted only in the Audio 02 Zone.
218
Types of system
8.3 Audio zones with Baby Control function
This example illustrates a typical installation in which one or more zones can play the audio source coming from
the transmitter modules.
Zone audio con funzione "baby control"
20521
+ 20532.20
+
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20586
L
L +
-
20582
20582
01900
-
20587
01908
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
01901
-
01908
+L
20512
-
20588
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA PER BABY CONTROL
01901
+R
-
20588
+L
-
20588
01901
+R
-
01903
20588
ZONA AUDIO 01
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
ZONA AUDIO 02
CHIAMATA GLOBALE
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.4 audio
amplifiers 20581 and 01901 (receiver modules) with the relevant controls 20531.23 and 20531.24, No.4
By-me controls 20521, No.1 touchscreen 20512 and No.1 call microphone module 20586 (transmitter).
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module, and two groups
for the receiver modules with the control buttons.
Zones created: two audio zones associated with two receiver groups
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels.
The "baby control" call zone setting parameter must first be defined in the call microphone module. To enable the "Baby
Control" function in the call module it is sufficient to press the relevant button on the module. At the time of the "Baby
Control" call the voice message stops and replaces the sound source being played at that moment in the Audio 02 Zone.
219
Types of system
8.4 Audio zones with audio monitoring function
Zone audio con funzione ascolto ambientale
20521
+ 20532.20
+
L
01901
-
20582
20582
01900
20521 +
20532.20
20586
L +
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
20512
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
01907
R+
-
L
01907
-
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
ZONA AUDIO 02
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20521 +
20532.20
L
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
L +
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 01
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 03
ASCOLTO AMBIENTALE
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.5 audio
amplifiers 20581 and 01901 (receiver modules) with the relevant controls 20531.23 and 20531.24, No.3
By-me controls 20521, No.1 call microphone module 20586 (transmitter) and No.1 touchscreen 20512.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module with the audio
monitoring control, and three groups for the receiver modules with the associated controls.
Zones created: three audio zones associated with the three receiver groups.
Operation: the three zones work independently to play the audio channels; zones 02 and 03 are also
dedicated to audio monitoring. The audio monitoring call zone setting parameter must first be defined in
the call module.
To enable the audio monitoring function it is necessary to have configured the relevant On / Off control button
in the group containing the call module; on pressing the button the sound acquired by the microphone at that
moment is played only in the Audio Zone 02 and 03.
220
Types of system
8.5 Audio zones with voice communication function
Zone audio con funzione comunicazione vocale
1
20521
+ 20532.20
+
20521
+ 20532.20
20586
L
L +
-
20582
20582
01900
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
20512
20588
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
01901
-
L
20588
ZONA AUDIO 02
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA 3
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
2
20586
L +
-
+L
20587
-
20588
01901
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
+R
-
R+
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 03
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA 2
20588
ZONA AUDIO 01
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.5 audio
amplifiers 20581 and 01901 (receiver modules) with the relevant controls 20531.23 and 20531.24, No.2
By-me controls 20521, No.1 touchscreen 20512 and No.2 call microphone modules 20586 (transmitters).
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, two groups for the call modules, and three
groups for the receiver modules with the associated controls.
Zones created: three audio zones associated with the three receiver groups.
Operation: the three zones can work independently to play the audio channels. The call modules no. 1 and
no. 2 are located respectively in the same room where there are the speakers of the audio zones 02 and 03.
The selective call zone setting parameter must first be defined on the call modules; in this case audio zone 03 will
be set on module no. 1 and audio zone 02 will be set on module no. 2.
At the time of the call the voice message replaces the sound source being played at that moment.
On pressing the selective call button of module 1, this will be transmitted only in Audio Zone 03; likewise on
pressing the selective call button of module 2, this will be transmitted only in Audio Zone 02 (selective call zone
setting parameter).
This way, when necessary, it is possible to communicate in a unidirectional manner between two different rooms.
This is half-duplex communication since the channel assigned to the call is univocal and therefore shared by the
two configured modules; clearly, as long as the first call module is active it will not be possible to activate the
second one, and vice versa.
221
Types of system
8.6 Audio zones with central switch-off
Zone audio con spegnimento centralizzato
ZONA AUDIO 02
20521
+ 20532.20
20521
+ 20532.20
+
L
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
-
20587
20582
01900
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
L +
+
-
L
-
20588
20587
+
R
-
20587
R+
01901
-
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20588
20582
+
L
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20584
ZONA AUDIO 01
ASCOLTO AMBIENTALE
Configured devices: No.2 audio inputs 20582 and No.1 FM tuner 01900 (transmitter modules), No.4 audio
amplifiers 20581 and 01901 (receiver modules) with the relevant controls 20531.23 and 20531.24, No.3
By-me controls 20521 and No.1 IR interface 20584.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules and two groups for the receiver modules with
the associated controls. One By-me On/Off control is used as a scenario command.
Zones created: two audio zones associated with the two receiver groups.
Operation: the two zones can work independently to play the audio channels.
It is necessary to create a scenario associating the receiver groups related to the two audio zones and save it with all
of the audio devices in the switch-off status; later on the By-me control button is associated as an external control.
With the same criterion it is possible to create a scenario and save it with the audio devices in the desired switchon status and associate the same button as an external control. In this way, by pressing on the top and bottom of
the By-me On/Off control button it is possible to perform central switching on and off for the whole audio system.
The scenario is the only way in which it is possible to control a number of audio zones at the same time; in this
situation therefore, the receiver modules cannot be configured on more than one group (they therefore have the
depth of group 1). When saving the scenario it is a good idea to choose the transmission devices involved too;
while it is not necessary to define the On / Off status of the listening zones, it is in fact possible to save the desired
frequency on the radio and activate it when the scenario is called up.
222
Glossary
9. Glossary
Source
Device playing an audio signal.
Transmission channel
Frequency band associated with a transmitter used to transmit the content of the source.
Transmitter (TX)
Device that sends the source content over the communication bus.
Receiver (RX)
Device that receives the source content from the bus and transmits it in the room via acoustic speakers.
Group
Set of functional block of the devices connected logically with each other.
Zone
One or more rooms in which the same sound source is played by one or more receivers.
Track
Saved song or radio station.
223
224
Section
Light Control
225
226
Table of contents
1. General characteristics of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2. Devices and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
3. Configuration on the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters of the dimmers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 WHITE dimmers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 RGB dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
231
231
237
4. Application examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
227
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The Light Control range, comprising universal dimmers and lamps, reconciles the need for comfort and a reduction
in consumption, creating customized and "energy-frugal" environments, while ensuring full compatibility and total
installation flexibility. The new range of universal dimmers allows you to manage every type of source, not just high
energy efficiency sources, but also traditional incandescent sources. Control that is therefore also applicable to
existing plants and provides the opportunity of fitting simply and effectively into any architecture.
Included in the By-me home automation system, the universal dimmers complete the light management range.
Using the touch screens will allow you to create and control the range of programmed lighting scenarios to make
each room unique while paying attention to energy savings, by switching the lights on and off and adjusting their
brightness. The new (patented) RGB functions, available via dedicated devices, enable making elegant, sophisticated colour changes and light effects, suitable for all needs, from residential to small businesses.
With the automation system you can then configure and afterwards call up scenarios involving various functions
in the home automation system such as, for example, combinations of lights and colours matched with the audio
functions to create customized environments featuring efficient and complete comfort.
All Vimar's solutions are part of a single universal technology that ensures "hassle-free" fittings and the ability to
replace the old dimmers in existing systems, to ensure the utmost installation flexibility.
The universal dimmers are compatible with all light sources: incandescent bulbs, LEDs and dimmable compact
fluorescent bulbs, halogen lights and LED strips. Dimming technology that is therefore ideal for any type of lighting system.
Total flexibility: this is the criterion with which the technology was chosen for all the new solutions for light management and control. In the case of both new plants and renovations, for fitting or replacement, it is possible at
any time to choose more efficient and flexible sources, thanks to the devices that are technologically capable of
dimming every kind of lamp.
228
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The Light Control System consists of the following devices:
20529-19529-16969-14529: Two rocker switches and
actuator for SLAVE dimmers 230 V~, for LED lamps, LED
electronic transformers, RGB lamps, RGB electronic power
supplies, to be completed with interchangeable buttons with
1 or 2 modules
20549-19549-16989-14549: Three rocker switches and
MASTER dimmer actuator 230 V~ 50 Hz for incandescent
lamps 40-300 W, electronic transformers 40-200 VA, CFL
lamps 10-120 W, LED lamps 3-120 W, fuse, to be completed
with interchangeable buttons with 1 or 2 modules - 3 modules.
01870: MASTER dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for incandescent lamps 40-500 W, electronic transformers 40-300 VA,
CFL lamps 10-200 W, LED lamps 3-200 W, for LED electronic power supplies, protection fuse, installation on DIN rails
(60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm.
01871: SLAVE dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for incandescent
lamps 40-500 W, electronic transformers 40-300 VA, CFL
lamps 10-200 W, LED lamps 3-200 W, control from universal
MASTER dimmer with load adapter, fuse, installation on DIN
rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm.
01877: Electronic multi-voltage power supply 230 V~ 50
Hz for dimmable RGB LED lamps 12-24 V , adjustable with
By-me devices. SELV output.
229
Configuration on the controller
3. Configuration on the controller
The main task to perform in order to configure the dimmers of the Light Control system on the controller is to create
functional groups (sets of functional units that need to work together) to which they are assigned.
CAUTION: ONLY ONE RGB ACTUATOR CAN BE CONFIGURED PER GROUP.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups
Automation groups  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group (00-480) that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured ones;
touch Next to confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group and
the zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by touching Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address
and number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove Group menu).
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration.
For each device, how to select a functional unit is explained in the instructions sheet that accompanies
the product.
To configure the various functional units within a group, carry out the following:
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit of the dimmer to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select the type of dimmer (SLAVE dimmer or Other):
• SLAVE dimmer  Next (Phase Cutting) LE or TE  Next  (Flash start) Yes or No  End
• Other  Next  WHITE or RGB
 Next
5. Press the configuration button and, where necessary, the rocker button of the dimmer to be included in the group.
If RGB and a rocker button has been selected in point 4, the controller will prompt you to set the function to be
associated with the button too:
230
RGB
Dimmer
Hue control
Saturation control
Fading Show Activation
Durata
Back spegnimento
Set
Durata luci scale
Preavviso
Durata reg. assoluta
Taglio di fase
Durata accensione
>
Devicespegnimento
parameters00:02
>
Durata
Device parameters00:02
Notice
NO
Speed
Norm
Duration of absolute 00:02
Switch on value
>
Fadingshow
>
Switch on duration
00:04
Switch
off duration
00:02
Back
Save
Device
parameters
Preavviso
Back
Save
Durata reg. assoluta Norm...
Velocità
Fadingshow
Valore
accensione
25%
Select
the desired
function by scrolling
through the list and tap
Set; the procedure is started on
Durata accensione
>
the controller.
Devicespegnimento
parameters00:02
Durata
6. The
device indicates that configuration
is in progress by means
of a red LED, which goes off when configuraOpzioni
Notice
NO
tion is complete.
Dispositivi
associati
Duration of absolute 00:02
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Informazione
gruppo
Fadingshow
>
Modifica
nome
8. Proceed with the configuration of other functional units by repeating
points
3, 4, 5 and 6 or tap
Rimuovi gruppo
BackBack
to exit.
Save
Back
Esc
All the procedures relating to the management of the groups and functional units of the WHITE and RGB dimmers are similar to those of all the other By-me devices (for full details see page 30, 31, 32, 33 and 34 in this
manual).
Associated devices
Opzioni
3.2 Setting/changing
the parameters of the dimmers.0x001C right Dimmer
1
Dispositivi
0xAFC1
Taste
01 the system2to the variDevice
parameters associati
can be set and/or modified in order to customize
operation
to adapt
Informazione
gruppo
1
0x0123 IR Sensor
ous installation requirements.
Modifica nome
SetupRimuovi
gruppo
 Configuration
 Groups  Automation groupsBack
 Select the group by scrolling
Add
through
the list  Associated devices
Back
Esc
 Select the functional unit by scrolling
through the list
 Device parameters
Associated devices
0x001C right Dimmer
0xAFC1 Taste 01
0x0123 IR Sensor
Back
right Dimmer
1
2
1
Add
Device parameters
Remove device
Back
Esc
The modifiable parameters for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit and vary by type
depending on the dimmer considered.
right Dimmer
3.2.1 WHITE dimmers
Device
parameters
• Possible controls
Remove device
- Switch on/off
- Adjust/change brightness
Back
- Call up scenario
Esc
• Operating parameters
- Adjustment speed (minimum, normal, maximum)
- Minimum adjustment value
- Switch-on value
- Switch-on duration
- Switch-off duration
231
Device parameters
- Delay in switching off the dimmer with warning function
- Time for changing absolute brightness (Duration of absolute adj.)
- Phase cutting
- Flash start
Device parameters
Device
Speed parametersNorm...
Minumim Value
25%
Speed
Norm...
Switch on
value
Minumim
Value
25%>
Switchon
onvalue
duration
00:02
Switch
>
Durataon
spegnimento
00:02
Switch
duration
Back
Save
00:02
Durataspegnimento
luci scale
00:02
Durata
00:02
Back
Save
Velocità
Norm...
Preavviso
Durata
luci scale
00:02>
Valorereg.
minimo
25%
Durata
assoluta Norm...
00:02
Velocità
Preavviso
>
Valorereg.
accensione
Taglio
di
fase
LE>
Valore
minimo
25%
Durata
assoluta 00:02
Device
parameters00:02
Durata
accensione
Flash
start
NO
Valore
>
Taglio
diaccensione
fase
LE
Device
parameters
Switch
off
duration
00:02
Durata
accensione
00:02
Flash
start
NO
Noticeoff duration
Switch
00:02>
Duration of absolute 00:02
Notice
>
Phase cutting
LE
Duration
of absolute 00:02
Flash start
NO
Phase
cutting
LE
Back
Save
Flash start
NO
Back
Save
Switch on value
Last
value
Switch
on value
Initial value
Last
value
Final value
Initial value
Final value
Back
Back
Notice
Notice
Notice
Notice
delay
Noticevalue
Notice
Notice delay
Notice value
Back
Back
NO
25%
NO
100%
25%
100%
Set
Set
YES
00:02
YES
50%
00:02
50%
Set
Set
Norm...
25%
3.2.1.1 Speed of
​​ adjustment
Norm...
This parameter allows you to set
the> speed (selectable from the Min, Norm and Max options) with which
25%
Device
parameters associated
>
the adjustment is made via the00:02
device.
Speed parameters00:02
Device
Norm
Switch on value
Speed
Norm>
Switch
onvalue
duration
3.2.1.2 on
Minimum
adjustment00:04
value
Switch
>
Switch
offduration
duration
00:02
This parameter,
to be used with
CFLs, is used to set the minimum brightness value below which you
Switch
on
00:04
Preavviso
Switch
off duration
cannot go.
00:02
Back
Save
Durata
Velocità
Preavviso
Back reg. assoluta Norm...
Save
Fadingshow
Valore
accensione
25%
Durata
reg.
assoluta Norm...
Velocità
Durataaccensione
accensione
Fadingshow
Valore
25%>
Device
parameters00:02
Durata
spegnimento
Durata
accensione
>
Device
parameters00:02
Notice spegnimento
NO
Durata
Duration of absolute 00:02
Notice
NO
Fadingshow
Duration
of absolute 00:02>
Adjustment curve
Fadingshow
>
Back
Save
Back
Save
Minimum value
232
Opzioni
Opzioni
Dispositivi associati
Informazione
gruppo
Dispositivi
associati
Modifica nomegruppo
Informazione
Rimuovi gruppo
Device parameters
3.2.1.3 Ramp Operation
This allows you to set the values ​​of the brightness ramp both while switching on and off.
Adjustment curve
Switch-on end
value
Switch-on start
value
Switch-on duration
Switch-off duration
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Switch-on start value
from 0% to 100%
Switch-on end value
from 0% to 100%
Switch-on duration
from 0 to 1 h
Switch-off duration
from 0 to 1 h
Last value
YES or NO
If you select Last value  NO the Initial value and End value parameters will be displayed too.
233
Device parameters
3.2.1.4 Delayed switch-off with warning function
This parameter delays switching off while decreasing the brightness, if desired, for a set time (useful, for
example, when you leave the house).
Adjustment curve
Warning adjustment
Delay
switch-off
234
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Switch Off Delay
from 0 to 1 h
Warning adjustment
from 0% to 100%
Duration
switch-off
Device parameters
3.2.1.5 Time for changing absolute brightness.
This parameter allows you to set the time it takes to change a value of absolute brightness (for example, due
to the activation of a scenario).
Desired brightness value
Adjustment curve
Current brightness value
Duration
adjustment
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Duration of adjustment
from 0 to 1 h
3.2.1.6 Phase cutting
• Adjustment of leading edge (LE): used with incandescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps and compatible LED lamps, as well as L type electronic transformers.
• Adjustment of trailing edge (TE): used with compatible loads such as fluorescent lamps, LED lamps or
C type electronic transformers.
Dimmering with Leading Edge mode
Dimmering with Trailing Edge mode
235
Device parameters
3.2.1.7 Flash Start
This parameter, used with CFLs, enables switching on at the maximum value for approximately 2 s and
subsequent adjustment to the set value.
Adjustment curve
approximately 2 s
236
Device parameters
Device parameters
Speed
Norm...
3.2.2
RGBparameters
dimmers
Device
Minumim Value
25%
Norm...
•Speed
Possible controls
Switch
onValue
value
>
Minumim
25%
-Switch
Switch on/off
on
duration
00:02>
Switch
on
value
-Durata
Adjustment/change
to hue (H)00:02
spegnimento
Back
Save
Switch
on
duration
00:02
-Durata
Adjustment/change
to saturation
(S)
luci
scale
00:02
Durata
spegnimento
00:02
Back
Save
Velocità
Norm...
-Preavviso
Adjustment/change to brightness
(V)
>
Durata
luci
scale
00:02
Valore
minimo
25%
reg.
assoluta
-Durata
Call
up
scenario
00:02
Velocità
Norm...
Preavviso
>
Valore
accensione
Taglio
faseassoluta
LE>
-“FADING-SHOW”
Valoredireg.
minimo
25%
Durata
Device
parameters00:02
Durata
accensione
00:02
Flash
start
NO
Valore
accensione
Taglio
di
fase
LE>
Switch
off
duration
00:02
• Device
Operatingparameters
parameters
Durata
accensione
00:02
Flash
start
NO
> maximum)
-Notice
Adjustment
(minimum, normal,
Switch
offspeed
duration
00:02
of
absolute
00:02
-Duration
Switch-on
value
Notice
>
cutting
LE
-Phase
Switch-on
duration
Duration
of absolute 00:02
Flash
start
NO
Save
-Back
Switch-off
duration
Phase
cutting
LE
Flash
NO
- Back
Delay instart
switching off the dimmer
with warning function
Save
- Time for changing absolute brightness (Duration of absolute adj.)
Norm...
- Setting “FADING-SHOW”
25%
Norm...
>
25%
Device parameters00:02
>
Speed
Device parametersNorm
00:02
Switch
>
Speed on value
Norm
Switch
on
duration
00:04
Switch on value
>
Switch
00:02
Switch off
on duration
duration
00:04
Preavviso
Back
Save
Switch off duration
00:02
Durata
reg. assoluta Norm...
Velocità
Preavviso
Back accensione
Save
Fadingshow
Valore
25%
Durata reg. assoluta Norm...
Velocità
Durata
accensione
>
Fadingshow
Valore
accensione
25%
Device
parameters00:02
Durata
Durata spegnimento
accensione
>
Notice
NO
Device
parameters00:02
Durata spegnimento
Duration
Notice of absolute 00:02
NO
Fadingshow
>
Duration of absolute 00:02
Fadingshow
>
Back
Save
Back
Save
Switch on value
Last value
Initial value
Final value
Back
Notice
Notice
Notice delay
Notice value
Back
NO
25%
100%
Set
YES
00:02
50%
Set
The meaning of the parameters of Speed ​​adjustment, Switch-on value, Switch-on duration, Switch-off
Opzioni
duration,
Delay in switching off the dimmer with warning function and Time for changing absolute
Dispositivi
associati
brightness
is similar
to that for the WHITE dimmers.
Opzioni
Informazione
gruppo
Dispositivi associati
Modifica
nome
Informazione gruppo
Rimuovi
Modificagruppo
nome
Back
Rimuovi gruppo
Back
Associated devices
0x001C
rightdevices
Dimmer
Associated
Esc
Esc
237
1
Device parameters
3.2.2.1 Related adjustments
Using a previously configured rocker button you can adjust each of the following components:
Dimmer
Hue control
Saturation control
3.2.2.2 Fading-show
The Fading Show function allows you to actuate cyclical transitions in colour change and combinations
thereof on the device.
Velocità
Norm...
Valore accensione
25%
Durata accensione
>
Devicespegnimento
parameters00:02
Durata
Notice
NO
Duration of absolute 00:02
Fading Show
>
Back
Save
Device parameters
Fading Show colors
Transition [min:s]
Persistance [min:s]
Back
>
00:12
00:33
Save
Device parameters
Fading Show colors
Transition [min:s]
Persistance [min:s]
Back
>
01:12
00:33
Save
Device parameters
Fading Show colors
>
Transition [min:s]
01:12
Persistance [min:s]
00:33
Back
238
Save
Device parameters
Parameters:
- Duration of transition, that is the time elapsing between colour changes
- Duration of persistence, that is the time a single colour remains
- Colour list, that is the number of colours to be reproduced (up to a maximum of 6)
Duration
persistence
Duration of transition
Duration of transition
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Duration of transition
from 0 to 1 h
Duration of persistence
from 0 to 1 h
The fading-show mode is started with an on/off command.
TYPE OF DEVICES
FADING-SHOW FUNCTION
By-me control devices
YES
Monochrome Touch Screens
YES
Colour Touch Screens
YES
Controllers
NO
Web Servers and applications
YES
239
Application examples
4. Application examples
• Example 1
The following example shows the configuration of a control with two rocker buttons and an actuator for SLAVE
dimmers 230 V~ (20529-19529-14529) so you can control the brightness and fading-show in a room.
The configuration will be made so that the left rocker button is associated with the brightness control and the
right one with fading-show activation.
Creating functional groups.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Add
Create the functional groups within which the various functional units are to be added.
Configuring the "actuator" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete. The controller will display the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "left button" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
240
Application examples
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the left rocker button.
5. Select Dimmer  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "right button" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the right rocker button.
5. Select Fading Show Activation  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
On pressing the right rocker button the fading show function will be activated as set in accordance with par.
3.2.2.2.
241
Application examples
• Example 2
The following example shows the configuration of a control with three rocker buttons (20541-19541-1698114541), which, combined with the power supply RGB 01877, is used to control the brightness, hue and saturation in a room.
The configuration will be made so that the left rocker button is associated with the brightness control, the middle
one with the hue and the right one with the saturation.
Creating functional groups.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Add
Create the functional groups within which the various functional units are to be added.
Configuring the "power supply 01877" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the power supply CONF configuration button.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete. The controller will display the functional unit that has just been configured.
242
Application examples
Configuring the "left button" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the left rocker button.
5. Select Dimmer  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "middle button" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the middle rocker button.
5. Select Hue Control  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "right button" functional unit.
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling
controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
through the list and tap
Add; the procedure is started on the
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the right rocker button.
5. Select Saturation Control  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
243
244
Section
Power management
245
246
Table of Contents
1. General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
2. Devices and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3. Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3.1 Configuration of the load control module 01455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
3.1.1 Installing the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3.1.2 Setting the trigger thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
3.1.3 Creating control groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
3.1.4 Priority settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
3.1.5 Displaying the level of power consumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.1.6 Configuring a load cut-out signalling relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.1.7 Programming by time slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.1.8 Load operation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.2 Measurement control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3.3 Alarm control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3.4 Device parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
247
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics
The power management functions of the By-me system let you control the consumption of your system and see
both instantaneous values and historical values of the electrical and other (water, gas) measurements.
The functions are grouped into three main menus:
-Load control: via the load control module 01455, it enables monitoring the amount of mains power being consumed in order to prevent the meter from being tripped due to overload and disconnecting the controlled loads
according to priority, if necessary. Single-phase systems of up to 33 kW and three-phase systems of up to 100
kW can be managed with or without photovoltaic generation and with a maximum of 16 priority groups.
-Measurement control: allows you to use up to 20 By-me groups to configure power meters (art. 01450, 01451)
or actuators (art. 01456, 20537-19537-14537) or pulse counting devices (art. 01452) in order to display the data
on a By-me touch screen or web server.
-Alarm control: allows you to view the groups in which the actuators are configured with current measurement
(art. 01456, 20537-19537-14537) and view/reset any alarms that may be signalled by the actuators themselves.
To check the power consumption, also in relation to any energy produced by a photovoltaic system, you need
to install the load control module 01455 that is managed by the control panel on a par with the other appliance
in the system.
The load control module 01455 can restore disconnected users automatically, as soon as the total consumption
of the system returns to a level below the setting.
248
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The devices that enable the Power Management functions are as follows:
01450: Power meter, 3 inputs for toroidal current sensor, detectable power 25 W-100 kW, single-phase power supply 120-230
V 50/60 Hz three-phase 230/400 V 50/60 Hz, installation on DIN
rail (60715 TH35), occupies 1 x 17.5 mm module. Supplied with
a toroidal current sensor.
The device measures the power on one or more mains lines.
It can work on both single and three phase systems and can independently monitor up to 3 electrical lines.
The current on the electrical line to be monitored is measured by a
current sensor (art. 01457, 01458).
Lastly, it saves the history of the energy values of
​​ each of the lines.
01451: Power meter with built-in current sensor, detectable
power up to 3680 W, flush mounting (retrofit).
The device measures the consumption of a load supplied by the
electrical line. The consumption data such as power and energy
dissipation are displayed on the touch screens (art. 21553.2, 21554,
21511, etc.) connected to the By-me bus.
01452: Pulse counter interface for detecting data from devices
equipped with pulse output such as electricity, water, gas
meters, with flush mounting (retrofit).
The device enables counting the pulses transmitted by a fiscal meter
or counter for gas, water, hot water, electricity, wind speed, etc. and
puts the data collected onto the By-me bus.
The pulse is reproduced on the output for other similar devices.
249
Devices and functions
01455: Load control module, 3 inputs for toroidal current sensor,
detectable power 25 W-100 kW, single-phase power supply 120230 V 50/60 Hz three-phase 230/400 V 50/60 Hz, installation on
DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 1 17.5 mm module.
The device prevents the switch in the electricity meter from tripping
due to overload; it can operate on both single-phase and three-phase
systems.
The current on the electrical line to be monitored is measured with a
current sensor (art. 01457, 01458) and it is capable of independently
controlling up to 3 electrical lines.
It is designed to control systems where there is also a generating
plant (e.g. photovoltaic systems).
If the line cable is not easily accessible, the measurement can be
made remotely by means of the power meter (art. 01450) connected
to the By-me bus.
In addition, it saves the history of the energy values of
​​ each of the
lines.
01456: Actuator with relay output 16 A 120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz with
integrated current sensor, 1 input channel for toroidal residual
current sensor, DIN rail installation (60715 TH35), occupies 1
17.5 mm module. Supplied without toroidal residual current
sensor art. 01459.
The device performs the function of an actuator and measures the
power consumption; it also enables alarm signalling due to malfunctioning such as current leakage and load faults. The device can be
used in automation, energy saving and HVAC management systems.
It can also be used in systems where the old load control module
01855 is installed.
01457: Toroidal current sensor for load control and power metering, hole diameter 7.5 mm, cable length 40 cm.
01458: Toroidal current sensor for actuator 01456, hole diameter
19 mm, cable length 40 cm.
01459: Toroidal residual current sensor for power metering, hole
diameter 9 mm, cable length 40 cm.
20537-19537-14537: Actuator with relay output 16 A 230 V ~ 50
Hz with integrated current sensor - 2 modules.
The device performs the function of an actuator and measures the
power consumption; it also enables alarm signalling due to malfunctioning such as current leakage and load faults. The device can be
used in automation, energy saving and HVAC management systems.
It can also be used in systems where the old load control module
01855 is installed.
250
Load control
3. Load control
The load control module 01455 enables monitoring the amount of mains power being consumed in order to prevent the meter from being tripped due to overload and disconnecting the controlled loads, if necessary.
The following systems can be managed (with or without photovoltaic generation):
- single-phase systems up to 33 kW
- three-phase systems up to 100 kW
Up to 16 control groups can be controlled (equivalent to 16 priorities).
Each control group (which must necessarily include module 01455 and a By-me relay actuator) can be set in the
following ways:
• Auto OFF/ON: automatic load connection and disconnection depending on the amount of power consumed
and the group's priority
• Forced ON: load always on, irrespective of the input conditions.
• Forced OFF: load always off, irrespective of the input conditions.
For each group, you can from the control panel or touch screen select the Auto OFF/ONandForced ON mode
setting; with the events programmes available on the control panel you can then set one or more groups in Forced
OFF mode (typically used to time the activation/deactivation of specific loads).
Each group can be associated with a rocker switch, which can be used to force the setting to Forced ON (by
pressing ON on the button); the override condition is indicated by the LED on the button, which remains lit continuously.
Pressing OFF on the group button takes you back to Auto OFF/ON mode.
3.1 Configuration of the load control module 01455
To configure this device carry out the following procedure:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Power management  Load control  374 Controller 01 
Associated devices  Add
Press the load control module configuration button.
Once the device has been recognised in the By-me control panel, you need to select the type of system. This
is done by using a help menu that lets you configure the load control module in accordance with the wiring
diagram and the required functions.
N.B. Configuration of the load control module 01455 can take up to a few minutes.
The following pages illustrate various types of system installation and the relevant configuration procedures.
251
Load control
 Single-phase system with no generation
In this case you can simply use the load control module 01455 combined with a current sensor
(see the figure on the next page).
In the help menu, select:
Type of system  Single-phase
Generation No
Exchange meter
01457-01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
L
NL
E
832
COD
PA3 E
DAT
N
01455
+
BUS
–
252
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
Load control
 Single-phase system with “local” generation
In this type of system the cable leaving the generation meter goes to the same consumer unit where there
is also the exchange meter cable.
In this case you can simply use just the load control module 01455 connecting the sensor 1 to the
exchange meter and the sensor 2 to the generation meter as shown in the figure below.
In the help menu, select:
Type of system  Single-phase
Generation Yes
Generation wiring Local wiring
Generation meter
INVERTER
L
N
L
N
01457-01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
NL
E
COD
832
DATE
PA3
01457-01458
L
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
NL
832
PA3
E
COD
DATE
N
Exchange meter
01455
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
+
BUS
–
253
Load control
 Single-phase system with “remote” generation
In this type of system the cable leaving the generation meter does not go to the same consumer unit
where there is also the exchange meter cable.
Therefore, you cannot directly use the 2 current sensors on the load control module 01455 (the sensor
cable is 40 cm long) but you need to install a power meter 01450 to measure the current generated (as
shown in the figure below).
In the help menu, select:
Type of system  Single-phase
Generation Yes
Generation wiring Remote wiring
Exchange meter
20537
19537
14537
01457
01458
20537
19537
14537
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
L
E
COD
832N
DATE
PA3
+
BUS
–
L
L
N
N
N
L
Generation meter
01457
01458
01455
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
INVERTER
01450
+
BUS
–
CAUTION: After configuring the load control module 01455, configure the functional unit no.1 of
the power meter 01450 in the "375 Line 01" group by pressing the configuration button on the
device once.
254
Load control
 Three-phase system with no generation
In this case you can simply use the load control module 01455 combined with three current sensors
(see the figure below).
In the help menu, select:
Type of system  Three-phase
Generation No
Exchange meter
CONTACTOR
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
NL
E
COD
832
CONTACTOR
NL
E
COD
832
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
NL
E
COD
832
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
L1
L2
L3
N
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
01455
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
01851.2
By-me
16A 120-230V
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
+ -
+
BUS
–
255
Load control
 Three-phase system with generation (from one to three phases)
In this case you need to use the load control module 01455 (paired with 3 current sensors) to measure the
exchange current and the power meter 01450 to measure the generated current (with one current sensor
for each phase of the generation meter).
In the help menu, select:
Type of system  Three-phase
Generation Yes
Select the lines to which the generation meter is connected; this selection will be highlighted with the
icon 
Generation meter
INVERTER
CONTACTOR
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
L
E
L
E
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
COD
832N
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
COD
832N
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
Exchange
meter
L
E
COD
832N
DATE
PA3
01457
01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
01457-01458
L
832N
PA3
E
COD
DATE
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
L
832N
PA3
DATE
E
COD
L1
01457-01458
01457-01458
CTRY
OF MFG
PAT. PEND
L2
L3
L
832N
PA3
E
COD
DATE
N
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
01455
01450
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
20537
19537
14537
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
01850.2
BUS
+ -
+
BUS
–
CAUTION: After configuring the load control module 01455, configure the power meter 01450 as
follows:
- Insert functional unit no.1 of the power meter in the "Line 1" group pressing the configuration
button once
- Insert functional unit no.2 of the power meter in the "Line 2" group pressing the configuration
button twice *
-Insert functional unit no.3 of the power meter in the "Line 3" group pressing the configuration
button three times **
N.B: * required if the generation meter is also connected to line 2 in the system.
** required if the generation meter is also connected to line 3 in the system.
256
Load control
3.1.1 Installing the sensors
There are two types of sensors that can be used and configured in the Power Management system:
- 01457: 7.5 mm Toroidal Sensor
- 01458: 19 mm Toroidal Sensor
3.1.1.1 Physical installation of the sensors
IMPORTANT: 01457 and 01458 type sensors must be installed by facing the side on which the
distinctive label is glued towards the fiscal meter or the meter associated with generation.
FG
FM
Y O ND
CTR AT. PE
P
A
45
PA38
DATE 32N
CO L
DE
3.1.1.2 Setting the sensors on devices art. 01455 and 01450
IMPORTANT: When you install a sensor in art. 01455 and 01450 (new installation or replacement of an existing one), you must associate the device that is to use this sensor with the
characteristic parameter shown on the label; the procedure is as follows.
• Physically connect the sensor to the input S1, S2 or S3 of the device (art. 01455 or 01450)
• Setup  Configuration  Groups  Power management  Load control* or Measurement
control**  Select the desired metering functional unit  Device parameters  Sensor setting
- select the type of sensor (01457, 01458)  Set
- enter the “calibration” value (in the example shown in the figure, this value is 123) specified on the
sensor label  Set
Lastly select Save and the control panel will return to the menu Device parameters
* If the functional unit belongs to a Load Control group
** If the functional unit belongs to a Measurement Control group
3.1.2 Setting the trigger thresholds
After configuring the load control module 01455 and, where applicable, the power meter 01450, you need to
set the system's trigger thresholds and response times.
In the case of systems with an electronic meter with a domestic contract, set the parameters (referring to the
values stated in the contract) as shown in the following example.
257
Load control
Assuming you have a supply with the following characteristics:
• single-phase system
• nominal contract power: 3 kW; a level of power 10% higher than the nominal contract power can be consumed for an unlimited period (3.3 kW in this case);
• maximum power usable for a limited period: 4.2 kW;
• maximum period for which maximum power can be used: 3 hours.
You can set the values in the By-me control panel:
• first threshold: 3.2 kW;
• second threshold at the maximum power value: 4.1 kW;
• validity period for the second threshold: 90 minutes.
IMPORTANT: If the meter is electronic, the contract thresholds must always be checked with the electricity supplier.
CAUTION: If in doubt, check the values by contacting the customer assistance service of your electricity provider.
To compensate for any potential measurement errors and synchronization between the load control logic and the
fiscal meter, the value of each of the two thresholds must be less than the threshold required by the fiscal meter
 Single-phase system
To set the thresholds for controlling the power consumed and the threshold time, follow the procedure below:
Power management  Load control  Setup  Setting thresholds
Select the threshold (Threshold 1 [kW], Threshold 2 [kW]) that you want to set and enter the desired value;
confirm with Set and at the end of the operation touch
Save.
The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
In a similar manner the Threshold time is set too; enter the desired value and confirm with Set  Save
Note: After the Set step, entering the desired value can condition also the other power setup fields, automatically setting the minimum value.
If you want to zero out the operation time, set Threshold 1= Threshold 2.
 Three-phase system
To set the thresholds for controlling the power consumed and the threshold time for the entire system, follow
the procedure below:
Power management  Load control  Setup  Setting thresholds  Global threshold
Select the threshold (Threshold 1 [kW], Threshold 2 [kW]) that you want to set and enter the desired value;
confirm with Set and at the end of the operation touch
Save.
The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
258
Load control
In a similar manner the Threshold time is set too; enter the desired value and confirm with Set  Save
Note: After the Set step, entering the desired value can condition also the other power setup fields, automatically setting the minimum value.
To set thresholds for the single lines of the three-phase system, first select the desired line:
Power management  Load control  Setup  Setting thresholds  Threshold line 1
or
Power management  Load control  Setup  Setting thresholds  Threshold line 2
or
Power management  Load control  Setup  Setting thresholds  Threshold line 3
Lastly set the desired threshold values and confirm with Set  Save
Important: If the values of “Threshold 1”, “Threshold 2 and “Threshold Time” have been set, as soon as the
consumed power exceeds “Threshold 1” (P > Threshold 1) the sensor is able to ensure absorption up to a
value of “Threshold 2” for a time equal to the “Threshold Time” and disconnecting any loads (according to the
set priorities) to bring the consumed power back to a lower value than “Threshold 2” (P < Threshold 2).
After the “Threshold Time” the maximum power that can be drawn is limited to the value of “Threshold 1” for
the set time (P < Threshold 1) disconnecting any loads (according to the priorities); at the end of the "Threshold
Time" the cycle starts again.
If you want to zero out the operation time, set Threshold 1= Threshold 2.
The diagram below illustrates an example of how the loads get disconnected according to the set thresholds
and threshold times.
KW
LOAD CONTROL TRIGGERS
+ P1: WASHING MACHINE
(+ 1500 W)
+ P2: OVEN (+ 1000 W)
LOAD CONTROL
TRIGGERS -P2: OVEN
(- 1000 W)
THRESHOLD 2
LOAD CONTROL TRIGGERS + P1: WASHING MACHINE (+ 1500 W)
P1: WASHING MACHINE
(1500 W)
P2: OVEN
(1000 W)
THRESHOLD 1
LOAD CONTROL TRIGGERS - P1: WASHING MACHINE (- 1500 W)
Tint<2
Ts2
Ts2
Ts2
Ts2
ABSORPTION
DECREASES (1700 W
BELOW THRESHOLD 1)
Ts2
min
259
Load control
3.1.3 Creating control groups
The Load Control system command groups are the groups that contain the actuators that supply the various
loads that you want to control.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Power management  Load control  Select one of the groups
from “Relay 01” to “Relay 16”  Associated devices  Add
Within a control group you need to configure a By-me relay actuator and a functional unit governing the load
control module (to configure one, after the first configuration of the module, simply press the configuration
button again to activate the usual procedure from the selected group).
Each group can also contain a rocker switch, which can be used to force the group relay(s) to ON, irrespective
of the priority set in the load conditions.
N.B.
• In the Load Control group it is essential to configure module 01455 so it can be displayed on the control
panel.
• The load must be connected on terminal C-NO of the relay actuator.
Appliances such as refrigerators or freezers, which need to be powered continuously, must be connected to uncontrolled power outlets.
For other devices, set a priority value of 1 (the highest) for the more important loads (these will be
disconnected last), and higher priority number for the loads to be disconnected first.
Press the configuration buttons of the load control module 01455, of the relay actuator governing the oven
and if necessary add a button for forcing.
3.1.4 Priority settings.
To set or modify the priority value of a group, follow the procedure below:
Power management  Load control  Setup  Priority settings  Scroll through
of configured load groups and select the desired one
the list
Select the priority from among the ones available (from P1 to P16) and then confirm with Set.
Note: In the case of a three-phase system with loads associated with more than one line, the logic of the
device 01455 can trigger cutting off a higher-priority load than another load; the priority is unique for all the
lines and the logic switches it off due to overload on a line always starting with the load with the lowest priority.
Lastly save the settings with Save; the control panel will confirm the operation.
CAUTION!
• When creating groups, the control panel assigns priority 1 (P1) to the first group, 2 (P2) to the second
group and so on; it is however possible to change the values of the priorities at any time.
• The priorities of the groups must be different from each other. If two or more groups are incorrectly
configured at the same priority level, the Load Control device will determine the priority according
to the group number (the lowest value will have the highest priority).
260
Load control
3.1.5 Displaying the level of power consumed.
With the control panel you can at any time view the instantaneous power consumed by the system. Furthermore, if the system is also monitoring a production plant, the instantaneous power generated in the system will
be displayed. The consumption value displayed in the middle corresponds to the actual consumption
of the system, regardless of the actual values ​​of any production.
Main menu  Power management  Load control
Load control
Consumption:
Generation:
Back
12:00
KW
10.2
10.2 KW
Setup
The control panel displays the power in kW; to display load status and modify operation, tap
Setup 
Operation
3.1.6 Configuring a load cut-out signalling relay
The load control module can be associated with relays to signal whether one or more loads have been disconnected according to the set priorities.
The relay can be configured in the "Provider 01" group if you want to signal any load being cut off on any line
(in the case of a three-phase system).
It is also possible to associate the relay with the "Line 1” or “Line 2” or “Line 3" groups to have the cut-off of
one of the groups belonging to the single line signalled.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Power management  Load control  Select the desired group
 Associated devices  Add
3.1.7 Programming by time slots
The By-me system Load Control function can be used to manage loads during certain times of the day, i.e.
to set the time slots during which one or more of the 16 groups dedicated to load control will be activated or
switched off. To do this it is necessary to create a specific weekly time programme indicating at what times of
the various days of the week the loads must be in Forced OFF mode and in which the control must be of the
type Auto OFF/ON. The weekly time program must have no input group; one or two load control groups must
be selected for the program output.
3.1.8 Load operation control.
The load control management mode can be decided for each group by selecting Automatic, Forced ON and
Forced OFF.
• Automatic: The load is disconnected automatically depending on the priority assigned and reconnected
automatically when the power consumption falls below the set threshold;
• Forced ON: The power outlet is always supplied.
• Forced OFF: The power outlet is never supplied;
Tapping
Power management  Load control  Setup  Operation displays the state of the loads
and allows you to change their operation.
261
Load control
By selecting the desired load, it is possible to set the type of management to carry out (Automatic, Forced
ON and Forced OFF).
3.2 Measurement control
With the Measurement Control function you can use up to 20 By-me groups to configure 01450, 01451,
01452 power meters to monitor the consumption of lines, single loads and meters with pulse outputs; on
By-me touch screens and web servers, in addition to the instantaneous values, you can then also view the
historical consumption trend. For more details please refer to the relevant user manuals.
On each group you can configure a single functional unit for measuring or pulse counting.
New groups are created and devices added with the usual procedures described in the Configuration menu.
In a single-phase system with no generation it is possible to use the current sensors 2 and 3 of the load control
module 01455 or, in the a single-phase system with local generation, only the current sensor 3 (in this case
the sensor 2 is used for the generation).
In a single-phase system with no local generation there is the advantage of being able to configure the Meter
3 of the load control module and where applicable Meter 2. This allows you to have one or two "auxiliary
measurements" to see the power of any load to be monitored without being obliged to buy an additional
measuring device.
The products that can be configured in the measurement control groups are the following:
• POWER METER art. 01450
To configure press:
-once on the device configuration button to configure the functional unit linked with line 1 (S1)
-twice on the device configuration button to configure the functional unit linked with line 2 (S2)
-three times on the device configuration button to configure the functional unit linked with line 3 (S3)
CAUTION: You cannot configure a functional unit if it is already used to control loads.
N.B. Configuration of the meter 01450 can take up to a minute.
• ACTUATOR WITH CURRENT SENSOR art. 01456, 20537-19537-14537
To configure the actuator measurement functional unit press the device configuration button twice.
• POWER METER WITH BUILT-IN CURRENT SENSOR art. 01451
To configure the actuator measurement functional unit press the device configuration button once.
• PULSE COUNTER INTERFACE art. 01452
To configure the actuator measurement functional unit press the device configuration button once.
When the above-listed devices have been configured via the menu:
Power management  Measurement control
On selecting the desired group you can see:
- the instantaneous power (in the case of meters on products 01450, 01451, 01456, 20537-19537-14537)
- the value of the measured variable (in the case of the pulse counter 01452).
262
Load control
3.3 Alarm control
With this menu you can view the alarms associated with each measuring group and if necessary reset the
leakage alarm on those devices that support it.
Main Menu  Power management  Alarm control  Select the desired group  Select the device
 Select the alarm  Reset
Power
management
Power
management
Load
control
Load
control
Power
management
Power
management
Measurement
control
Measurement
Load
controlcontrol
Load
control
Alarm
control
Alarm
control
Measurement
control
Measurement
control
Alarm
control
Alarm
control
Back
Back
Back
Back
Alarm
control
Alarm
control
Alarm
control
Alarm
--No
group
--Nocontrol
group
80No
Stair
light
80
Stair
light
--No
group
--group
Washing
machine
380
Washing
machine
80Stair
Stair
light
80380
light
381
Oven machine
381
Oven
380
Washing
machine
380
Washing
381Oven
Oven
Back
381
Back
Back
Back
Associated
relay
Associated
relay
0x2202Smart
Smart
relay
0x2202
relay
Associated
relay
Associated
relay
0x2205Smart
Diagnostic
smart
0x2205
Diagnostic
smart
relrel
0x2202
Smart
relay
0x2202
relay
0x2205Diagnostic
Diagnostic
smart
0x2205
smart
relrel
Diagnostic
smart
realy
Diagnostic
smart
realy
OKOK
Load
failure
Load
failure
Diagnostic
smart
realy
Diagnostic
smart
realy
Current
leakage
Current
leakage
OKOK
Load
failure
Load
failure
Current
leakage
Current
leakage
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Back
Reset
Reset
Reset
Reset
3.4 Device parameters
For each of the devices, the settings that can be configured directly by the control panel are as follows:
• POWER METER art. 01450

Measurement refresh duration: time interval during which the power meter sends the power values to
​​
a display device (such as a touch screen) with a frequency equal to the set “Measurement refresh frequency”. Values can be set from 20 to 120 s.

Measurement refresh frequency: frequency with which the power meter, during the “Measurement
refresh duration” time interval, sends the power values of
​​ the display device (such as a touch screen).
Values can be set from 1 to 10 s.

Reset value: allows you to set the initial value of the measured power which will then be updated as time
passes.

Sensor setting: displays a screen that allows you to set:
- the Type of sensor  Select the article code number for the sensor (for instance, art. 01457)
- the Calibration  Enter the value shown on the sensor's label (for instance, 40E)
Confirm with Set and save with Save.
• SINGLE LOAD CONSUMPTION METER art. 01451

Measurement refresh duration: time interval during which the power meter sends the power values to
​​
a display device (such as a touch screen) with a frequency equal to the set “Measurement refresh frequency”. Values can be set from 20 to 120 s.
263
Load control

Measurement refresh frequency: frequency with which the power meter, during the “Measurement
refresh duration” time interval, sends the power values ​​of the display device (such as a touch screen).
Values can be set from 1 to 10 s.

Reset value: allows you to set the initial value of the measured power which will then be updated as time
passes.
• PULSE COUNTER INTERFACE art. 01452

Divider: typical pulse generator parameter. Values can be set from 1 to 65535.

Multiplier: typical pulse generator parameter. Values can be set from 1 to 65535.
Minimum
Variable:
pulse duration: minimum detectable pulse duration. Values can be set from 2 to 250 ms.
used to select the physical variable to measure (water, gas, etc.).
Reset
value: used to set the initial value to which the Pulse Counter Interface 01452 adds the number of
the following pulses it has detected.
• LOAD CONTROL MODULE art. 01455

Load cut-off priority: enables setting the priority and therefore the order with which control groups are to
be cut off. Values can be set from P1 to P16 (all different from each other).

Cut-off thresholds/Single line thresholds: two thresholds S1 and S2 (with S2 greater than or equal to
S1) for the entire system and two thresholds for the single line. These are the reference levels for the power
consumption that determine cutting off loads; they must be configured according to the characteristics of
the supply contract. Values that can be set:
- S1: from 2.0 to 135.0 kW.
- S2: from 2.0 to 150.0 kW.

Highest threshold validity time (and on the single line): reference time for the validity of the highest
threshold used for cutting off loads; it must be configured according to the characteristics of the supply
contract. Values can be set from 20 to 200 min.

Measurement refresh duration: time interval during which the power meter sends the power values ​​to
a display device (such as a touch screen) with a frequency equal to the set “Measurement refresh frequency”. Values can be set from 20 to 120 s.

Measurement refresh frequency: frequency with which the power meter, during the “Measurement
refresh duration” time interval, sends the power values ​​of the display device (such as a touch screen).
Values can be set from 1 to 10 s.

Associated lines: line to which the load you want to control is connected.

Generation Threshold: minimum threshold of net power generated (that is in excess of the power consumed) above which it is possible to power the load. Values can be set from 0 (can always be activated)
to 33.0 kW.
N.B. By properly configuring this parameter you can optimize power management from the perspective of auto-consumption.
It is advisable to use this feature by linking it to the value of the Minimum switch-on time parameter. In
this way, the load control logic will allow switching on the load only with the set generated power and, even
if it should then drop, it will keep the load in operation according to the set minimum time. Throughout this
time, however, the overload shutdown control will remain active.
264
Load control
 Minimum switch-on time: the load, once switched on, must remain ON for the Minimum switch-on time.
Values can be set from 0 to 300 min.

Minimum switch-off time: the load, once switched off, must remain OFF for the Minimum switch-off
time. Values can be set from 0 to 300 min.
• RELAY ACTUATOR art. 01456

Failure alarm mode: used to enable the failure alarm. Values that can be set: 0 = alarm disabled, 1 =
alarm enabled.
Note: The failure alarm must only be enabled on actuators to which are connected loads that have a constant minimum consumption; otherwise, there would be the risk of false alarms due to a load that does not
consume not because of failure but because its ON operation is not always constant.

Failure alarm threshold: minimum power value below which a failure alarm is signalled. Values can be
set from 0 to 100 Watts.

Mode: actuator operating mode that can be selected from Monostable (return to OFF after ON duration
seconds) or Bistable (state change with external command). Values that can be set: 0 = Bistable, 1 =
Monostable.

Leakage alarm mode: leakage alarm operating mode. Settable values 0 = Alarm Disabled and reset, 1 =
Alarm Enabled, i.e. the actuator status is constrained to the value of Auto OFF.

Leakage alarm threshold: minimum leaked current value above which there is a “current leakage” alarm
signal. Values can be set from 0 to 50 mA.

ON delay: delay in activating the ON command. During the ON delay standby phases, a command that
maintains this status resets the meters while an opposite command has no effect on meter initialization.
Values can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

OFF delay: delay in activating the OFF command. During the OFF delay standby phases, a command
that maintains this status resets the meters while an opposite command has no effect on meter initialization. Values can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

ON duration: time for which the device is on; at the end of the set time the device switches off and sends
the information on its status. It should only be taken into account on actions concerning theTimedStartStop and DimmingInput commands that determine the MONOSTABLE behaviour of the actuator. Values
can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

Auto off: Enables or disables the device's relay automatic switch-off feature in the event of a leakage
alarm; it is constrained by Leakage alarm mode=1. Values that can be set: 0=Auto off disabled, 1= Auto
off enabled.

Scenario delay: delay in actuating the scenario. Values can be set from 0 to 10 s.
Note: This parameter is used when in actuating a scenario there is to be the simultaneous activation of
different actuators. To avoid a high inrush current due to switching on multiple devices simultaneously, the
actuators are activated in rapid sequence, each with a default delay time (Scenario Delay) after receiving
the command; the entire activation sequence can then take up to approximately 1 hour and 50 minutes.
During the standby phase PAR_ScenarioDelay, receiving a group command, type SwitchOnOff, DimmingInput, TimedStartStop, resets the meter inhibiting activation of the scenario.
265
Load control
• ACTUATOR WITH RELAY OUTPUT art. 20537-19537-14537

Failure alarm mode: used to enable the failure alarm. Values that can be set: 0 = alarm disabled, 1 =
alarm enabled.
Note: The failure alarm must only be enabled on actuators to which are connected loads that have a constant minimum consumption; otherwise, there would be the risk of false alarms due to a load that does not
consume not because of failure but because its ON operation is not always constant.

Failure alarm threshold: minimum power value below which a failure alarm is signalled. Values can be
set from 0 to 100 Watts.

Mode: actuator operating mode that can be selected from Monostable (return to OFF after ON duration
seconds) or Bistable (state change with external command). Values that can be set: 0 = Bistable, 1 =
Monostable.

ON delay: delay in activating the ON command. During the ON delay standby phases, a command that
maintains this status resets the meters while an opposite command has no effect on meter initialization.
Values can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

OFF delay: delay in activating the OFF command. During the OFF delay standby phases, a command
that maintains this status resets the meters while an opposite command has no effect on meter initialization. Values can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

ON duration: time for which the device is on; at the end of the set time the device switches off and sends
the information on its status. It should only be taken into account on actions concerning theTimedStartStop and DimmingInput commands that determine the MONOSTABLE behaviour of the actuator. Values
can be set from 0 to 11h 59min 59s.

Scenario delay: delay in actuating the scenario. Values can be set from 0 to 10 s.
Note: This parameter is used when in actuating a scenario there is to be the simultaneous activation of
different actuators. To avoid a high inrush current due to switching on multiple devices simultaneously, the
actuators are activated in rapid sequence, each with a default delay time (Scenario Delay) after receiving
the command; the entire activation sequence can then take up to approximately 1 hour and 50 minutes.
During the standby phase PAR_ScenarioDelay, receiving a group command, type SwitchOnOff, DimmingInput, TimedStartStop, resets the meter inhibiting activation of the scenario.
266
Section
Tactil Devices
267
268
Table of Contents
1.General characteristics of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
2.Devices and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
3.Configuration on the controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters of the dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
269
System Features - Devices and Functions
1. General characteristics of the system
The Tactil system lets you use the, all-glass, touch controls to carry out the functions normally performed by the
rocker switches of the By-me system.
Featuring high technological content, the devices are completed with glass cover plates available in four colours
and are characterized by extreme sophistication combined with extraordinary strength.
Activation only requires a light touch that the refined technology transforms into direct power control: as soon as
they are touched, a proximity sensor detects proximity to the device and activates RGB LED backlighting integrated into the system. In addition, after pressing the button, a special beep confirms the button has been pressed.
Available in versions with 2 or 3 modules, the devices are configured on the controller or by EasyTool Professional
to implement on/off control functions, roller shutter control, light dimming, and scenario activation. They are also
equipped with bus terminals built into the device that greatly facilitate the wiring and avoid all chance of error in
the connections.
2. Devices and functions
The Tactil system consists of the following devices:
21520: Glass touch control device, 4 independently programmable buttons for managing two functional units for
single loads or scenarios, to be completed with a label and
glass touch cover plate - 2 modules.
21540: Glass touch control device, 6 independently programmable buttons for managing two functional units for
single loads or scenarios, to be completed with a label and
glass touch cover plate - 3 modules.
270
Configuration on the controller
3. Configuration on the controller
The main task to perform in order to configure the Tactil devices on the controller is to create functional groups (sets
of functional units that need to work together) to which they are assigned.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups
Automation groups or Audio groups  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured ones; tap Next to
confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group and
the zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by tapping
Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address
and number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove Group menu).
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration.
To configure the various functional units within a group, carry out the following:
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups or Audio groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Once you have chosen the group, tap
Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Press the configuration button and, where necessary, the mechanical button of the functional unit to be
included in the group.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
6. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
7. Proceed with the configuration of other functional units by repeating point 4 or tap
Back to exit.
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters.
Device parameters can be set and/or modified in order to customize operation to adapt the system to the various installation requirements.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups or Audio groups  Select the group by scrolling
through the list
 Associated devices  Select the functional unit by scrolling
through the list  Device parameters
271
Opzioni
Dispositivi associati
Informazione gruppo
Modifica nome
Rimuovi gruppo
Back
Device parameters
Associated devices
0x001C right Dimmer
0xAFC1 Taste 01
0x0123 IR Sensor
Back
0x001C right Dimmer
0xAFC1 Taste 01
0x0123 IR Sensor
Esc
Back
1
2
1
Add
right Dimmer
1
2
1
Add
Device parameters
Remove device
Back
Esc
• Possible controls
- Switch on/off
- Adjust/change
brightness
right Dimmer
- Roller shutter control
- Call
up scenario
Device
parameters
- Power
on/offdevice
and adjust volume, change tracks, sleep and audio monitoring (if configured in an audio group)
Remove
• Operating
Back parameters
Esc
- LED colour
- Touch sensitivity (High or Low)
- Standby
LED (Off or On)
Velocità
Norm...
- Buzzer
activation
(Off or On)
Valore accensione
25%
Durata accensione
>
Device
parameters 00:
Durata spegnimento
Operating
On/Off
Other
>
Back
Tap
More to view the next list of parameters.
Other
LED colour
Touch sensitivity
Standby LED
Buzzer activation
Back
272
Save
>
Low
Off
Off
Save
Device parameters
3.2.1 LED Colour
This parameter allows you to set the colour of the LEDs with a list of 7 possible colours (Red, Green, Blue,
Amber, White, Cyan, Magenta) or select the RGB coordinates.
Tap
LED Colour and select the colour for the LEDs of the device.
Other
LED Colour
Touch sensitivity
StandBy LED
Back
LED Colour
Amber
>
Low
Off
Save
Back
Save
LED Colour
RGB Colour
Red
Green
Back
Tap
Save
Save to confirm.
3.2.2 Touch Sensitivity
This parameter is used to increase or decrease the device's touch sensitivity, that is the degree of pressure
required to implement a command.
Select the sensitivity and tap
Save to confirm.
3.2.3 Standby LED
This parameter lets you set the brightness of the LEDs on the device (off or on low light) when it is on standby.
Select the brightness and tap
Save to confirm.
3.2.4 Buzzer Activation
This parameter allows you to enable/disable audible confirmation on pressing the button on the device.
Select the desired setting and tap
Save to confirm.
273
274
Section
Temperature control
275
276
Table of Contents
1. General features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
2. Devices and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
3. Configuration on the controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Configuration of the climate controller for heating systems 01465. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Configuration of proportional analogue 4-output actuator 01466. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Configuration of device with 3 analogue signal inputs 01467. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Configuration of thermostat 02951. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Configuration of temperature probe 20538-19538-14538. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.6 Configuration of IR interface 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Test procedure for the climate controller 01465. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
282
283
288
289
290
290
290
294
307
4. Air-conditioning control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Setting the speed of the fan coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Forced switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Setting the automatic program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Setting the temperature levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
306
307
307
308
308
308
5. Examples of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 PIPE FLOOR HEATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIATORS + AIR-CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPORTIONAL RADIATORS + AIR-CON (VIA SPLIT IR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPORTIONAL RADIATORS + AIR-CON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPE FANCOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPE FANCOIL + RADIATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPE FANCOIL WITH NEUTRAL ZONE FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPE FANCOIL + 4 FLOOR HEATING PIPES (HEATING + COOLING). . . . . .
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPE FANCOIL + FLOOR HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIRCON WITH HEAT PUMP (VIA THE SAME SPLIT IR DEVICE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTEGRATION METHODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
310
311
312
314
316
318
320
322
324
326
328
330
6. Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Zone management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Zone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
333
334
340
341
277
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics
The By-me temperature control devices allow full control of the climate in every field of application (residential and
tertiary) as they are used to manage even complex temperature control systems. The implementable solutions
include heating and air conditioning of buildings with two or four pipes (with neutral zone management, where
applicable), with underfloor heating and radiators, fan-coils and split/multi-split systems; the systems can be managed in On/Off mode or with proportional control.
In rooms with underfloor heating, with high thermal inertia which does not permit sudden variations in temperature,
the innovative thermostat function termed “boost” or “auxiliary heating/air-conditioning” automatically starts any
fan-coils or towel heaters to quickly reach the desired climate comfort.
Special sensors monitor ambient humidity, to start the air recirculation or dehumidifiers; with underfloor cooling
systems, it is also possible to prevent the formation of condensation, by modifying the boiler flow temperature.
278
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The devices that enable the temperature control functions are as follows:
01465: Climate control device for heating systems, power supply 120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz, 3 inputs for PT100, PT1000 and NTC
probes, 1 mixer valve control output, 1 output 0-10 V or (0)4-20
mA, 1 change-over relay output 8 A 230 V~, installation on DIN
rails (60715 TH35), occupies 6 modules size 17.5 mm
The climate control of heating systems manages the temperature
control of the flow water in heating and cooling systems, if required
also managing the outdoor ambient temperature. It has an On/Off
output for circulation pump and a proportional output for the valve. It
can also be used to prevent dew point (condensation) in floor cooling
systems, combined with the humidity sensor (and analogue interface)
01466: Actuator with 4 proportional analogue outputs (0)4-20
mA or 0-10 V with re-scalable maximum output voltage or current, power supply 120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz, By-me home automation, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules
size 17.5 mm.
The device, with the function of a proportional actuator, enables controlling/adjusting the degree of opening of the proportional motorized
valves that accept variable control signals for voltage (eg. 0-10 V) or
current (eg. 4-20 mA). It can control
up to 4 independent loads.
01467: Device with 3 analogue signal inputs, 1 input 0-10 V or
4-20 mA, 1 input for linear or recess mounting NTC temperature
sensor, 1 input for brightness sensor 01530, for By-me home
automation, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35), occupies 2
modules size 17.5 mm
The device has 3 inputs, divided as follows: 1 input for voltage sensor
0-10 V or current sensor 0-20 mA, 1 input for flush-mounting or wired
NTC temperature sensor and 1 input for brightness sensor (01530).
The first input can be for voltage or current, and the selection is made
only during the configuration phase. This lets you connect By-me
devices with any probe with a standard voltage or current output. The
inputs for the temperature or brightness sensor exclusively support
only Vimar sensors. The brightness sensor provides energy savings
because it lets you adjust the artificial light when there is sufficient
natural light to reach the desired level, when fitted with a universal
dimmer.
279
Devices and functions
01468: Unit for implementing logic, mathematical, timing and
messaging functions, installation on DIN rails (60715 TH35),
for By-me home automation, configurable only with EasyTool
Professional, occupies 1 module size 17.5 mm
The Logic Unit enables logic functions within a By-me system.
These logic elements are defined with EasyTool Professional, with a
graphic interface dedicated to the Logic Unit, and then transferred
to the device via USB to become operational. For a detailed list of
usable logic elements, function blocks of various kinds (delays, logic
functions, mathematical functions, timing, etc.), and By-me blocks
available for configuring the Logic Unit, see the EasyTool Professional
manual.
02951: Thermostat for home automation touch screen with ON/
OFF and PID temperature controls (heating and conditioning), 2
and 4 pipe system management, 3-speed and proportional fancoil control, 1 input for wired or flush-mounted NTC temperature
sensor, RGB LED backlighting, to be completed with Eikon Evo,
Eikon, Arké or Plana - 2 module cover plates
The thermostat is integrated with the By-me home automation system for temperature control in 2 or 4 pipe systems (heating/conditioning) and neutral zone (4 pipe systems only), with “boost” function to
run a second source to reach the desired thermal comfort quicker.
The thermostat has an RGB back-lit display with 4 capacitive keys
to control the temperature set-point, fan coil speed and thermostat
operation mode configuration; the display colour is adjusted from the
controller (21509) or EasyTool Professional software. The thermostat
is a universal device with 2 modules, available in white and anthracite
finish, in the Eikon, Arkè and Plana series.
20433-19433-14433: Electronic active humidity sensor, 1 output
0-10 V or 4-20 mA, power supply 12/24V - 2 modules. Can be
integrated with the By-me home automation system via 01467.
This device measures the relative humidity of the air in the room
where it is installed and transmits the information via an analogue
signal in voltage 0-10V or current 4-20 mA.
Integration with the By-me system requires the combination with
the analogue input of art. 01467 and a configuration on the display
devices.
280
Devices and functions
20538-19538-14538: Temperature probe for ON/OFF and PID
temperature control (heating and conditioning), 2 and 4 pipe
system management, 3-speed and proportional fan-coil control,
1 input for flush-mounting or wired NTC temperature sensor, for
By-me home automation.
In addition to all the display functions, the device is similar to the
thermostat 02951 and is used for temperature control in 2 or 4 pipe
systems (heating/conditioning) and neutral zone (4 pipe systems
only), with “boost” function to run a second source to reach the
desired thermal comfort quicker.
20584.1-19584.1-14584.1: Interface for transmission of By-me
commands to IR receiver, for By-me home automation system,
complete with 3 m cable.
The IR interface enables audio sources (combo stereo, CD, DVD
players, etc.) or split units to be controlled by learning and emulating
the commands of the original remote control of the target appliances. Paired with an RCA transmitter (art. 20582-19582-14582) it
then allows having sound sources controlled directly by the By-me
system. Associated to the thermostats, touch screens, video door
entry units and the web server, it controls splits manually or via scenarios and events. The extension lead for the IR control is supplied
as standard.
281
Configuration on the controller
3. Configuration on the controller
The main task to perform in order to configure the temperature control devices on the controller is to create functional groups (sets of functional units that need to work together) to which they are assigned.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups
Climate  Create group  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group (40-373) that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured ones;
touch Next to confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group and
the zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by touching Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address
and number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove Group menu).
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration.
To configure the various functional units within a group, carry out the following:
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Climate
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Once you have chosen the group, tap
Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Press the configuration button of the functional unit to be included in the group.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
6. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
7. Proceed with the configuration of other functional units by repeating point 4 or tap
Backto exit.
IMPORTANT: The temperature control devices illustrated in this section have group 1 depth: they can
therefore be configured only in one group.
The scenarios and relative datapoints on the other hand have 4-group depth.
N.B. All the devices described in this section are not present in the Zone Management menu; they will only
view the thermostats Eikon 20513-20514, Arké 19513-19514, Idea 16953-16954 and Plana 14513-14514.
282
Configuration on the controller
3.1.1 Configuration of the climate controller for heating systems 01465
The climate controller is composed of:
• A Main functional unit (that must be configured first in a group dedicated to it).
• A Circulation pump functional unit (which must be configured in each group containing the Output functional
blocks of the various thermostats).
• An External temperature functional unit.
• An Auxiliary temperature functional unit.
• A Humidity functional unit (employed to use the “anti-condensation” function).
Configuration of the Main functional unit
Climate controller
FB_Controller
Climate controller zone
Create a Climate control group (empty) and add the climate controller (which is not yet configured) by pressing
the configuration button; the control unit displays the corresponding menu:
 Select the “Heating” or “Air-conditioning”mode and set the type selecting among the following options:
a) Off: switches off the mode
b) Fixed: the delivery temperature (T2), for both heating and conditioning is kept constant at the value set in
the set-point. In this mode the external probe is not required.
c) Modulating (climatic): the delivery temperature (T2) is controlled according to the external temperature and
the correction factor K according to the ratio:
Delivery T = Setpoint + K x (Setpoint - External T)
The Setpoint and External T values are estimated during the installation and is essential to give a limit to the
Delivery T. An example of approach is as follows:
- Assuming to have an underfloor heating system, it is necessary to ensure that the temperature of the water
circulating inside the tubes is not too high.
- So the delivery temperature limit set is: 35°C.
- Then an estimate on what could be the most unfavourable condition for the system is carried out (i.e. the
condition in which it is necessary to warm the environment very much); then it is assumed that the Texternal
rarely falls below 0°C and the set point set by the user does not exceed 20°C almost never.
- Using the above relation, the limit case estimated is 35°C = 20°C + K x (20°C - 0°C) which produces that K
= 0.75 (in the control unit it should be set rounded to the nearest value to one decimal place).
With the K just determined, if the External T is always greater than or equal to 0°C and the setpoint is
always less than or equal to 20°C, the Delivery T will never exceed 35°C.
For details on the correction factor K, see chap. 3.2 at sections Air-conditioning correction factor and
Heating correction factor.
 Select the type of valve “Open/close” or “Proportional.
If Proportional is selected it is necessary to set the type of output “Voltage” or “Current”.
Touch
Next to confirm.
283
Configuration on the controller
Configuration of the Circulation pump functional unit
The circulation pump unit can be configured:
- in groups where the output functional units of the thermostats 02951 are configured;
- in groups where the temperature probes 20538-19538-14538 are configured;
- in groups where the thermostats 20514-19514-16954-14514 are installed.
Zone 1
Thermostat
Climate controller
FB_Thermostat
FB_Controller
FB_Output 1
FB_CirculationPump
Climate Controller zone
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_Output 4
Thermostat
Zone 2
FB_Thermostat
FB_Output 1
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_Output 4
It will be therefore necessary to enter the desired group and add the climate controller pressing the configuration
button once; then the control unit automatically enlists the Circulation pump functional unit.
N.B. This procedure is effective provided that at least the main functional unit has already been previously
configured.
284
Configuration on the controller
Configuring the External Temperature functional unit
This functional unit can be used when one of the two modes, Heating or Air-conditioning, is set as Modulating.
The unit can be configured:
- integrating it in a group where there is the NTC functional unit of a 3 input device 01467 (the climate controller
will receive the temperature value from the By-me bus as shown in the following figure);
- in a group dedicated to it (the climate controller will send on the By-me bus the temperature read by T1);
- in the same group of the Main functional unit (in this case it will provide only the external temperature value to
be displayed in a touch screen, etc.).
Thermostat
Climate controller
FB_Thermostat
FB_Controller
FB_Output 1
FB_CirculationPump
3 inputs
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_ExternalTemp
FB_NTC
FB_Output 4
Thermostat
FB_Thermostat
FB_Output 1
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_Output 4
It will be therefore necessary to enter the desired group and add the climate controller pressing the configuration
button once; the control unit automatically enlists the External Temperature functional unit.
285
Configuration on the controller
N.B.: When an External Temperature functional unit is configured in a dedicated group and this unit is the first
to be configured (i.e., the group was empty), the controller (which has the probe physically connected at its
terminals) is able to provide the external temperature to other regulators 01465; to do this, just set up later in
the same group all the External Temperature units of the other regulators and they will use the measurement.
The configuration in empty groups of a climate controller that has the Main functional unit configured but the
External Temperature and Auxiliary Temperature functional units that are not, activates the request in the control
unit whether to configure or not these units; if the operator chooses to continue, the configuration proceeds
automatically without displaying additional requests.
Configuring the Auxiliary Temperature functional unit (T3)
The Auxiliary Temperature unit can be configured:
- in a dedicated group (empty group) to simply provide a temperature value to be displayed (for example in a
touch screen);
- within the group where there is the main functional unit and therefore the T3 input is used as Shut-down alarm
input (for notification of a shut-down alarm of the climate controller). See the following figure:
Thermostat
Climate controller
FB_Thermostat
FB_Controller
FB_Output 1
FB_CirculationPump
3 inputs
FB_Output 2
FB_ExternalTemp
FB_Output 3
FB_AuxiliaryTemp
FB_Output 4
Thermostat
FB_Thermostat
FB_Output 1
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_Output 4
286
FB_NTC
Configuration on the controller
To add the Auxiliary Temperature functional unit of the climate controller to the desired group, simply press the
configuration button once.
N.B.: The configuration in empty groups of a climate controller that has the Main functional unit configured
but the External Temperature and Auxiliary Temperature functional units that are not, activates the request in
the control unit whether to configure or not these units; if the operator chooses to continue, the configuration proceeds automatically without displaying additional requests.
Configuring the Humidity functional unit
This functional unit is used when it is required to use the anti-condensation function of the regulator in the case
of air conditioning system. The unit must be configured in a group in which there is the general Analogue input
function block of a 3 input device 01467 previously set as Humidity sensor xx433.
Thermostat
Climate controller
FB_Thermostat
FB_Controller
FB_Output 1
FB_CirculationPump
FB_Output 2
FB_ExternalTemp
FB_Output 3
FB_AuxiliaryTemp
FB_Output 4
FB_Humidity
3 inputs
FB_VI_Humidity
FB_NTC
Thermostat
FB_Thermostat
FB_Output 1
FB_Output 2
FB_Output 3
FB_Output 4
287
Configuration on the controller
The anti-condensation function intervenes only in the air conditioning controller mode and it limits the value
of the delivery temperature so that condensation does not develop in the environment; the calculation of the
delivery temperature limit varies depending on the work mode:
- modulating work mode: the temperature limit is determined according to the desired temperature and the
percentage of humidity detected.
- fixed work mode: the temperature limit is determined only as a function of the percentage of humidity detected
as shown in the following table.
Humidity [%]
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
Temperature
[°C]
8.0
10.2
12.2
14.1
15.7
17.2
18.6
19.9
21.1
22.2
22.3
24.3
25.2
26.1
IMPORTANT: This function can not guarantee that no condensation forms in systems with underfloor or radiant
panels cooling if they are subjected to sudden temperature changes (e.g. prolonged opening of a window, or
starting the air conditioning in the presence of high ambient temperature and humidity); the high thermal inertia
of such systems in fact, does not allow in any case to avoid condensation if not accompanied by an adequate
dehumidification system.
Note on automatic programmes:
The temperature values that are assigned by default to the automatic programmes are: T1-heating = 15°C,
T2-heating = 18°C, T3-heating = 20°C, T1-air conditioning = 26°C, T2-air conditioning = 28°C, T3-air conditioning = 30°C.
If in case of fixed work mode these values are obviously conservative and the installer will set them to the values
appropriate to the delivery setpoint temperature.
3.1.2 Configuration of proportional analogue 4-output actuator 01466
Configuration of a temperature control application
After pressing the device configuration button, the controller views the options defining the type:
Select output type Select “Voltage” or “Current”  Select characteristic  Select control polarity
“Normal” or “Inverted” Select range Select range in V or in mA or “Custom” depending on the type
Select min or max
Confirm Yes
Configuration of an automation application
Important: First configure the proportional output device and then the By-me rocker switch.
Select use “Button control” or “Extension”  Select “Voltage or Current”  Select characteristic 
Select control polarity “Normal” or “Inverted”  Select range Select range in V or mA or “Custom”
depending on the type Select min or max
Confirm Yes
• The Automation application “Button control” is used to control the proportional output from a By-me button.
• The Automation application “Extension” is used, with art.01466, to send information read by the analogue input
(art.01467) to the bus and transduce it remotely via the proportional actuator, thus assuring the extension function.
288
Configuration on the controller
V
V
3.1.3 Configuration of deviceV with 3 analogue signal inputs 01467
The device consists of 3 functional units,
A i.e.:
1. Generic analogue input
V
A
.
2. NTC (thermometer for NTC probe)
A
A
.
3. Brightness adjuster (must be configured in a group with a universal dimmer and relative buttons)
.
N.B.: The universal dimmers must be configured as White (item 20549-19549-14549 or 20137-1913714137 + 20529-19529-14529).
After configuring the dimmer to set the control set point, proceed as follows:
- set the brightness controller;
- set the dimmer controller;
- make an adjustment and wait a minute; following the ambient light change the controller should change
its output.
During configuration, to select the desired unit, press the configuration button several times until the corresponding LED comes on.
Important:
• If it is required to configure the system consisting of a 3 input device 01467 (using the functional unit 1 as an
On/Off control), by any actuator device and by a rocker device it is necessary to first configure the 3 input
device, then the actuator to associate to it and finally the rocker switch.
In case the actuator is configured first, then the 3 input device 01467 and then the rocker switch, the control
unit will not properly create the relevant group.
• If it is required to configure the system consisting of a 3 input device 01467 (using the functional unit 3), by a
universal dimmer device and by a rocker device it is necessary to first configure the 3 input device, then the
universal dimmer and finally the rocker switch.
Also in this case, if the devices sequence of configuration is reversed, the control unit will not properly create
the relevant group.
Example:
If the functional unit to configure is the Generic analogue input after pressing the device configuration button
the controller views the options defining the type:
Select sensor  Select “Humidity xx433” or “Generic”  Select use  Select “Generic Use”, “On/Off
control” or “Extension”  Select input type Select “Voltage” or “Current”  Select range Select
range in V or in mA depending on the type  Select variable  Select the variable from those proposed
 Select range Select min or max
Confirm Yes
N.B.:
- By selecting Humidity xx433 you can only connect the humidity sensor Vimar 20433-19433-14433.
- By selecting Generic you can connect any other voltage or current sensor.
- Select Generic Use only to read the input values.
289
Configuration on the controller
3.1.4 Configuration of thermostat 02951
The thermostat consists of 1 Main functional unit and 4 identical Output functional units that are configured
in the groups in which we wish to include also the actuator to control the climate control source (radiators, fancoils, etc.).
To enter the thermostat configuration mode you must:
▪ Press the areas at the top and at the bottom on the left-hand side of the display at the same time, as shown
in the following figure:
The backlighting turns red and the display shows CnF (configuration).
▪ When first pressing the areas illustrated above the Main functional unit is configured
▪ When pressed again (without resetting the device) the other Output functional units are configured, one for
each press of the button.
WARNING: The Output functional can be removed individually while removing the Main functional unit
also removes all the other currently configured Output functional units.
3.1.5 Configuration of temperature probe 20538-19538-14538
The temperature probe consists of 1 Main functional unit and 4 identical Output functional units that are
configured in the groups in which we wish to include also the actuator to control the climate control source
(radiators, fan-coils, etc.).
When the controller asks you to press the device button:
▪ When first pressing the probe configuration button the Main functional unit is configured.
▪ When pressed again (without resetting the device) the other Output functional units are configured, one for
each press of the button.
WARNING: The Output functional can be removed individually while removing the Main functional unit
also removes all the other currently configured Output functional units.
290
Configuration on the controller
3.1.6 Configuration of IR interface 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1
The device consists of 2 identical functional units.
During configuration, when pressing the device button, it is automatically associated to the functional unit that is still free.
For example, the 2 units can be associated respectively to a heating output functional unit and a thermostat
cooling output unit.
The device can be configured in the Climate menu only if in the group a thermostat Output functional unit
has already been configured.
The IR interface can be controlled from a button or from the device with 3 analogue signal inputs (art. 01467).
If there is a 3-input device 01467 and a button, the latter will be associated to the 3-input device 01467 (to enable or disable the exceeding threshold function).
The IR interface is able to save the button of an infrared remote control and repeat its operation after a By-me
command. When the interface is active the LED, if enabled on the control unit, is lit steady on green; it flashes
briefly each time a By-me command is received that involves sending IR commands.
It is possible to acquire up to 12 actions (action = repetition of an infrared remote control button) that, in the
control unit menu, are named as follows:
Action 1 (A1)
Action 2 (A2)
Action 3 (A3)
Action 4 (A4)
Action 5 (A5)
Action 6 (A6)
Action 7 (A7)
Action 8 (A8)
Action 9 (A9)
Action 10 (A10)
Action 11 (A11)
Action 12 (A12)
Operation is ensured when, starting with the actions, the following commands thus named on the control unit
are coded:
Command
Meaning
IR ON
ON control
IR OFF
OFF control
IR V1
Speed 1 control
IR V2
Speed 2 control
IR V3
Speed 3 control
Each command can be coded as the sequence of 1, 2, 3 or 4 actions and this corresponds to consecutively
pressing up to 4 buttons on the remote control of the controlled device.
Configuration
The IR interface 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1 is configured on the control unit in two phases:
1. Record button of a remote control (action)
2. Pair actions with the actual command.
291
Configuration on the controller
Creation of an action and recording the key of a remote control
Setup  Configuration  Groups  HVAC groups  Select the group in which the IR interface has
been inserted  Paired devices  Select the IR interface  Device parameters  With Action
Management  Add
Set the index of the action and select Next  Acquire action; the LED will blink.
Press the configuration button of the interface 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1; the LED will be lit steady.
Move the remote control near to the IR interface (to a distance of about 10 cm) and, within 10 s, as in normal
use, press the button you want to record.
Lastly, select Add to continue or Back and tap Save.
If acquisition is successful, the interface LED will go out; the action will then be displayed on the control unit in
the list of configured actions (A1, A2, etc.).
If the acquisition is not successful (blinking fast) carry out the following check:
- position the remote control towards the window of the IR interface at a distance of about 10 cm;
- check the condition of the batteries of the remote control and its operation;
- check that the infrared frequency of the audio device is between 30kHz and 60kHz.
As regards the remote control, you should save the buttons that are generally used for ON, OFF, V1, V2 and
V3 operations and in the table below note down the reference between the name of the memory used and the
corresponding remote control button.
Action
Remote control button
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
Action 5
Action 6
Action 7
Action 8
Action 9
Action 10
Action 11
Action 12
Modifying an action
Setup  Configuration  Groups  HVAC groups  Select the group in which the IR interface has
been inserted  Paired devices  Select the IR interface  Device parameters  Acquired actions
 Select the action to modify
292
Configuration on the controller
The available options are the following:
• Acquire action
- Press the interface configuration button and then the remote control button to be paired.
• Remove action
- Proceed to remove the action?  Yes.
The selected action is deleted and the control unit confirms the operation has concluded.
Pair actions with the actual command.
This menu is used to create the commands pairing up to 4 already recorded actions.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  HVAC groups  Select the group in which the IR interface has
been inserted  Paired devices  Select the IR interface  Device parameters  Pair commands
Select the command to pair (ON, OFF, etc.); 4 selection fields (Action 1, Action 2, Action 3 and Action 4) are
then displayed, each one of which represents an action paired with the command.
The 4 fields will show dashes if there is no paired action.
It is now possible in each field to choose any of the recorded actions; the fields are indexed from 1 to 4 that is
the order in which the actions will be performed by the command.
Lastly touch Set that causes the data to be transferred to the IR device.
Example.
Action
Remote control button
Action 1
On
Action 2
OFF
Action 3
-
Action 4
-
Action 5
-
Action 6
Speed 2
Action 7
-
Action 8
-
Action 9
-
Action 10
-
Action 11
-
Action 12
-
293
Configuration on the controller
Command
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
ON
Action 1
Action 6
None
None
OFF
Action 2
None
None
None
V1
None
None
None
None
V2
None
None
None
None
V3
None
None
None
None
In the example above note that the ON command is coded as the playback sequence of Actions 1 and 6 that
correspond to pressing the On and Speed 2 buttons of a hypothetical original remote control in sequence. The
ON operation is then paired with the actions of the 2 buttons indicated alternated by the Inter-time parameter
that causes switching on the device and selecting the speed as required for the ON command.
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters.
Device parameters can be set and/or modified in order to customize operation to adapt the system to the various installation requirements.
through the
 Configuration  Groups  Climate Select the group by scrolling
Associated
devices
Select
the
functional
unit
by
scrolling
through
the
list


 Device
Setup
list
parameters
• CLIMATE CONTROLLER FOR HEATING SYSTEMS 01465
Main functional unit and Circulation pump
294

Max. delivery temp.: Parameter for setting the maximum delivery temperature in heating.
It can also be used as a threshold for limiting the screed temperature when the delivery supplies an underfloor heating system; the screed temperature measured through the auxiliary probe is not used since,
because of the thermal dispersion, it will be less than the delivery temperature.

Min. delivery temp.: Parameter for setting the maximum delivery temperature in air-conditioning.

Minimum voltage/current adjustment value on the proportional output:
- Minimum adjustment in current 0.0 mA.
- Minimum adjustment in voltage 0.0 V.

Maximum voltage/current adjustment value on the proportional output:
- Maximum adjustment in current 20.4 mA.
- Maximum adjustment in voltage 10.2 V.

Control polarity: Is the direction in which the proportional output control is made.
- Select “Normal” and, as the % value increases, the valve opening will increase.
For example: 0%=Closed, 100%=Open
- Select “Inverted” and, as the % value increases, the valve opening will decrease.
For example: 0%=Open, 100%=Closed”

Valve in OFF position: Parameter that, if the circulation pump will be turned off, is used to set whether
the mixing valve has to be closed (0%) or placed in a desired position (1..100%); in any case, the control
algorithm is interrupted.
Configuration on the controller
The climate controller, after an outputs inactivity time equal to 12h, starting from 2h later makes a switching
sequence to prevent the seizure of the connected load (either pump or valve); more precisely uses the following three parameters:
- Pump anti-seize: Pump switching On/Off for a fixed time; this time value affects the PID algorithm
whether the valve is ON/OFF or proportional.
- Open/Close valve anti-seize: Open/off switching for a fixed time.
- Proportional valve anti-seize: 0-100% switching for a fixed time.
 Valve opening time: It is the time taken for the valve to perform a closing/opening cycle (On/Off). It is used
for the calibration of the open/close valve.
 Valve closing time: It is the time taken for the valve to perform an opening/closing cycle (On/Off). It is used
for the calibration of the open/close valve.

Delivery probe type: It allows the operator to set the type of delivery probe installed in the system.

Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a temperature message.

Transmission interval: If the Transmission valueis set on time-basedthe parameter indicates how often
to send the measured value. If the Transmission value is set on time-based change the parameter indicates the minimum time to validated the change and activate the transmission.

Air-conditioning correction factor: K coefficient (fixed) for the calculation of the delivery temperature in
Air-conditioning mode.
The coefficient is used to obtain the delivery temperature value through the relation:
T delivery = Setpoint + K x (Setpoint - T external)
Example of floor or fan-coil system
For an ambient temperature of 23°C with external limit temperature of 35°C; to obtain a delivery temperature of 14°C, the air conditioning correction factor (K) must be equal to 0.8.

Heating correction factor: K coefficient (fixed) for the calculation of the delivery temperature in Heating
mode.
The coefficient is used in the following formula to obtain the delivery temperature value:
T delivery = Setpoint + K x (Setpoint - T external)
Example of underfloor heating
For an ambient temperature of 20°C with external limit temperature of 0°C; to obtain a delivery temperature
of 35°C, the heating correction factor (K) must be equal to 0.8.
Example of a system with radiators or fan-coil
For an ambient temperature of 20°C with external limit temperature of 0°C; to obtain a delivery temperature
of 60°C, the heating correction factor (K) must be equal to 2.0.

Band (P): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kp = 100/Bp.
Corresponds to the breadth of proportional adjustment range: starting from the set temperature, this value
the temperature range in which the system power goes from 0% to 100%.
For example: with the temperature, set to 50.0°C and Band (P) =4.0°C, the climate controller opens the
valve at 100% when the delivery T. is <= 46.0 °C; as this temperature increases, the valve opening is
consequently lowered down to 0% when the delivery temperature reaches 50°C. The value must be set
consistently with the thermal capacity of the source to be controlled; in general, it is recommended to use
small values ​​for high thermal capacity (therefore longer reaction time) and vice versa.

Time (I): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Ki = Kp/Ti.
Corresponds to the time passed which, when equal to the deviation from the setpoint (error), the additional
295
Configuration on the controller
component generates a contribution equal to that generated by the proportional component. The integral
contribution is used to reduce the error on full operation if thermal energy is lost in the room controlled,
as this contribution increases according to the time during which the setpoint is not reached. If this value
is not set perfectly, it can cause transients with oscillations around the setpoint or it may take longer to
reach the setpoint.

Time (D): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kd = Kp * Td.
Corresponds to the time only the proportional action would take to generate a command signal equal to
that produced by the derivative action. The derivative contribution opposes the system variations and has
no role in eliminating the error but is used to stabilise the control operations, particularly in systems that are
characterized by sudden variations. The derivative contribution must be enabled with care, particularly in
systems with long dead times, as this could make the control chain unstable; generally the most appropriate algorithm in these cases corresponds to type PI (proportional-integral).
N.B.:
1) The delivery temperature sending is automatic and takes place at every change of 0.1°C.
2) The execution time of the PID algorithm is derived from the minimum value of the two “Valve opening time” and “Valve closing time” parameters and is valid for both the open/close valve and the
proportional valve.
External Temperature and Auxiliary Temperature

Probe type: It allows the operator to set the type of temperature probe installed in the system.

Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a temperature message.

Transmission interval: If the Transmission valueis set on time-basedthe parameter indicates how often
to send the measured value. If the Transmission value is set on time-based change the parameter indicates the minimum time to validated the change and activate the transmission.
Humidity Functional unit

Probe calibration: It is the humidity measurement calibration value; this value is added to or subtracted
from humidity measured by the sensor of the same group to obtain the desired value.
Types of alarm and climate controller actions
296

Delivery probe failure alarm: The controller shuts down (the pump is turned off and the mixing valve
closed), the green status led flashes and the alarm is indicated by the bus.

External probe failure alarm: The climate controller forces the temperature measured at 30°C in air conditioning and 0°C in heating, the green status led flashes and the alarm is indicated by the bus.

Auxiliary probe failure alarm: In this case, the green device status led flashes and the alarm is indicated
by the bus. The control does not shut down.

OUT3 proportional output overload alarm: In this case the proportional output is forced to 0 V/mA, the
output (OUT3) green status led flashes and the alarm is indicated by the bus; there is no user adjustment
lock. Once solved the cause that generated the alarm (for example an overcurrent), the output is automatically restored.

Shutdown alarm: The auxiliary contact input is opened or closed depending on the polarity set (NO or
NC). If an alarm occurs the climate controller shutdown is started and therefore the pump turns off and the
valve closes; once the alarm has been resolved, the controller resumes normal operation.
Configuration on the controller
• ACTUATOR WITH 4 PROPORTIONAL ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 01466

Control polarity: Represents the direction of the output analogue signal with which the valve is controlled
(available only for temperature control applications).
Select “Normal” and, as the % value increases, the valve opening will increase.
For example: 0%=Closed, 100%=Open
Select “Inverted” and, as the % value increases, the valve opening will decrease.
For example: 0%=Open, 100%=Closed

Minimum value: Minimum value of voltage/current adjustment on the output channel:
- Minimum adjustment in current 0.0 mA.
- Minimum adjustment in voltage 0.0 V.

Maximum value: Maximum value of voltage/current adjustment on the output channel:
- Maximum adjustment in current 20.4 mA.
- Maximum adjustment in voltage 10.2 V.

Adjustment speed: Adjustment speed of the device analogue output.
Available only for Automation applications with “Button control”, used to set the adjustment speed i.e. the
variation speed of the analogue output signal.

OFF value: Output value in Off state.
Available only for Automation applications with “Button control”, the parameter specifies the value in V-mA
that the output channel must have when it receives an OFF command.
The following values can be set:
- if OFF, the output goes to the “minimum value”.
- if OFF, the output goes to the zero value.
Example: If the control is used with a button with a dimmer function, it is possible to choose which value
the proportional output assumes when the actuator receives an Off command.
• DEVICE WITH 3 ANALOGUE SIGNAL INPUTS 01467
The device consists of 3 functional units to which the respective parameters are associated.
Functional unit input 0-10 V or 4-20 mA

Control threshold: The parameter is used to modify the setpoint value.

Hysteresis: The parameter is used to modify the hysteresis value.

Minimum value: Minimum value of the input signal (example: in a 1-10 V sensor the associated value when
the input read is equal to 1 V.
 Maximum value: Maximum value of the input signal (example: in a 1-10 V sensor the associated value when
the input read is equal to 10 V).

Enabling on start-up: Defines the behaviour of the control on start-up:
- command enabled;
- command disabled;
- analogue control at the last variation before switching off.

Control polarity: Used to invert the output control behaviour.

By selecting Value transmission you can set the following parameters:
 Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a message.
 Transmission threshold: Indicates the difference between 2 values read to generate a message transmission.
297
Configuration on the controller


Transmission interval: Indicates the time difference between 2 values read to generate the transmission of a message.
Selecting Percentage transmission, which has operates only in case of a device configured as “Extension”, it is possible to set the following parameters:
 Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a scalar message.
 Transmission threshold: Indicates the difference between 2 values read to generate a scalar message
transmission.
 Transmission interval: Indicates the time difference between 2 values read to generate the transmission of a scalar message.
N.B.
The Value Transmission and Percentage Transmission parameters both transmit the value measured
by the sensor; the former is the actual measurement expressed with 2 bytes while the latter is the percentage measurement of the value between MIN and MAX expressed with 1 byte.
Example 1: If you set min = 0 and max = 10000mV with the sensor that measures 5V at the output you
will have a transmission value of 5000mV or a transmission percentage of 50%.
Example 2: If you set min = 0 and max = 10000mV with the sensor that measures 10V at the output you
will have a transmission value of 10000mV or a transmission percentage of 100%
Functional unit input for NTC temperature sensor

Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a temperature message.

Transmission threshold: Indicates the difference between 2 values read to generate a temperature message transmission.

Transmission interval: Indicates the time difference between 2 values read to generate a temperature
message transmission.
Functional unit input for brightness adjustment sensor

Hysteresis: The parameter is used to modify the adjustment hysteresis value.
• THERMOSTAT 02951
The thermostat consists of 2 functional units to which the respective parameters are associated.
Functional unit thermostat
298

Screed threshold: Temperature value above which the screed limitation cuts in.
When this limitation is in effect, the thermostat will close its valve if the temperature measured by the Probe
2 (underfloor heating screed) exceeds the set threshold.
Caution: This is an extra action (and not for safety) that is added to the protection performed by the thermostatic valve prescribed by system regulations.

Probe 2: Sets the use of probe 2; the following values can be set:
- Not present = Probe 2 not present.
- Temp. Control. (exclusive) = for temperature control, in place of Probe 1.
- Temp. Control. (combined) = per la temperature control, used as a medium with Probe 1 (large rooms).
- Screen Limit. = for screed limitation.
- View = view only (e.g: temperature in another room).
Configuration on the controller

Neutral zone range: Sets the range of the Neutral Zone centred on the relative setpoint
In the Neutral Zone adjustment mode, the thermostat automatically switches between heating and cooling according to the set set-point, the temperature measured and considering any neutral zone around the
set point defined by the Neutral Zone Range parameter (set from 1°C to 5°C in 1°C steps).
For example, if the set point is set to 20°C and the neutral zone range is 2°C, the thermostat will switch
the heating on if the temperature falls below 19°C (set point – neutral zone range/2) and will switch on
the air conditioning if the temperature rises above 21°C (set point + neutral zone range/2). In this way a
band of 2°C around which the thermostat neither heats or cools is defined (thus the name neutral zone).
Important:
-The “neutral zone” adjustment can of course be used only on 4-pipe systems (which can both heat and
cool at the same time).
- In the neutral zone adjustment mode, the thermostat only allows Manual and OFF operating modes.

Operating limitations: Defines the operating mode limitation, the following values can be set:
- Limit.1 = auto/manual/off.
- Limit.2 = manual/off.
- Limit.3 = auto/off.
Both setpoint operating or adjustment limitations are useful in applications such as guest rooms, offices,
shops and tertiary applications generally.

Setpoint adj. limit.: Defines the setpoint adjustment range limitation, the following values can be set:
- No limitation = the setpoint can be adjusted across all the available range.
- Range 0 = the current setpoint can be modified by maximum +/- 0.5°C of the setpoint value saved in
the memory.
- Range 1 = as above but +/- 1°C.
- Range 2 = as above but +/- 2°C.
- Range 3 = as above but +/- 3°C.
- Range 4 = as above but +/- 4°C.
- Range 5 = as above but +/- 5°C.

View: Defines what to view in the main screen; the following values can be set:
- Room temp. = room temperature (normal)
- Current setpoint = set point temperature
- Current setpoint delta.
By selecting "current setpoint delta":
- in the event of active setpoint adjustment limitations, the display shows the current setpoint delta
compared to that locked in the limitation.
Example: Setpoint adj. limit. Range 2 , the display will show the values from -2°C to +2°C
- if there are no setpoint adjustment limitations, the display shows the setpoint value.
The “current setpoint delta” displayed is therefore used mainly in combination with Setpoint adj. limit..

Humidity view: Defines the viewing of the humidity value in the thermostat display.
Important: To obtain this view, you must configure the functional unit input 0-10 V of device 01467
connected to the humidity probe in the same group as the thermostat.
 Probe 1 calibration: Static calibration value of the internal probe (probe 1). In fact this is an offset to which
the temperature value read by the probe must be summed.
299
Configuration on the controller
 Probe 2 calibration: Static calibration value of the external probe (probe 2). In fact this is an offset to which
the temperature value read by the probe must be summed.

By selecting Temperature trans. you can set the following parameters:
 Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a temperature message.
 Transmission interval: Indicates the time difference between 2 values read to generate a temperature
message transmission.
Use Temperature trans. to set the period of updating the temperature value on the supervisor devices
(touch screens, etc.).

By selecting Window you can set the following parameters:
 Reaction time: Sets the reaction time if a window warning is received; in fact, it indicates after how
much time the thermostat block should come on if a window is open.
Example:
When the window is closed the heating/conditioning is on; if the window is opened the heating/conditioning stays on for the time set in the Reaction time. If within that time interval the window is closed,
the heating/conditioning remains on.
 Reactivation time: Sets the reactivation time if a window warning is received; in fact, it indicates after
how much time the thermostat block should be switched off due to a window being open.
Example:
When the window is closed the heating/conditioning is on; if the window is opened the heating/conditioning is switched off and stays on for the time set in the Reactivation time. At the end of the time
interval the heating/conditioning comes back on whether or not the window has been closed.
Functional unit output

300
Control alg.: Select the algorithm to use for the temperature control of the relative output.

On/Off: This is the traditional "threshold" control so that, on exceeding the set temperature increased by
the temperature differential (vice versa for air-conditioning), the heating is switched off to then be turned
back on when the room temperature drops below the set temperature.

PID: This is an evolved algorithm that is able to keep the temperature in the environment more stable,
increasing comfort; this algorithm switches the system on and off appropriately so there will be a gradual
increase or decrease in the thermal (or refrigerating) power of the system itself. To fully exploit the performances, it must be appropriately calibrated according to the type of environment or heating system, by
setting the relative parameters.

Temperature differential: Sets the hysteresis value to be used in the case of an on/off algorithm (can be
set from 0.1°C to 1°C in 0.1°C steps)

PWM time: Sets the length of a PWM cycle in the case of a PID algorithm for controlling on/off valves.
It therefore corresponds to thetime in which a cycle of regulation is completed; the shorter this time, the
better the regulation but the temperature control system is under greater stress.
This parameter setting is thus the result of a compromise between the accuracy of the regulator and the
load on the system; in general, the rule is that Tb can be that much higher (and therefore put fewer demands on the system), the slower the system or the larger the environment to regulate.
Important: The value must be much greater than the on and off times of the valves

Band (P): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kp = 100/Bp.
Corresponds to the breadth of proportional adjustment range: starting from the set temperature, this value
the temperature range in which the system power goes from 0% to 100%.
Configuration on the controller
For example: with the (heating) temperature, set to 20.0°C and Band (P) =4.0°C, the thermostat runs the
heating system at 100% when T.ambient is <= 16.0 °C; as this temperature increases, the system power
is consequently lowered down to 0% when the ambient temperature reaches 20°C. The value of Tb must
be set consistently with the thermal capacity of the room controlled; in general, it is recommended to use
small values ​​for rooms with a good level of thermal insulation and vice versa.

Time (I): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Ki = Kp/Ti.
Corresponds to the time passed which, when equal to the deviation from the setpoint (error), the additional
component generates a contribution equal to that generated by the proportional component. The integral
contribution is used to reduce the error on full operation if thermal energy is lost in the room controlled,
as this contribution increases according to the time during which the setpoint is not reached. If this value
is not set perfectly, it can cause transients with oscillations around the setpoint or it may take longer to
reach the setpoint.

Time (D): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kd = Kp * Td.
Corresponds to the time only the proportional action would take to generate a command signal equal to
that produced by the derivative action. The derivative contribution opposes the system variations and has
no role in eliminating the error but is used to stabilise the control operations, particularly in systems that are
characterized by sudden variations. The derivative contribution must be enabled with care, particularly in
systems with long dead times, as this could make the control chain unstable; generally the most appropriate algorithm in these cases corresponds to type PI (proportional-integral).

By selecting Fan-coil you can set the following parameters:
 Speed control: It is possible to select two different control modes:
- Interlock: the thermostat sends a control message exclusively at a single speed: V1, V2 or V3
- Step-step: the thermostat sends a message cumulatively: V1, V1+V2, V1+V2+V3
 Switch-on delay: It sets the delay time of the fan start.
This parameter is used only during the operating or adjustment mode change while it is not used during
temperature control (for example if the thermostat switches off the output and then switches it back on)
 Speed band: It defines the thermal delta to run the fancoil fan at maximum speed.
The speed scale (in the case of an on/off algorithm) is defined in correspondence to the difference
between the ambient temperature and the current Setpoint.
In addition to those described above, using the menu:
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  Select the zone to associate the thermostat to
it is possible to set the following parameters:

Aux. heat threshold: Difference from the setpoint for starting the boost function in heating mode; the
function is switched off when the required temperature (setpoint) is reached, increased by the temperature
differential.

Aux. cond. threshold: Difference from the setpoint for starting the boost function in aircon mode; the
function is switched off when the required temperature (setpoint) is reached, decreased the temperature
differential.

Ecometer: Enables the ecometer function. If the ecometer is disabled, the backlighting is fixed and turns
to the colour set in the Backlight Colour parameter; otherwise the backlighting varies according to the
set setpoint

Backlight colour: Sets the backlighting RGB colour coordinates

Temperature unit: Sets the unit of measure used to view the temperature on the display
301
Configuration on the controller

Keypad lock: Enables the keypad lock (disables the keys).

Sound: Enabling of sounds associated to buttons when pressed.
• TEMPERATURE PROBE 20538-19538-14538
The temperature probe consists of 2 functional units to which the respective parameters are associated.
Functional unit thermostat

Screed threshold: Temperature value above which the screed limitation cuts in.
When this limitation is in effect, the thermostat will close its valve if the temperature measured by the Probe
2 (underfloor heating screed) exceeds the set threshold.
Caution: This is an extra action (and not for safety) that is added to the protection performed by the thermostatic valve prescribed by system regulations.

Probe 2: Sets the use of probe 2; the following values can be set:
- Not present = Probe 2 not present.
- Temp. Control. (exclusive) = for temperature control, in place of Probe 1.
- Temp. Control. (combined) = per la temperature control, used as a medium with Probe 1 (large rooms).
- Screen Limit. = for screed limitation.
- View = view only (e.g: temperature in another room).

Neutral zone range: Sets the range of the Neutral Zone centred on the relative setpoint
In the Neutral Zone adjustment mode, the thermostat automatically switches between heating and cooling according to the set set-point, the temperature measured and considering any neutral zone around the
set point defined by the Neutral Zone Range parameter (set from 1°C to 5°C in 1°C steps).
For example, if the set point is set to 20°C and the neutral zone range is 2°C, the thermostat will switch
the heating on if the temperature falls below 19°C (set point – neutral zone range/2) and will switch on
the air conditioning if the temperature rises above 21°C (set point + neutral zone range/2). In this way a
band of 2°C around which the thermostat neither heats or cools is defined (thus the name neutral zone).
Important:
-The “neutral zone” adjustment can of course be used only on 4-pipe systems (which can both heat and
cool at the same time).
- In the neutral zone adjustment mode, the thermostat only allows Manual and OFF operating modes.

Setpoint adj. limit.: Defines the setpoint adjustment range limitation, the following values can be set:
- No limitation = the setpoint can be adjusted across all the available range.
- Range 0 = the current setpoint can be modified by maximum +/- 0.5°C of the setpoint value saved in
the memory.
- Range 1 = as above but +/- 1°C.
- Range 2 = as above but +/- 2°C.
- Range 3 = as above but +/- 3°C.
- Range 4 = as above but +/- 4°C.
- Range 5 = as above but +/- 5°C.
 Probe 1 calibration: Static calibration value of the internal probe (probe 1). In fact this is an offset to which
the temperature value read by the probe must be summed.
 Probe 2 calibration: Static calibration value of the external probe (probe 2). In fact this is an offset to which
the temperature value read by the probe must be summed.
302
Configuration on the controller

By selecting Temperature trans. you can set the following parameters:
 Value transmission: Indicates how to force the transmission of a temperature message.
 Transmission interval: Indicates the time difference between 2 values read to generate a temperature
message transmission.
Use Temperature trans. to set the period of updating the temperature value on the supervisor devices
(touch screens, etc.).

By selecting Window you can set the following parameters:
 Reaction time: Sets the reaction time if a window warning is received; in fact, it indicates after how
much time the thermostat block should come on if a window is open.
Example:
When the window is closed the heating/conditioning is on; if the window is opened the heating/conditioning stays on for the time set in the Reaction time. If within that time interval the window is closed,
the heating/conditioning remains on.
 Reactivation time: Sets the reactivation time if a window warning is received; in fact, it indicates after
how much time the thermostat block should be switched off due to a window being open.
Example:
When the window is closed the heating/conditioning is on; if the window is opened the heating/conditioning is switched off and stays on for the time set in the Reactivation time. At the end of the time
interval the heating/conditioning comes back on whether or not the window has been closed.
Functional unit output

Control alg.: Select the algorithm to use for the temperature control of the relative output.

On/Off: This is the traditional "threshold" control so that, on exceeding the set temperature increased by
the temperature differential (vice versa for air-conditioning), the heating is switched off to then be turned
back on when the room temperature drops below the set temperature.

PID: This is an evolved algorithm that is able to keep the temperature in the environment more stable,
increasing comfort; this algorithm switches the system on and off appropriately so there will be a gradual
increase or decrease in the thermal (or refrigerating) power of the system itself. To fully exploit the performances, it must be appropriately calibrated according to the type of environment or heating system, by
setting the relative parameters.

Temperature differential: Sets the hysteresis value to be used in the case of an on/off algorithm (can be
set from 0.1°C to 1°C in 0.1°C steps)

PWM time: Sets the length of a PWM cycle in the case of a PID algorithm for controlling on/off valves.
It therefore corresponds to thetime in which a cycle of regulation is completed; the shorter this time, the
better the regulation but the temperature control system is under greater stress. This parameter setting
is thus the result of a compromise between the accuracy of the regulator and the load on the system; in
general, the rule is that Tb can be that much higher (and therefore put fewer demands on the system), the
slower the system or the larger the environment to regulate.
Important: The value must be much greater than the on and off times of the valves

Band (P): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kp = 100/Bp.
Corresponds to the breadth of proportional adjustment range: starting from the set temperature, this value
the temperature range in which the system power goes from 0% to 100%.
For example: with the (heating) temperature, set to 20.0°C and Band (P) =4.0°C, the thermostat runs the
heating system at 100% when T.ambient is <= 16.0 °C; as this temperature increases, the system power
303
Configuration on the controller
is consequently lowered down to 0% when the ambient temperature reaches 20°C. The value of Tb must
be set consistently with the thermal capacity of the room controlled; in general, it is recommended to use
small values ​​for rooms with a good level of thermal insulation and vice versa.

Time (I): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Ki = Kp/Ti.
Corresponds to the time passed which, when equal to the deviation from the setpoint (error), the additional
component generates a contribution equal to that generated by the proportional component. The integral
contribution is used to reduce the error on full operation if thermal energy is lost in the room controlled,
as this contribution increases according to the time during which the setpoint is not reached. If this value
is not set perfectly, it can cause transients with oscillations around the setpoint or it may take longer to
reach the setpoint.

Time (D): Parameter used by the PID algorithm to calculate the coeff. Kd = Kp * Td.
Corresponds to the time only the proportional action would take to generate a command signal equal to
that produced by the derivative action. The derivative contribution opposes the system variations and has
no role in eliminating the error but is used to stabilise the control operations, particularly in systems that are
characterized by sudden variations. The derivative contribution must be enabled with care, particularly in
systems with long dead times, as this could make the control chain unstable; generally the most appropriate algorithm in these cases corresponds to type PI (proportional-integral).

By selecting Fan-coil you can set the following parameters:
 Speed control: It is possible to select two different control modes:
- Interlock: the thermostat sends a control message exclusively at a single speed: V1, V2 or V3.
- Step-step: the thermostat sends a message cumulatively: V1, V1+V2, V1+V2+V3.
 Switch-on delay: It sets the delay time of the fan start.
This parameter is used only during the operating or adjustment mode change while it is not used
during temperature control (for example if the thermostat switches off the output and then switches it
back on).
 Speed band: It defines the thermal delta to run the fancoil fan at maximum speed.
The speed scale (in the case of an on/off algorithm) is defined in correspondence to the difference
between the ambient temperature and the current Setpoint.
In addition to those described above, using the menu:
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  Select the zone to associate the thermostat to
it is possible to set the following parameters:

Aux. heat threshold: Difference from the setpoint for starting the boost function in heating mode; the
function is switched off when the required temperature (setpoint) is reached, increased by the temperature
differential.

Aux. cond. threshold: Difference from the setpoint for starting the boost function in aircon mode; the
function is switched off when the required temperature (setpoint) is reached, decreased the temperature
differential.
• IR INTERFACE 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1
On the control unit, on the screen for the parameters of the IR interface there are also:
 LED control: (default 1= enabled). The LED signals IR transmission.
 Inter-time [sec]: (default value 1 s). Time in seconds that must pass between one repetition of an IR
button and another one, that is between consecutive actions mapped within the same command.
304
Configuration on the controller
3.3 Test procedure for the climate controller 01465
The test procedure, to be carried out with device not configured, is used to check the connections and earthing of the climate control device during installation.
• Press the configuration button for about 10 sec.
• When the led from steady red starts flashing in red/orange release the button.
• The test then start and throughout its duration, the configuration led flashes green; the sequence of the functions checked is the following:
1. All outputs off and mixing valve output stopped.
2. Mixing valve opening activation.
3. Proportional output activation 100% (*).
4. Waiting (1 minute for the installer test).
5. Circulation pump activation.
6. Mixing valve closing activation.
7. Proportional output activation 0% (*).
8. Circulation pump closing (after 30 sec).
9. All outputs off and mixing valve output stopped.
(*) Proportional output with default voltage.
The following figure shows the sequence of tests in relation to the duration of each individual function tested.
Mixing valve opening
Mixing valve closing
Circulation pump control
1 min
30 sec
30 sec
305
Configuration on the controller
4. Air-conditioning control.
The air-conditioning is controlled in the system by means of the thermostats 02951, the temperature probes
20538-19538-14538 and the climate controller 01465; this chapter describes the operating modes which can be
used and the procedures for setting the automatic programmes.
4.1 Operating modes.
The operating modes are selected using the menu:
HVAC  Select, moving
Clima
to set the mode
Zona 23
to the left (<) or to the right (>), the zone in which
Termostato 23 Biblioteca
Touching
displays
the list with the operating modes; select the desired one by touching
Setup
Menu
the
corresponding word.
Depending on the device that controls the zone, the available modes will be as follows:
Touch screen thermostat 02951 and temperature probe 20538-19538-14538
• OFF = off.
•P
ROTECTION = Depending on whether in heating mode (winter) or cooling mode (summer), the thermostat
activates the Antifreeze or Too hot safeguards respectively, which prevent the risk of damaging the system.
• REDUCTION = manual temperature typically used at night (e.g. 18°C in winter).
•M
ANUAL = is the classic operation of traditional thermostats (the desired temperature is set manually with
no time limit).
•T
IMED MANUAL = as above, for a selectable number of hours after which the thermostat returns to the
previous operation.
• AWAY = lets the operator set the set-point in order to achieve significant energy savings during periods when
the user is away.
• AUTOMATIC Activates weekly programming that has previously been configured on the control panel.
Note. If a Timed mode is selected, the control unit stores the previous mode and returns to this mode after the
set time has elapsed.
Climate controller for heating systems (art. 01465)
• AUTOMATIC = activates a weekly programming that has previously been configured on the control panel.
• COMFORT = is the classic operation of traditional thermostats (the desired temperature is set manually with
no time limit).
• ECONOMY = manual temperature typically used at night.
Clima
Zona 24
• OFF = off.
Regolatore climatico
48.0°C
• Touching
the set point is manually forced; according to the type of operation mode set in the
Menu
Setup
climate controller it may be:
- Fixed Mode: delivery temperature set point.
- ModulatingMode: desired ambient temperature set point.
IMPORTANT: The incorrect setting of this value may prevent the controller delivery valve from opening.
306
Configuration on the controller
4.2 Setting the speed of the fan coils
There are two methods of adjustment: manual and automatic.
• on selecting manual mode the user sets the desired speed;
• on selecting automatic mode the speed is adjusted by the thermostat according to the difference between
the ambient temperature and the set point; the greater the difference the greater the speed.
HVAC  Select the desired zone  Fan coil speed  Select the desired speed:
- Minimum
- Medium
- Maximum
- Automatic
Touch
lastly Save to confirm; after a time out the selected speed will be set.
4.3 Forced switch-off.
In certain situations, it may be necessary to force the air-conditioning system to switch off (for example, if the
windows are opened).
To activate this function, a contact interface is required (Eikon 20515, 20518, Arké 19515, 19518, Idea 16955,
16958, Plana 14515, 14518) in the same group as the thermostat and relay. If the system is forced to OFF, the
thermostat ignores the temperature values transmitted by the control unit.
CONTROL UNIT
setpoint
THERMOSTAT
on/off
CONTACT
INTERFACE
on/off
RELAY
The control unit display shows an icon that indicates that the thermostat has been forced OFF.
307
Configuration on the controller
4.4 Programming.
This section describes the procedures for setting personalized air-conditioning programs for the 40 zones.
4.4.1 Setting the automatic program
The By-me system can be used to create personalized programs for automatic heating or air-conditioning
control. The personalization consists of setting the value of a temperature level - that can be selected from
between three different ones (T1, T2 and T3) - every 20 minutes; in the heating and air-conditioning programs
the values T1, T2 and T3 are differentiable.
Select the zone to be programmed.
HVAC  Setup  Programming zones  Select the HVAC zone  Programs
Select the program to be created:
Heating prog.
Air-conditioning prog.
Select the day associated with the program to make then touch
Edit program.
Edit Programme
Mon
Back
- With
or
Set
, set the time slot when to change the temperature level.
- With
upwards or downwards, select the desired level of temperature from the three available ones
(icons T1, T2 and T3); the histogram will be updated.
Touch
C, if you want to expand the set level T1,T2 o T3 forwards or backwards; if C is not selected/
activated each movement will not alter the current setting.
- Repeat the procedure for all time slots to be changed, then confirm with Set.
Move onto another day of the week and proceed as above; using Copy from....., it is possible to assign the
selected day with the program of any other day of the week; then select the day to copy and touch
Save the configuration with Save.
Set.
4.4.2 Setting temperature levels.
HVAC  Setup  Programming zones  Select the HVAC zone  Temperature levels
Select:
Heat. T1 [°C], Heat. T2 [°C], Heat. T3 [°C] or Air-con. T1 [°C], Air-con. T2 [°C], Air-con. T3 [°C]
Insert the desired value and confirm with Set; at the end of the operation touch
Save.
The control unit confirms the operation carried out and returns to displaying the page with the settings of the
programs relating to the previously selected temperature zone.
308
Example of installation
4. Example of installation
The following pages illustrate all the types of configurations using the thermostat (the examples are in any case
valid for the temperature probe).
Legend
Main output
hot valve
Auxiliary output
hot valve
Main output
cold valve
Auxiliary output
cold valve
IMPORTANT: When configuring a circulation pump relay, the first time you must enter the menu Device parameters  Operation and:
- select “Hot circulation or circulation pump” if there is only one pump or it is effectively the hot one;
- select “Cold circulation or circulation pump” if the pump is the cold one;
N.B. In the following applications the relay actuators used are indicative only; indeed, when the control
is “Valve on/off” type, any kind of actuator can be configured.
309
Example of installation
 RADIATORS
In the winter the radiators are the main outputs of the system, while in the summer they are switched off.
Functional
Unit
Output
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
VALVE
ON/OFF
BUS
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Heating only
Heating only
Heating only
Air-conditioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
In Heating
the controller
menu select: Configuration 
Groupsonly
only
Heating
only
 Climate  Create
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone group Heating
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zo
Air-conditioning
only
Air-conditioning only
Air-conditioning only
• 1st
Group
Thermostat
Back
Next
Back
Next
Back
N
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Add
the thermostat
display that act as configuration
Heat.+aircon+neutral
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone buttons
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zo
 Press the areas on zone
 Select:
Back
Back
Back
type Next
Adjustement type N
Adjustement type Next Adjustement
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
Heating only
Adjustement
type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Air-conditioning
only
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
Heat.+aircon
Heating
only
Main
heating
Main
air-conditioning
Heating
only
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
g only
Air-conditioning
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Air-conditioning
onlyonly
Next
Back
N
Heat.+aircon
Back
Next Back
Heat.+aircon
neutral zone Heat.+aircon+neutral
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
zone
Group
control
Next• 2nd
Back- Radiatortype
NextAdjustement
Adjustement
Back
type Next
Back
Adjustement
type N
Back
Next
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
Main heating
Main heating
Auxiliary heating
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary
airtype
conditioni
Actuator
t type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
On/off valve
g
MainMain
heating
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
Main heating
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
ditioning
Auxiliary heating
Proportional
valve
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary
air conditioni
Back
Next Back
Next
Back
N
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next Back
Next
Back
NextBack
Back
Next Back
Next
N
t type
Add  Press the actuator configuration button 01850.2
t type
g
ditioning
Actuator type
Actuator type
Adjustement type
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection
(in this case any By-me relay for
controlling
Proportional
valve
On/offmade
valve
Auxiliary heating
the On/Off
Valve), the
ends by signalling
an error. valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional
Auxiliary
airprocedure
conditioning
Next
310
Back
Next
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next
Proportional fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR fan coil
Back
Example of installation
 2 PIPE FLOOR HEATING
In the summer the floor heating works in cooling mode while in the winter in heating mode.
Functional
Unit
Output
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
VALVE
ON/OFF
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
nt type
nt
ng type
only
+neutral
ng only zone
Next
+neutral zone
Next
nt type
nt
ng type
only
+neutral
ng only zone
Next
+neutral zone
nt type Next
ng
nt type
ng
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Heating only
Heating only
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Air-conditioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heating only
Heating only
Heat.+aircon+neutral
Heat.+aircon+neutral
Air-conditioning only zone
Air-conditioning only zone
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Back
Next
Back
Next
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
• 2nd
Group - Floor heating circuit
control Back
Back
Next
Next
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
Actuator
Add
Press
the
areas
on
the
thermostat
display that act astype
configuration buttons

 Select:type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
On/off valve
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Actuator
type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
3
speedvalve
fan coil
Main heating
Main
air-conditioning
On/off
On/off
valve
Proportional fan
coil
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary
heating
valve
Proportional
valve
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Proportional fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR fan coil
Back
Next
Back
Next
Back
Back
Next
Actuator type
Adjustement type
Adjustement
type
On/off valve
Actuator type
Adjustement
type
Proportional
valve
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
If theMain
actuator
does not correspond to the selection
made, the
procedure ends by signalling
an
error.coil
3On/off
speed
fan
valve
heating
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional fan
coil
valve
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
3
speed
fan
coil
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Main
heating
Auxiliary heating
Add
the actuator
 Press
Adjustement
type configuration button 01850.2
Next
Next
311
Example of installation
 RADIATORS + AIRCON
In the summer the radiators are switched off and the aircon is switched on.
Vice versa, in the winter the radiators are the main outputs of the system while the aircon is switched off.
Functional
Unit
Output
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
VALVE
ON/OFF
BUS
Functional
Unit
Output
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
VALVE
ON/OFF
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
type
only
utral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group - Radiator control
only
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
utral zone
Next
Back
type
type
NO C NC
OUT 1
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
312
Adjustement type
Main heating
Next
Back
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
N
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
ent type
Heating
only
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
ynly
ioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
ning
only
con
Heat.+aircon
n
con+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
n+neutral zone
Next
Back
Next Back
Example
of installationNext
Next
Next Back
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coi
Back
Actuator
type
Actuator type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
va
Proportional
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary airvalve
conditioning
3 speed
3 speed fan coil
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Proportional fan coil
Proportional
fan fan
coi
Back
Next Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Back
Next Back
Next
Next
ment
type
Adjustement
type
nt type
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Actuator
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Add
Press
the
actuator
configuration button
01850.2 type
nly
Heating

Heating
onlyonly
ioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Proportional
va
ing
only
Air-conditioning
only
On/off
valve
eating
Auxiliary
heating
If the actuator
does not
correspond to the selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error.
con
Heat.+aircon
3 speed fan coil
Heat.+aircon
Proportional valve
-conditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
con+neutral
zone • 3rd
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Proportional fan
+neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
3 speed fan coil
Group - Aircon control zone
4-pipe VIMAR fa
Proportional
fan
coil
Next
Back
Next
Next Add
Back Press the areas on the
Next
thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:

Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
ment
type
ent type
eating
ting
r-conditioning
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
air-conditioning
MainMain
heating
heating
MainAuxiliary
air-conditioning
ment
type
nt type
eating
ng
r-conditioning
onditioning
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
air-conditioning
MainMain
air-conditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Auxiliary
heating
Next Back
Back
Next
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valve
3 speed
3 speed
fanfan
coilcoil
Proportional
Proportional
fanfan
coilcoil
NextBack
Back
Next
Next
Next
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
va
Proportional
valve
3 speed
3 speed
fanfan
coilcoil
Proportional
Proportional
fanfan
coi
Back
Back
Add
Press the actuator
configurationActuator
button
01850.2

Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Proportional
va
If theAuxiliary
actuator
does
not
correspond to theOn/off
selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error. valve
Proportional
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
valve
heating
3 speed
3 speed
fanfan
coilcoil
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning
Proportional
Proportional
fanfan
coi
3 speed
3 speed
fanfan
coilcoil
4-pipe
VIMAR
4-pipe
VIMAR
fanfa
co
Proportional
Proportional
fanfan
coilcoil
Back
Back
Next Back
Next Back
Back
NextBack
Next
Next
Next
ment
type
nt type
eating
ng
-conditioning
nditioning
313
Example of installation
 PROPORTIONAL RADIATORS + AIR-CON (VIA SPLIT IR)
In the summer the radiators are switched off and the aircon is switched on. Vice versa, in the winter the
radiators are the main outputs of the system while the aircon is switched off.
Functional
Unit
Output
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 1
01466
ANALOG
OUT 2
ACTUATOR
120-230V~ 50/60Hz OUT 3
V
A
OUT
0-10V (0)4-20 mA OUT 4
By-me
PROP.
VALVE
CONF.
BUS
L
N
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
only
utral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group - Radiator control
only
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
utral zone
Next
Back
ype
ype
OUT 1
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
314
Adjustement type
Main heating
Next
Back
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
N
ment
type
Adjustement type
nt type
ly
Main heating
oning
only
Main air-conditioning
ing only
on
on+neutral
zone
+neutral zone
Next Backof installationNext
Example
Next
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Back
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
nt type
ment
type
ng
-conditioning
y heating
Actuator
Actuator
typetype
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Actuator type
Proportional
va
On/off
valve
Main heating
Auxiliary
heating
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
3 speed valve
fan coil
Proportional
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valve
Proportional
3 speed
fan coil fan
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR
fa
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Next
Next
Next
Back
Next BackBack
Next Back
Back
Next Back
nt type
Adjustement
type
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Add
Press
configuration button on theActuator
proportionaltype
actuator 01466
Heating
onlythe
y
Heating
only

Actuator
type
ment
type
ng
onlyonly
Air-conditioning
only
oning
Air-conditioning
only
If the
actuator
does not correspond to the selection
made, the procedure
Proportional
valve ends by signalling an error.
On/off
valve
y heating
Heat.+aircon
on
Heat.+aircon
3
speed
fan
coil
Proportional
valve
y
air
conditioning
neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
on+neutral
zone • 3rd
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
Aircon
Proportional fan coil
3Group
speed
fan control
coil
Next
Back
Next
Next Proportional
Back
Next 4-pipe VIMAR fan coil
fan coil
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
Back
Next
Back
Next
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
MainMain
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Next
Next
Next
Next Back
Back
NextBack
Back
Next
Next
t type
ment
type
g
ating
nditioning
-conditioning
t type
ment
type
g
ating
ditioning
-conditioning
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valv
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil
Proportional
Back
Back
Add
Press the configuration
the
IR interface
20584.1-19584.1-14584.1
Actuator
type

Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type button on
Proportional
If theAuxiliary
actuator
does
not
correspond to theOn/off
selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error. valve
Proportional
valv
valve
heating
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Next
Next
Back
Next
NextBack
Auxiliary
air conditioning
Auxiliary
air conditioning
Next
Next Back
Back
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil
Proportional
4-pipe
VIMAR
fan fan
coi
4-pipe
VIMAR
Back
Back
315
Example of installation
 PROPORTIONAL RADIATORS + AIR-CON
In the summer the radiators are switched off and the aircon is switched on. Vice versa, in the winter the
radiators are the main outputs of the system while the aircon is switched off.
Functional
Unit
Output
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 1
01466
ANALOG
OUT 2
ACTUATOR
120-230V~ 50/60Hz OUT 3
V
A
OUT
0-10V (0)4-20 mA OUT 4
By-me
VALVE
PROP.
CONF.
BUS
L
Functional
Unit
Output
N
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
VALVE
ON/OFF
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
only
utral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group - Radiator control
only
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
utral zone
Next
Back
ype
ype
OUT 1
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
316
Adjustement type
Main heating
Next
Back
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
N
ment
type
Adjustement type
nt type
ly
Main heating
oning
only
Main air-conditioning
ing only
on
on+neutral
zone
+neutral zone
Next Backof installationNext
Example
Next
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Back
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
nt type
ment
type
ng
-conditioning
y heating
Actuator
Actuator
typetype
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Actuator type
Proportional
va
On/off
valve
Main
heating
Auxiliary
heating
On/off
valve
On/off valve
3 speed valve
fan coil
Proportional
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valve
Proportional
3 speed
fan coil fan
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR
fa
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Next
Next
Next
Back
Next BackBack
Next Back
Back
Next Back
ment
type
Adjustement
type
nt
type
Adjustement
type
Add
Press
the
configuration
button on the proportional actuator 01466

ly type
Heating
Heating
onlyonly
Actuator type
Actuator
type
ment
oning
only
Air-conditioning
only
ng only
only
IfAir-conditioning
the actuator does not
correspond to the selection
made, the procedure
Proportional
valve ends by signalling an error.
On/off
valve
y
heating
on
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
3 speed fan coil
Proportional
valve
yneutral
air conditioning
on+neutral
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
zonezone • 3rd
Heat.+aircon+neutral
Aircon control zone
Proportional fan coil
3Group
speed
fan coil
NextAdd
Back
Next display
Next
Back
Next
Press the areas
on the
thermostat
thatVIMAR
act asfan
configuration
buttons
Select:
4-pipe
coil
Proportional
fan coil


Back
Next
Back
Next
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
t type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
gating
MainMain
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
-conditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
nditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional
fan coil
Next Back
Back
NextBack
Back
Next
Next
Next
Next
Next
ment
type
t type
gating
-conditioning
ditioning
Add  Press the configuration button on the
proportionaltype
actuator 01850.2
Actuator
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
valv
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
Proportional
fan
Proportional
fan coil
Back
Back
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
If theAuxiliary
actuator
does
not
correspond to theOn/off
selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error. valve
Proportional
valv
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
heating
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional
fan coil
Back
Next
Next Back
Back
NextBack
Next
Next
Next
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
Proportional
fan
Proportional
fan coil
4-pipe
VIMAR
fan
4-pipe
VIMAR
fan coi
Back
Back
317
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH 2 FANCOIL PIPES
As there is only one zone valve, used for heating or cooling according to the temperature of the water
circulating in the pipes, we use relay actuator 01851.2.
Solenoid valve installation in fan coils with 2 pipes
Functional
Unit
Output
FANCOIL
VIMAR
2T
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
CIRCULATION PUMP
M
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
nly
utral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd
Group - Faincoiltype
control
Adjustement
ype
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Actuator type
Add Main
the areas on the thermostat display
act as configuration buttons
 Press
 Select:
heating
Main that
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
Main air-conditioning
nly
utral zone
Next
ype
Back
Auxiliary heating
Next
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary air conditioning
318
Next
Back
Next
Back
Next
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
N
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
N
nt type
Adjustement type
Heating only
ng only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
+neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Example
Next Backof installation
Next
ng only
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
+neutral zone
Next
Back
nt type
nt type
ng
Next
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Main air-conditioning
On/off
valve
Auxiliary heating
Proportional
valve
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil (4T)
Back
Next
Back
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the actuator
button 01851.2 type
Actuator type
Adjustement
type configuration Adjustement
The Main
controller
automatically configures all 4 functional
units of
the actuator 01851.2; no
other configuraOn/off
valve
heating
Auxiliary
heating
tion Main
of thisair-conditioning
actuator is required.
Proportional valve
Auxiliary air conditioning
3 speed fan coil
The output connections of actuator 01851.2 are fixed and have the following meanings:
Proportional fan coil
Out1 = V1
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Out2 = V2
Out3 = V3
Out4 = valve
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
Add  Press the configuration button on actuator 01850.2 that acts as a circulation pump
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
319
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPE FANCOIL + RADIATORS
In the summer the radiators are off while the fancoil is the main output for cooling.
In the winter the radiators are the main outputs for heating while the fancoil is the auxiliary output for the
boost.
Solenoid valve installation in fan coils with 2 pipes
Functional
Unit
Output
FANCOIL
VIMAR
2T
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
01851.2
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
M
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
only
utral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group - Faincoil control
Adjustement
type
Actuator
Add
on the thermostatAdjustement
display that act astype
configuration buttons
 Press the areas
 Select:type
ype
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
only
utral zone
Next
ype
320
Back
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Next
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary air conditioning
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
N
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
ent
type
nly
Heating
only
Main
heating
Main air-conditioning
ioning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Main
air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
ning
only
on
Heat.+aircon
on+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
+neutral
zone
Next
Back
Next Back
Example
of installationNext
Next
Next Back
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
ent
type
ment
type
ing
eating
-conditioning
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
val
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
Proportional
fan
Proportional
fan coil
Back
Back
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
MainMain
heating
air-conditioning
MainAuxiliary
air-conditioning
heating
Next
Next Back
Back
ment type
ating
-conditioning
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Auxiliary
heating
On/off
valve
Auxiliary airvalve
conditioning
Proportional
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Next
Next
Next Back
Back
Next
Add  Press the actuator configuration button 01851.2
Actuator type
Actuator type
On/off valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional valve
• 3rd Group - Radiator control
Proportional fan
3 speed fan coil
4-pipe
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display
that act as
configuration
buttons 
Select:VIMAR fan
Proportional
fan
coil
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Adjustement type
Actuator type
Main air-conditioning
On/off valve
Auxiliary heating
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
3 speed fan coil (4T)
Back
Next
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary air conditioning
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling
an error.
Proportional
val
Add  Press the actuator configuration button 01850.2
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
321
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPE FANCOIL
There are two valves so we use relay actuators 01851.2 and 01850.2.
Solenoid valve installation in fan coils with 4 pipes
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
Functional
Unit
Output
FANCOIL
VIMAR
4T
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
01851.2
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
M
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
BUS
CIRCULATION
PUMP
CIRCULATION
PUMP
NO C NC
OUT 1
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
CONF.
BUS
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
nly
tral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Important: In the Neutral Zone adjustment mode, the thermostat automatically switches
between
Actuator
type
Adjustement type
Actuator type
heating and cooling according to the set set-point, the temperature measured and considering any
Main
valveZone Range parameter (setOn/off
neutral
zoneair-conditioning
around the set point defined On/off
by the Neutral
from 1°Cvalve
to 5°C
Proportional valve
Auxiliary
Proportional valve
in 1°C
steps). heating
ype
oning
3 speed fan coil
Next
pe
speed
fan coil
For example, if the set point is set to 20°C3and
the neutral
zone range is 2°C, the thermostat will switch
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional
fan
coil zone range/2) and
the heating on if the temperature falls below
19°C (set point
– neutral
will switch on
Back
Back
NextrisesBack
Next
the
air conditioning if the temperature
above 21°C (set point + neutral
zone range/2). In this way a
band of 2°C around which the thermostat neither heats or cools is defined (thus the name neutral zone).
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary air conditioning
ning
322
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Actuator type
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR fan coil
Back
N
N
Example of installation
nt type
Important:
-The
“neutral zone” adjustment
be used only on
4-pipe systems (which can both
Adjustement
type can of course
Adjustement
type
heat and cool at the same time).
ng only
- In
the neutral zone only
adjustment mode, the
thermostat only only
allows Manual and OFF operating
Air-conditioning
Air-conditioning
modes.
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heating only
Heating only
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
ng only
Adjustement type
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
+neutral zone
Next
Back
+neutral zone
Next
nt type
• 2nd Group - Fain coil control
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
Next
Back
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the actuator configuration button
nt type
ng
Actuator type
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
On/off valve
Main heating
Auxiliary heating
The Main
controller
automatically configures all 4 functional
units air
of the
actuator 01851.2 and
the functionalvalve
Proportional
air-conditioning
Auxiliary
conditioning
unit of actuator 01850.2; no other configuration of these actuator is required.
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
The output connections of actuator 01851.2 are fixed and have the following meanings:
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Out1
= V1
In this case we must add an actuator 01851.2 and an actuator 01850.2 to the group
Next
Out2 = V2
Out3 = V3
Out4 = Hot Valve
While for actuator 01850.2 the output connection has the following meaning:
Out1 = Cold Valve
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
Add  Press the configuration button on actuator 01850.2 that acts as a hot circulation pump
In the menu Device parameters set Hot circulation pump.
Add  Press the configuration button on actuator 01850.2 that acts as a cold circulation pump
In the menu Device parameters set Cold circulation pump.
If the actuators do not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
323
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH 4-PIPE FANCOIL + 4 FLOOR HEATING PIPES (HEATING + COOLING)
The floor heating is always the main output both in winter and in summer (works in cooling mode). The
fancoil is always the auxiliary output (boost) in both seasons.
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
OUT 1
01850.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
By-me
CONF.
BUS
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
By-me
CONF.
BUS
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
Solenoid valve installation
in fan coils with 4 pipes
OUT 1
01851.2
Functional
Unit
Output
FANCOIL
VIMAR
4T
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
M
CONF.
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
pe
nly
tral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group
pe
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator
type
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat
display that
act as configuration buttons  Select:
ning
pe
NO C NC
OUT 1
Next
Back
Next
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next
324
Adjustement type
Actuator type
Actuator type
N
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
nt type
y
Heating
only
Main
heating
Main air-conditioning
oning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Main
air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
ng only
on
Heat.+aircon
on+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
+neutral
zone
Next
Back
Next Back
Example
of installationNext
Back
Next
Next
nt type
ment
type
ng
ating
-conditioning
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Actuator type
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary airvalve
conditioning
Proportional
valv
Proportional
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed fan coil
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional
fan c
Proportional fan coil
Next
Back
Back
Next
Back
Next
Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Next
ment
type
Adjustement
type
nt type
Adjustement
type
Add
Press
configuration button

y type
Heating
onlyactuator
Heating
onlythe
Actuator type
Actuator type
ment
Adjustement
type
oning
Air-conditioning
only
ng
onlyonly
Air-conditioning
only
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling
an error.
Proportional
valv
On/off valve
ating
Auxiliary heating
on
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
3
speed
fan
coil
Proportional
valve
-conditioning
Auxiliary
air
conditioning
on+neutral
zone • 3rd
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
Group
Proportional fan c
3 speed fan coil
Next Add
Back
Next display
Next
Back
Next
4-pipe
Press the areas on the thermostat
that act as
buttons 
Select:VIMAR fan
Proportional
fanconfiguration
coil

nt type
Adjustement type
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Heating
only type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
ment
type
t type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
ing only
Air-conditioning only
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
ating
g
air-conditioning
MainMain
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Heat.+aircon
Proportional
valv
Proportional
valve
-conditioning
nditioning
Auxiliary
heatingzone Proportional
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
valve
+neutral zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
3
speed
fan
coil
3
speed
fan
coil
3
speed
fan
coil
3
speed
fan
coil
Next
Back
Next
Proportional
Proportional
fan fan
coil
Proportional
Proportional
fan fan
coil coil
Back
Next Back
Next
Back
NextBack
Next
Back
Next Back
Next
Actuator type
nt type
Adjustement type
Actuator type
Add Main
Pressair-conditioning
the actuator configuration button
On/off
valve
ing
On/off
valve
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
ment
type
Actuator
type
t type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Proportional
valve
onditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
If
the
actuator
does
not
correspond
to
the
selection
made,
the
procedure
ends
by
signalling
an
error.
Proportional
Proportional
On/off
valve
ating
On/off
valve
g
Auxiliary
heating
Auxiliary
heating
3 speed fanvalve
coilvalv
3 speed
fan
coil
3
speed
fan
coilco
3
speed
fan
coil
Proportional
valve
-conditioning
valve
ditioning
Auxiliary
air conditioning Proportional
Auxiliary
air conditioning
Proportional fan
Proportional fan coil
• 4th Group
Proportional
Proportional
fan fan
coil
3 speed
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
Back
Next AddBackPress the areas on theNext
Back
4-pipe
VIMAR
4-pipe
VIMAR
fan fan
coi
Proportional
fan
coil Nextbuttons
Proportional
fanas
coil
thermostat
display
that act
configuration
Select:
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
MainMain
heating
air-conditioning
MainAuxiliary
air-conditioning
heating


Back
Back
Next Back
Next Back
Next
Next
Back
NextBack
Next
Actuator type
Actuator type
nt type
Adjustement type
Proportional valve
On/off valve
ng
Auxiliary heating
3 speed fan coil
Proportional valve
onditioning
Auxiliary air conditioning
Proportional fan co
3 speed fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR fan co
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Add  Press the actuator configuration button
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
325
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPE FANCOIL + FLOOR HEATING
In the summer the floor heating is switched off and the fancoil is the main output for cooling (using only
the cold valve). In the winter the floor heating is the main output for heating while the fancoil is the auxiliary
output for boost (using only the hot valve).
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 3
Solenoid valve installation
in fan coils with 4 pipes
OUT 1
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
Functional
Unit
Output
FANCOIL
VIMAR
4T
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
M
CONF.
BUS
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
BUS
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
nly
tral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• 2nd Group - Heating/Cooling control
ype
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
oning
Next
pe
ning
NC NO C
OUT 2
326
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Auxiliary air conditioning
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Next
Actuator type
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
N
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
nt type
y
Heating
only
Main heating
Main air-conditioning
oning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
ing only
on
Heat.+aircon
on+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
+neutral zone
Next
Back
Next Back
Example
Next
Next Backof installationNext
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
ment
type
nt type
ating
ng
-conditioning
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
On/off valve
Proportional
valv
Proportional
valve
3 speed
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Proportional
fan fan
coil
Back
Back
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
air-conditioning
MainMain
heating
heating
MainAuxiliary
air-conditioning
Next Back
Next
Back
ment type
ating
-conditioning
Actuator type
Adjustement
type
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
Auxiliary airvalve
conditioning
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Next
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next
Add 
Press the actuator
configuration button
01850.2 type
Actuator
Adjustement
type
Actuator type
Proportional
valv
On/off
valve
If the actuator
does not
correspond to the selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error.
Auxiliary
heating
3 speed fan coil
Proportional valve
Proportional fan
3 speed fan coil
4-pipe VIMAR fan
Proportional
fan
coil
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Auxiliary air conditioning
• 3rd Group - Floor heating circuit control
Adjustement type
Main air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Back
Next
Add  Press the configuration button on actuator 01850.2 and actuator 01851.2
The controller automatically configures all 4 functional units of the actuator 01851.2 and the functional
unit of actuator 01850.2; no other configuration of these actuator is required.
The output connections of actuator 01851.2 are fixed and have the following meanings:
Out1 = V1
Out2 = V2
Out3 = V3
Out4 = Hot Valve
While for actuator 01850.2 the output connection has the following meaning:
Out1 = Cold Valve
If the actuator does not correspond to the selection made, the procedure ends by signalling an error.
327
Example of installation
 AIRCON WITH HEAT PUMP (VIA THE SAME SPLIT IR DEVICE)
In the summer we use the aircon while in the winter we use the same device but in heat pump mode.
VALVE
ON/OFF
Functional Unit
SPLIT IR
Functional
Unit
Output
VALVE
ON/OFF
BELONG TO THE
SAME DEVICE
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
ype
nly
tral zone
Next
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
• Adjustement
2nd Group - Aircon type
heat pump control
ype
Adjustement type
Heating only
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Adjustement type
Actuator type
AddMain
the areas on the thermostat display
that act as configuration buttons
 Press
 Select:
heating
Main air-conditioning
On/off
valve
Main air-conditioning
nly
tral zone
Next
ype
Functional Unit
SPLIT IR
Functional
Unit
Output
328
Back
Adjustement type
Main heating
Auxiliary heating
Next
Back
Adjustement type
Auxiliary heating
Next
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator type
On/off valve
N
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
nt type
y
Heating
only
Main
heating
Main air-conditioning
oning
only
Air-conditioning
only
Main
air-conditioning
Auxiliary heating
ng only
on
Heat.+aircon
on+neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
+neutral
zone
Example
of installationNext
Next Back
Back
Next Back
Next
Next
Actuator type
On/off valve
Proportional valve
3 speed fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Actuator type
Adjustement
type
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valv
Proportional
valve
Proportional
Auxiliary air valve
conditioning
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed
fan coil
3 speed fan coil
Proportional
fan c
Proportional
fan coil
Proportional fan coil
Back
Next
Next Back
Back
Next Back
Next
Back
Next Back
Next
t type
Adjustement
type
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Add
Press
the
configuration
button on the IR interface 20584.1-19584.1-14584.1 Actuator type

Heating
only
yent type
Heating
only
Actuator type
Adjustement type
g
only
Air-conditioning
only
oning only
Air-conditioning
only to the selection made, the procedure ends by signallingProportional
If
the
actuator
does
not
correspond
an error.
valv
On/off valve
ating
Auxiliary heating
Heat.+aircon
on
Heat.+aircon
3
speed fan coil
Proportional
valve
conditioning
Auxiliary
air
conditioning
neutral
zone
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
on+neutral zone • 3r Group
Heat.+aircon+neutral
-Aircon control (cooling)zone
Proportional fan c
3 speed fan coil
Next
Back
Next Add
Back
Next display
4-pipe
Proportional
fan
coil
thermostat
that act as
configuration
buttons 
Select:VIMAR fan
 Press the areas on theNext
Back
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Actuator
type
t type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
ment
type
Adjustement
type
Actuator
type
On/off
valve
g
MainMain
air-conditioning
On/off
valve
On/off
valve
ating
air-conditioning
On/off valve
Proportional
valve
ditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valv
-conditioning
Auxiliary
heating
Proportional
valve
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil c
Proportional
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Proportional
Next
Next
Next
Back
Next Back
Back
NextBack
Back
Next Back
nt type
ment
type
ng
ating
-conditioning
t type
ment
type
g
ating
ditioning
-conditioning
Adjustement
type
Adjustement
type
air-conditioning
MainMain
heating
heating
MainAuxiliary
air-conditioning
Add
button on
the IR interface
20584.1-19584.1-14584.1
 Press the configuration
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Actuator
type
Adjustement
type
Adjustement type
Actuator type
If theAuxiliary
actuator
does
not
correspond to theOn/off
selection
made,
the procedure ends by signalling
an error. valve
Proportional
valve
Proportional
valv
heating
On/off
valve
Auxiliary
heating
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning
Proportional
valve
Auxiliary
air conditioning Proportional
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil coil
Proportional
Next
Next
Next
Back
Next
Next Back
Back
NextBack
3 speed
fan fan
coil coil
3 speed
Proportional
fan fan
coil
Proportional
4-pipe
VIMAR
fan fan
coil
4-pipe
VIMAR
Back
Back
329
Example of installation
 INTEGRATION METHODS
In this case the thermostat does not adjust the outputs, this is delegated to an external system via standard KNX messages.
Probes 1 and 2 are used to provide the external system with the ambient temperature and other information used to control the temperature in the temperature zone.
The thermostat user interface is used to control the external system and display the relative information.
In the controller menu select: Configuration  Groups  Climate  Create group
• 1st Group - Thermostat
Add  Press the areas on the thermostat display that act as configuration buttons  Select:
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Heating only
Heating only
Adjustement type
Adjustement type
Air-conditioning
only
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral
zone
Heating only
Heating only
Heat.+aircon+neutral
Integration
method
Air-conditioning only zone
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Back
Next
Back
Next
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
Integration method
- IfBack
Heating only, Heating+aircon
or Heating+aircon+neutral
following is disBack zone is selected, the
Next
Next
Aircon actuator type
Heat.
played: actuator type
Valve
Valve
Aircon actuator
Heat. actuator
type
Proportional
fan coiltype
Proportional
fan coil
3Valve
speed fan coil
3Valve
speed fan coil
Adjustement
Proportional fan coil
Proportional fantype
coil
3 speed fan coil
3 speedonly
fan coil
Heating
Back
Next
Back
Next
Air-conditioning only
Heat.+aircon
Back
Next
Back
Next
Heat.+aircon+neutral zone
- Back
If Aircon only, Heating+aircon
or Heating+aircon+neutral zone is selected, the following is disNext
zone
Next
played:
Aircon actuator type
Valve
Proportional fan coil
3 speed fan coil
e
Back
Next
Next
Select the desired option  Next; the thermostat configuration will then start.
330
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH CLIMATE CONTROLLER IN FIXED MODE
IMPORTANT: THE DIAGRAM SHOWN HERE IS PURELY INDICATIVE AND MUST BE APPROVED BY THE TECHNICAL
THERMAL STUDY.
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3
Zone
NC NO C
OUT 1
02951 20538
19538
14538
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
BUS
01851.2
Zone
02951 20538
19538
14538
BUS
Zone
02951 20538
19538
14538
OUT 1
Delivery
probe
LN
Circulation
pump
Boiler
M
Mixer
valve
Output
signaling
alarm
OUT 2
2
N L
C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
+
-
OUT 3
01465
CLIMATIC CONTROLLER
120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz
OUT 1
OUT 1,2
3,5 A 120-230 V~ µ
OUT 3 0-10 V (0)4-20 mA ε
OUT 2
OUT 3
By-me
CONF.
1
T1
2 3
1
T2
2 3
1
T3
2 3
BUS
+ -
T2
2
T3 Auxiliary input
331
Example of installation
 SYSTEM WITH CLIMATE CONTROLLER IN MODULATING MODE
IMPORTANT: THE DIAGRAM SHOWN HERE IS PURELY INDICATIVE AND MUST BE APPROVED BY THE TECHNICAL
THERMAL STUDY.
01465
C
OUT 1
N L
NC NO C
OUT 2
+
-
OUT 2
OUT 3
BUS
01465
CLIMATIC CONTROLLER
120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz
OUT 1
OUT 1,2
3,5 A 120-230 V~ µ
OUT 3 0-10 V (0)4-20 mA ε
External
probe
OUT 2
OUT 3
By-me
CONF.
1
T1
2 3
1
T2
2 3
1
T3
2 3
BUS
+ -
T1
T2
02951
OUT 1
Boiler
332
Delivery
probe
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
6. Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954.
The control unit can control up to 40 thermostats in timer-thermostat mode 16953 -16954 permitting programmed
control of up to 40 different zones. Timer-thermostat functions:
• Automatic operation: 2 separate temperature programs (one for heating and one for air-conditioning on 3 temperature levels) for each of the 40 controlled zones.
• Manual operation: temperature setting between 5.0°C and 30.0°C (heating) and between 10°C and 35°C (airconditioning).
• Timed manual operation (up to 99 hours).
• Reduction: temperature setting between 5.0°C and 30.0°C (heating) and between 10°C and 35°C (air-conditioning).
• Timed reduction (up to 99 hours).
• Antifreeze (temperature value adjustable from 0°C to 15.0°C).
• Timed off (up to 99 hours).
•Off.
• Adjusting the speed of the fan-coils with the thermostats 20513, 16953 and 14513. and from the control unit
6.1 Zone management
This paragraph describes the procedures for creating and managing the HVAC zones of the By-me system.
6.1.1 Creating an HVAC group.
Used to define the 40 HVAC zones to be controlled, by selecting the related groups.
It is firstly necessary to define the HVAC zones to be controlled, by selecting the groups involved.
First of all it is necessary to create a new group:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  HVAC control groups
Name the group using the same procedure described on page 29.
Within the group, configure a single thermostat device and at least one relay actuator; in addition, it is also
possible to configure one or more control interfaces that, for instance, will detect a window opening (via magnetic contact) and will switch off the heating/air-conditioning system (see paragraph 5.2.1).
The configuration procedure is identical to that used in the Automation groups menu; to configure the thermostat press button A on the device (the first one on the left) thus displaying the CNF icon blinking.
N.B. It is recommended to assign short names for the rooms to control.
6.1.2 Creating an HVAC zone
From the main menu move into the HVAC menu
HVAC  Zone management  Add
• New zone index (00-40); set the number that unambiguously identifies the zone and touch
confirm.
Next to
• Group association; select, from the list of HVAC groups, the group to associate with the zone just created.
If there are no HVAC groups available to be able to be associated with the zone, a screen will be displayed
with only the --- icon.
333
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
Therefore, to create a new zone, it is first necessary to create at least another HVAC group.
Touch
lastly Next to confirm; the control unit will confirm the operation.
6.1.3 Associating an HVAC group to a zone already configured
Used to change the association of the groups with zones previously configured.
HVAC  Setup  Zone management  Select the HVAC zone  Settings  Associated group 
Select the HVAC group to associate with the zone  Set
In this case too, if there are no HVAC groups available to be able to be associated with the zone, a screen will
be displayed with only the --- icon.
If the desired HVAC group is already associated with another zone, it is first necessary to cancel this association eliminating the corresponding zone.
Vice versa, if the group has not yet been created, it is first necessary to create the HVAC group.
The control unit confirms the operation and the display again shows the list of registered zones.
6.1.4 Zone activation.
Afterwards it is necessary to activate control of the zone with the control unit.
HVAC  Setup  Zone management  Select the HVAC zone  Settings  Central  management
Confirm with Set and save the setting by touching
zone management.
Save; the control unit shows the screen for HVAC
Selecting local deactivates control over the zone by the control unit; this zone can therefore be controlled only
locally with the relevant thermostat.
6.1.5 Removing a zone
Used to remove the selected HVAC zone.
HVAC  Setup  Zone management  Select the HVAC zone to remove  Remove zone  Yes
The control unit confirms the deletion has been completed.
6.2 Zone Settings
This paragraph describes the procedures for setting the operating parameters of the various HVAC zones.
6.2.1 Heating or air-conditioning mode.
Used to set the operating mode of the system, making it possible to select the operating mode, for each zone,
for either heating (winter period) or air-conditioning (summer period).
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the HVAC zone  Operation
Set the desired operation by selecting Heating or Air-conditioning and confirm with Set; after this operation
touch Save.
The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
N.B. When changing from Heating to Air-Conditioning mode and vice versa, the operating mode changes
automatically to OFF.
334
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
6.2.2 Temperature differential.
Used to set the temperature differential of the system, and personalize it for each zone.
The temperature differential is the difference between the set temperature and the actual temperature of
switching the system on or off. Adjusting the temperature differential to the type of system avoids continual
switching on and off; high thermal inertia systems (for example systems with cast-iron radiators) need a low
temperature differential, while low thermal inertia systems (for example fan heaters) need a high value.
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the HVAC zone  Temperature differential [°C]
Enter the desired value (from 0.1 to 1°C) and confirm with Set; at the end of the operation touch Save.
The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
Example.
If the ambient temperature is set to 20°C and the temperature differential is set to 0.3°C, the system will come
on when the ambient temperature falls to 19.7°C and will go off when it reaches 20.3°C (in Heating mode).
6.2.3 Normal or protected operation.
The thermostats (Eikon 20513-20514, Arké 19513-19514, Idea 16953-16954, Plana 14153-14514) are used
for local control (zone by zone) by the user. If the operating mode is set to “protected”, thermostat control is
limited to switching off the system and setting the set-point within a pre-defined time, in order to prevent any
unauthorized operations.
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the HVAC zone  Protection
Set the desired operation by selecting Off or On and confirm with Set; after this operation touch Save.
The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
The thermostat display will now show the padlock symbol.
N.B.
• When changing from “Normal” to “Protected” mode and vice versa, the operating mode changes automatically to OFF.
• The reference set-point must be set with the control unit.
As regards the normal or protected operation of the thermostat according to the selected mode, see the
the OPERATING MODE table on the instructions sheet of art. 20513, 16953, 14513.
6.2.4 Range of protection
If protected operation is set (see previous paragraph) it is necessary to define the range of protection (values
from ±2 to ±5).
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the HVAC zone  Protection range [±°C]
Select the desired value and confirm with Set; at the end of the operation touch Save.
The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
6.2.5 Type of system.
The thermostats for controlling the fan coils 16953 are used to manage the fan coils via the temperature
control system.
These climate control devices need a control system to govern the speed of the fan and the opening of the
valves for hot water (heating) or cold water (air-conditioning) circulation.
335
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
With just one type of climate control (heating or air-conditioning), the plumbing system is composed of
two pipes, one for delivery and one for return.
With two types of climate control (heating and air-conditioning), the plumbing system is composed of four
pipes, one for delivery and one for return for each function.
The main circulation pump/valve must be controlled with the actuator 01850.2 and this must be associated
with all the temperature zones (that is it must be configured in all the climate control groups).
On creating the first group the operating mode must be set as circulation pump (it suffices to do this only on
the first climate control group created).
The following figures illustrate the most commonly used types of system (2 pipes and 4 pipes) and the necessary steps for optimal operation.
SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPES - 1 ZONE
01851.2
OUT 1: FAN COIL SPEED V1
OUT 2: FAN COIL SPEED V2
OUT 3: FAN COIL SPEED V3
OUT 4 VALVE CONTROL
M
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
16A 120-230V
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
01851.2
336
BUS
+ -
OUT 1 OUT 4
OUT 2
OUT 3
16953
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPES - 4 ZONES
M
01851.2
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
NC NO C
OUT 3
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
Zone 1
OUT 3
OUT 2
16A 120-230V
By-me
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 4
C NO NC
16953
OUT 4
CONF.
BUS
+ -
Zone 1
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 1
Zone 2
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
16953
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
BUS
+ -
Zone 2
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 1
Zone 3
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
16953
BUS
+ -
OUT 2
Zone 3
01850.2
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 4
C NO NC
OUT 4
CONF.
OUT 1
Zone 4
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
OUT 4
C NO NC
OUT 2
BUS
+ -
NO C NC
OUT 1
16953
OUT 1
01850.2
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
Zone 4
CONF.
BUS
+ -
OUT
N
L
337
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPES - 1 ZONE
01851.2
OUT 1: FAN COIL SPEED V1
OUT 2: FAN COIL SPEED V2
OUT 3: FAN COIL SPEED V3
OUT 4 VALVE CONTROL. "HOT"
01850.2
M
OUT: VALVE CONTROL “COLD”
SET PARAMETER “Cold Water Recirculation Pump”
N.B. OUT 4 OF 01851.2 SWITCHES OVER ONLY IF
NC NO C
OUT 1
THE THERMOSTAT IS IN HEATING MODE (IT WILL
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
CONTROL THE “HOT” VALVE OF THE FAN COIL)
16A 120-230V
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
NO C NC
OUT 1
CONF.
16953
OUT 4
C NO NC
N
230 V~
L
OUT
OUT 1
01850.2
BUS
+ -
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
WHILE OUT OF 01850.2 SWITCHES OVER ONLY IF
BUS
+ -
01851.2
THE THERMOSTAT IS IN AIR-CONDITIONING MODE (IT
01850.2
WILL CONTROL THE “COLD” VALVE OF THE FAN COIL)
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPES - 2 ZONES
M
NC NO C
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
OUT 1
01851.2
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
N
230 V~
L
OUT
NO C NC
OUT 1
CONF.
16953
OUT 4
C NO NC
OUT 1
01850.2
BUS
+ -
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
CONF.
BUS
+ -
HOT WATER 2 PIPE
CIRCUIT
01851.2
ROOM 1
01850.2
COLD WATER 2 PIPE
CIRCUIT
M
NO C NC
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 1
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
By-me
01850.2
By-me
NC NO C
OUT 2
01851.2
OUT 1
NC NO C
OUT 3
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
16A 120-230V
OUT 4
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
16953
OUT 4
C NO NC
NO C NC
OUT 1
OUT 1
01850.2
NO C NC
OUT 1
CONF.
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
N
230 V~
L
OUT
OUT 1
01850.2
BUS
+ -
By-me
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
By-me
CONF.
CONF.
BUS
+ -
OUT
ROOM 2
CONF.
BUS
+ -
01850.2
OUT
01850.2
01850.2
N
L
N
L
TECHNICAL ROOM
338
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
16A
120-230 V~
BUS
+ -
01851.2
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
For the system with 4 pipes - 2 zones, the following applies:
ROOM 1 AND ROOM 2.
01851.2
OUT 1: FAN COIL SPEED V1
OUT 2: FAN COIL SPEED V2
OUT 3: FAN COIL SPEED V3
OUT 4 VALVE CONTROL. "HOT"
01850.2
OUT: VALVE CONTROL “COLD”
SET PARAMETER “Cold Water Recirculation Pump”
WARNING. OUT 4 OF 01851.2 SWITCHES OVER ONLY IF THE THERMOSTAT IS IN HEATING MODE (IT WILL
CONTROL THE “HOT” VALVE OF THE FAN COIL) WHILE OUT OF 01850.2 SWITCHES OVER ONLY IF THE
THERMOSTAT IS IN AIR-CONDITIONING MODE (IT WILL CONTROL THE “COLD” VALVE OF THE FAN COIL)
TECHNICAL ROOM.
THE ACTUATOR 01850.2 THAT CONTROLS THE HOT WATER 2 PIPE CIRCUIT MUST BE CONFIGURED IN ALL THE HVAC
GROUPS; SET PARAMETER “Hot Water Recirculation Pump”.
THE ACTUATOR 01850.2 THAT CONTROLS THE COLD WATER 2 PIPE CIRCUIT MUST BE CONFIGURED IN ALL THE HVAC
GROUPS; SET PARAMETER “Cold Water Recirculation Pump”.
Relay actuator operating mode for a 2-pipe system.
• For each HVAC zone, install art. 01851.2 using outputs 1, 2 and 3 to control the fan coil, and output 4 for
the valve.
• For the main circulation pump/valve, install art.01850.2 selecting mode “Hot Water Recirculation Pump”.
Relay actuator operating mode for a 4-pipe system.
For each HVAC zone, install art. 01851.2 using outputs 1, 2 and 3 to control the fan coil, and output 4 for the
“hot” valve; then install art. 01850.2 and use its outlet for the “cold” valve.
• For the “hot” delivery main circulation pump/valve, use art.01850.2 selecting mode “Hot Water Recirculation
Pump”.
• For the “cold” delivery main circulation pump/valve, use art.01850.2 selecting mode “Cold Water Recirculation
Pump”.
If the HVAC zone is associated with a thermostat 20513,16953 or 14513, the control unit automatically suggests the parameter setting that permits selecting the type of system with two or four pipes.
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the HVAC zone  Type of system
Select the type of desired system (2 pipes or 4 pipes) and confirm with Set; at the end of this operation touch
Save. The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
339
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
6.2.6 Select temperature zone to be displayed.
Used to set the zone to be displayed on the control unit when accessing the HVAC menu.
HVAC  Setup  Zone settings  Select the desired zone  Monitor zone  Select
activated or deactivated
Confirm with Set and lastly touch
Save.
The control unit confirms the operation performed and goes back to the settings for the HVAC zones.
After defining the temperature zone the HVAC menu will be displayed as illustrated in the following example:
Climate
Zone 23
Thermostat 23 Library
Menu
Setup
- Touching
Menu displays the control unit’s main menu;
- Touching
Clima
Setup Zona
displays
the zone parameters;
23
Termostato 23 Biblioteca
Clima
- Touching
Zona 23
displays
the thermostat operation mode (in this case Automatic);
Setup
Menu
Termostato 23 Biblioteca
- Touching
Menu
Setup
manually forces the current temperature set point independently of the current operating mode
6.3 Operating modes.
This section describes the system operating modes that can be selected: Off, Timed Off, Antifreeze, Reduction,
Timed Reduction, Manual, Timed Manual, Automatic.
Note.
If a Timed mode is selected, the control unit stores the previous mode and returns to this mode after the set time
has elapsed.
HVAC
Clima
Zona 23
Termostato 23 Biblioteca
 Select, moving
Touching
to the left (<) or to the right (>), the zone in which you want to set the mode
displays
the list with the following operating modes:
Setup
Menu
• Automatic: used to set the temperature according to a pre-selected program in memory.
• Override: this option, which can be used when the timer-thermostat is operating on Automatic with daily or
weekly programming, is used for temporarily changing a previously set temperature value within the program.
This function is useful when, at a certain time, the desired temperature is different to the programmed one; in
particular, it is possible to define a different temperature value to the one set in the program and for a time interval
that can also be set.
• Manual: used to set the temperature according to the manually set point;
340
Climate control using the thermostats Idea 16953-16954
• Timed Manual: used to set manual mode for the desired period;
• Reduction: (night reduction/energy saving), used to set a lower temperature (heating) or higher temperature (airconditioning) than the one in the automatic temperature control program, by selecting a value between 5°C and
30°C (heating) and between 10°C and 35°C (air-conditioning). The temperature is set according to the set point
for temperature reduction.
• Timed reduction: used to set the reduced temperature for the desired period;
• Off: used to switch off the system;
• Timed Off: used to switch off the system for the desired period;
• Antifreeze: used to set a minimum temperature level to avoid damage to pipework or prevent the temperature
from falling below a safety level;
N.B.:
• It is not possible to pass from one type of operation to the timed equivalent.
• The Antifreeze function is not managed in Heating mode.
• Only the Off, Manual and Timed Manual functions are permitted in Protected mode..
6.3.1 Setting the speed of the fan coils
The fan coil speed setting is made using the thermostat 16953 and the procedures are similar to those described in par. 4.3.1 of this section.
6.3.2 Forced switch-off.
The procedures are similar to those described in par. 4.3.2 of this section.
6.4 Programming.
The procedures are similar to those described in par. 4.4 of this section.
341
342
Section
Plug&Play Home Automation System
343
344
Table of Contents
1. General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
2. Devices and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
3. Configuration in the control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
3.1 Functional block selection and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
3.2 Devices and their functional blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
3.2.1 Configuration of Module with 9 inputs and 8 outputs 01470. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
3.2.2 Configuration of Module with 3 digital inputs and 3 outputs to control LED 01475. . . . . 352
3.2.3 Configuration of Module with 2 digital inputs, 1 roller shutter output and 2 outputs to control LED 01476 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.2.4 Configuration of Module with 2 digital inputs, 1 relay output and 2 outputs to control LED
01477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
3.3 Setting/changing the parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
3.3.1 Functional blocks and their parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
3.4 Configuration of controls and actuators on multiple groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
4. APPENDIX - Operation of actuators for art. 01470, 01471, 01476, 01477. . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
345
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics
The products in the Plug&Play home automation range offer a closed package of pre-configured solutions that
enable converting a traditional system into a small home automation system dedicated to managing lights and
roller shutters. These devices can be installed in "star point" or "distributed" systems, in existing buildings or ones
under renovation, in residential and small commercial premises.
An installation with Plug&Play products can then be integrated in the By-me system allowing the addition of all
the other functions available in the By-me range (supervision, comfort, security and energy efficiency); to achieve
this integration, the Plug&Play products need to be configured via the control unit or the EasyTool Professional
software, thus with no pre-configuration.
346
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The devices that enable the Plug&Play home automation system functions are as follows:
01470: Module with 9 inputs and 8 preprogrammed outputs, programmable digital inputs for potential-free contacts, N/O relay outputs 16 A 120-230 V~ 50/60 Hz programmable with control function
for lights, roller shutters with slat orientation, push-buttons for local
control, By-me home automation system, installation on DIN rails
(60715 TH35), occupies 6 modules size 17.5 mm.
01475: Module with 3 programmable digital inputs for potential-free
contacts, 3 outputs for LED control, By-me home automation system, flush mounting (retrofit).
01476: Module with 2 programmable digital inputs for potential-free
contacts, 1 output for a roller shutter with slat orientation with relay for
motor cos φ 0.6 2 A 120-230 V~, 2 outputs for LED control, By-me
home automation system, flush mounting (retrofit).
01477: Module with 2 programmable digital inputs for potential-free
contacts, 1 lights control output with N/O relay 10 A 120-230 V~
50/60 Hz, 2 outputs for LED control, By-me home automation system, flush mounting (retrofit).
347
Configuration on the control unit
3. Configuration on the control unit
The main task to perform in order to configure the basic home automation system control devices on the control
unit is to create functional groups (sets of functional blocks that need to work together) to which they are assigned.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups
Climate  Create group  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured ones; tap Next to
confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group and
the zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by touching Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address
and number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove Group menu).
3.1 Functional block selection and configuration.
To configure the various functional blocks within a group, carry out the following:
1. Tap
Setup  Configuration  Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional block to configure.
3. Once you have chosen the group, tap
control unit.
Associated devices
 Add; the procedure is started on the
4. Select the functional block to be included in the group.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration is complete.
6. The control unit indicates the functional block that has just been configured.
7. Proceed with the configuration of other functional blocks by repeating point 4 or tap
Backto exit.
IMPORTANT: The scenes have a group depth of 4; this means that the same functional block can be
enrolled in at most 4 scenes.
While saving scenes, the LEDs connected to the LED outputs of devices 01475, 01476, 01477 flash if
they are involved in the scene.
348
Configuration on the control unit
3.2 Devices and their functional blocks
Description of the functional blocks
PUSH-BUTTON
• Button: to send ON and OFF messages over the bus as described in the “input behaviour” parameter. It is
only with this functional block that traditional switches can be connected, in addition to buttons.
• Dimmer control: to control dimmer actuators.
• Roller shutter control: to control the functional block for roller shutters with no slats (as each command is
the opposite of the previous one, each time you press and hold down the up/down movement of the roller
shutters will change).
• Scene control: to call up and save a scene.
• Send value: to send the value selected during configuration on the closure of the input.
• Sleep: to call up the sleep function in the speaker system.
• Audio monitoring: audio monitoring control (if associated with a microphone module device).
ROCKER BUTTON
• Rocker button: to send ON and OFF commands on the same group upon pressing input 1 or 2.
• Dimmer control: to control dimmer actuators.
• Roller shutter control: to control the roller shutter functional block (normal or with slats).
• Volume OnOff: on/off and volume control for speaker system.
• Sleep: to call up the sleep function in the speaker system.
• Ch+/Track+: ch+/track+ control for speaker system.
ACTUATOR
• Actuator: to manage a lights actuator.
This functional block receives the following command requests: load on/off, timed load switch on, saving and
recalling scenes.
• Circulation pump relay: for managing the circulation pump.
ROLLER SHUTTER ACTUATOR
• Roller shutter actuator: to manage the roller shutter.
• Blinds: to manage the roller shutter + slat
These functional blocks receive the following command requests: opening/closing roller shutters, rotating
slats, setting the roller shutter height and slat rotation values, saving and recalling scenes, forcing via logic
module.
349
Configuration on the control unit
Article
Functional
block
Module with
9 inputs and 8
outputs
art. 01470
Module with 3 digital
inputs and 3 outputs to
control LED
art. 01475
Module with 2 digital
inputs, 1 roller shutter
output and 2 outputs to
control LED
art. 01476
Module with 2 digital
inputs, 1 relay output
and 2 outputs to control
LED
art. 01477
Actuator

Roller shutter actuator

Blinds actuator

Push-button




Scene control




Rocker button




Push-button and Rocker
button
dimmer control,
volume On/Off




Send value




Push-button and Rocker
button
roller shutter control




ch+/track+




Circulation pump

Sleep push-button and rocker
button, audio monitoring
push-button




350



Configuration on the control unit
3.2.1 Configuration of Module with 9 inputs and 8 outputs 01470
Each input can be configured as a push-button and adjacent inputs (IN1+IN2, IN3+IN4, IN5+IN6, IN7+IN8) can
be grouped for the rocker the function.
The relays can be used singularly or in pairs (OUT1+OUT2, OUT3+OUT4, OUT5+OUT6, OUT7+OUT8) to create
the roller shutter outputs; relay 8 can be used for the circulation pump.
The rocker buttons and input functional blocks have a group depth of 1 (that is, they can belong to one
group only).
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• For each single relay, you can select the functional block:
- actuator
• For the pairs of relays (relay 1+ relay 2, relay 3 + relay 4, relay 5 + relay 6, relay 7 + relay 8) you can select
one of the following functional blocks:
- roller shutter actuator
- blinds actuator
Caution: After installation you need to open and close each roller shutter completely to carry out the
calibration process.
• For relay 8 you can choose the following functional block:
- circulation pump relay
• For the push-button logic function you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- push-button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- scene control
- send value
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- audio monitoring (command for speaker system)
• For the rocker button logic function (input 1+2, input 3+4, input 5+6, input 7+8) you can select one of the
following functional blocks (connect a double button such as art. 20066-19066-14066 and art. 2006219062-14062):
- rocker button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- Volume On/Off (volume control for speaker system)
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- ch+/track+ (command for speaker system)
Selecting the functional block to be configured:
After pressing the configuration button, before the red LED lights up, choose one of the following options:
• Briefly press the OUT1 button to configure output 1, the OUT2 button to configure output 2, and so on; then
the corresponding LED will switch on.
• Briefly press the OUT1 button + OUT2 button to configure the roller shutter output 1, the OUT3 button + OUT4
button to configure the roller shutter output 2 and so on; then the corresponding LEDs will switch on.
• Press and hold down the OUT1 button to configure input 1 as a push-button, press and hold the OUT2 button
to configure input 2 as a push-button and so on until input and button OUT8; the corresponding LED will blink.
351
Configuration on the control unit
• Press and hold down the OUT1 button + OUT2 button to configure inputs 1 and 2 together as a rocker button, press and hold down the OUT3 button + OUT4 button to configure inputs 3 and 4 together as a rocker
button and so on to the OUT7 button + OUT8 button to configure inputs 7 and 8 together as a rocker button;
the corresponding LED will blink.
• Briefly press the button
to configure relay 8 as a relay for the circulation pump; the corresponding LED
will light up.
• Press and hold down button
to configure input 9 as a push-button; the corresponding LED will blink.
After a pause of a few seconds the device enters configuration mode for the selected functional block and
the start of configuration is signalled by the red LED. At the end of this operation the red LED will go out.
SCENES.
The actuator can belong to multiple scenes and, for each one of them, save the status (ON or OFF) to retrieve
when activating the scene itself.
The roller shutter actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter.
The blinds actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter and the angle of the slats.
3.2.2 Configuration of Module with 3 digital inputs and 3 outputs to control LED 01475
The functional blocks that the device makes available comprise: 3 push-buttons or 1 rocker button + 1 pushbutton.
The push-button and rocker button functional blocks have a group depth of 1 (that is, they can belong
to one group only).
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• For the push-button logic function you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- push-button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- scene control
- send value
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- audio monitoring (command for speaker system)
• For the rocker button logic function (composed of inputs 1 and 2) you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- rocker button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- Volume On/Off (volume control for speaker system)
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- ch+/track+ (command for speaker system)
Selecting the functional block to be configured:
Press the configuration button to select the first functional block; keeping it pressed cycles through the list of
functional blocks.
The green LED indicates the current functional block:
• 1 flash for functional block button 1;
• 2 flashes for functional block button 2;
352
Configuration on the control unit
• 3 flashes for functional block button 3;
• LED on steady for the rocker button functional block.
After a pause of 3 s the device enters configuration mode for the selected functional block and the start of
configuration is signalled by the red LED coming on and the green LED going out. At the end of this operation the red LED will go out.
SCENES.
The push-buttons and rocker buttons can belong to several different scenes and, for each of them, save the
state of the associated LED.
During the scene identification phase the LEDs flash (only if actually connected to the output)
3.2.3 Configuration of Module with 2 digital inputs, 1 roller shutter output and 2 outputs to
control LED 01476
The functional blocks that the device makes available comprise: 2 push-buttons or 1 rocker button, 1 roller
shutter actuator.
The push-button and rocker button functional blocks have a group depth of 1 (that is, they can belong
to one group only).
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• For the push-button logic function you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- push-button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- scene control
- send value
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- audio monitoring (command for speaker system)
• For the rocker button logic function (composed of inputs 1 and 2) you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- rocker button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- Volume On/Off (volume control for speaker system)
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- ch+/track+ (command for speaker system)
• For the roller shutter you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- roller shutter actuator
- blinds actuator
Caution: After installation you need to open and close each roller shutter completely to carry out the
calibration process.
Selecting the functional block to be configured:
Press the configuration button to select the first functional block; keeping it pressed cycles through the list of
functional blocks.
The green LED indicates the current functional block:
353
Configuration on the control unit
• 1 flash for functional block button 1;
• 2 flashes for functional block button 2;
• 3 flashes for the rocker button functional block;
• LED on steady for the roller shutter actuator functional block.
After a pause of a few seconds the device enters configuration mode for the selected functional block and
the start of configuration is signalled by the red LED coming on and the green LED going out. At the end of
this operation the red LED will go out.
SCENES.
The push-buttons and rocker buttons can belong to several different scenes and, for each of them, save the
state of the associated LED.
During the scene identification phase the LEDs flash (only if actually connected to the output).
The roller shutter actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter.
The blinds actuator can save and recall the height of the roller shutter and the angle of the slats.
3.2.4 Configuration of Module with 2 digital inputs, 1 relay output and 2 outputs to control
LED 01477
The functional blocks that the device makes available comprise: 2 push-buttons or 1 rocker button, 1 relay.
The push-button and rocker button functional blocks have a group depth of 1 (that is, they can belong
to one group only).
FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
• For the push-button logic function you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- push-button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- scene control
- send value
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- audio monitoring
• For the rocker button logic function (composed of inputs 1 and 2) you can select one of the following functional blocks:
- rocker button
- dimmer control
- roller shutter control
- Volume On/Off (volume control for speaker system)
- sleep (command for speaker system)
- ch+/track+ (command for speaker system)
• For the relay, you can select the functional block: actuator.
Selecting the functional block to be configured:
Press the configuration button to select the first functional block; keeping it pressed cycles through the list of
functional blocks.
The green LED indicates the current functional block:
• 1 flash for functional block button 1;
354
Configuration on the control unit
• 2 flashes for functional block button 2;
• 3 flashes for the rocker button functional block;
• LED on steady for the actuator functional block.
After a pause of 3 s the device enters configuration mode for the selected functional block and the start of
configuration is signalled by the red LED coming on and the green LED going out. At the end of this operation the red LED will go out.
SCENES.
The push-buttons and rocker buttons can belong to several different scenes and, for each of them, save the
state of the associated LED.
During the scene identification phase the LEDs flash (only if actually connected to the output).
The actuator can belong to multiple scenes and, for each one of them, save the status (ON or OFF) to retrieve
when activating the scene itself.
3.3 Setting/changing the parameters.
Device parameters can be set and/or modified in order to customize operation to adapt the system to the various installation requirements.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Select the group by scrolling
ated devices  Select the functional block by scrolling
through the list  Associ-
through the list  Device parameters
3.3.1 Functional blocks and their parameters
Description of the parameters
ACTUATOR
 On and off delay (they are delay times that can be set for actuating the On and Off request): from 0 s to 12
h with default value 0 s.
 ON time duration for one-position stable operation (this is the activation time for one-position stable operation): from 1 s to 12 h with default value 30 s.
 Warning time (this is a time that is added to the activation time of the one-position stable actuator. At the
end of the activation time the relay switches off for 0.5 s and then switches back on for the warning time):
from 0 s to 12 h with default value 0 s.
 Output status at power on and output status at power down (this enables setting the actuator when
switching off and upon restoring power respectively): ON/OFF/Unchanged with default value "Unchanged".
 Operation (this enables setting the operation of the actuator): one-position stable/two-position stable with
default value "two-position stable".
 Feeedback group (this enables setting the group on which to send the actuator status to align the LEDs of
the commands): for details see par. 3.4
ROLLER SHUTTER AND BLINDS ACTUATOR
 Up and down time (these are the roller shutter up and down times): 10 s to 1 h with default value 180 s.
 Full slat rotation time: from 500 ms to 5 s with default value 2 s.
 Behaviour at power on (this enables setting whether when power is restored the roller shutter opens, closes,
remains in the current position or you can choose the height of the roller shutter and the tilt of the slats): all
down, all up, no action, default position. Default value no "action".
355
Configuration on the control unit
 Position of the roller shutter at power on (enables setting the position of the roller shutter when power is
restored): from 0 to 100% with default value 50%.
 Scene recall execution delay (this enables delaying execution of the command so as not to actuate all the
roller shutters at once): from 0 s to 250 s with default value 0 s.
 Command execution delay: from 0 s to 250 s with default value 0 s.
 Tilt of the slats at power on (enables setting the position of the slat when power is restored): from 0 to 100%
with default value 50%.
 Position on forcing (this enables setting the behaviour of the roller shutter upon the forcing request): all down,
all up, fixed, preset position with default value "fixed." It is necessary to observe the value set by the "roller
shutter position on forcing" and "slat tilt on forcing" parameters.
 Position on end of forcing (this enables setting the behaviour of the roller shutter at the end of forcing): all
down, all up, fixed, preset position with default value "fixed." It is necessary to observe the value set by the
"roller shutter position on forcing" and "slat tilt on forcing" parameters; it returns to the previous value with
the request for forcing.
 Roller shutter position on forcing (can be used in the “position on forcing” and “position on end of forcing”
parameters): from 0 to 100% with default value 50%.
 Slat tilt on forcing (can be used in the “position on forcing” and “position on end of forcing” parameters):
from 0 to 100% with default value 50%.
PUSH-BUTTON AND ROCKER BUTTON
 Command input report: normal push-button ON when closing, OFF when opening, reversed push-button
OFF when closing, ON when opening, toggle on the rising edge, toggle on the falling edge, toggle on both
edges (to be used when a conventional switch is connected to the input), only ON ON when closing, only
OFF OFF when closing. Default value "Toggle on the rising edge".
 Enable scene saving (this parameter is for the scene recall button that enables choosing whether, for pressing and holding, the push-button sends a request for saving the current scene). Default value "Disabled".
 Long press time: from 0.5 s to 30 s with default value 0.5 s.
 Short/long press behaviour: normal or reversed with default value "normal."
 Up/Down orientation:
- (ON when closing input 1 and OFF when closing input 2 or vice versa).
- valid only for the dimmer control (ON and up when closing input 1 and OFF and down when closing input
2 or vice versa).
- valid only for the roller shutter push-button (roller shutter up when long closing input 1 and roller shutter
down when long closing input 2 or vice versa).
- ch+ when closing input 1 and track+ when closing input 2 or vice versa.
 Output value (the value selected with this parameter is sent when the input closes): from 0 to 100% with
default value 0%.
 LED control:
- For the push-button, for the dimmer control push-button, for the sleep and audio monitoring pushbutton: Normal = LED on if associated load active and off if load off; Reversed = LED off if associated load
active and on if load off; always on; Disabled = always off.
- For the roller shutter push-button, for the scene control push-button and for the send value push-button:
Normal = LED on for 3 s when closing the input; Reversed = LED off for 3 s when closing the input; always
on; Disabled = always off.
356
Configuration on the control unit
- For the rocker button, for the dimmer control rocker button, for the sleep and ch+/track+ rocker button:
Normal = output 1 LED on if associated load active and off if load off; Reversed = output 1 LED off if associated load active and on if load off; always on; Disabled = always off. In the Normal and Reversed cases, the
LED of output 2 is inverted with respect to output 1
- For the roller shutter rocker button: Normal = output 1 LED on for 3 s when closing the input 1; Reversed
= output 1 LED off for 3 s when closing the input 1; always on; Disabled = always off.
N.B.: For the rocker button, if using a single LED, it is necessary to connect the latter to both outputs to get
the closing feedback of both inputs.
CIRCULATION PUMP
 On delay: default 0 s.
 Off delay: default 0 s.
 Valve control (enables selecting whether to control the hot or cold valve). Default value "heating valve".
Functional blocks
Parameter
Command input
report
Push-button
Dimmer
control and
roller shutter
push-button
Scene
control
Send value
Push-button
sleep and
audio monitoring
Dimmer control,
On/Off rocker
button
Volume and roller
shutter

Enable
scene saving

Time
long press


Output value


Orientation
rocker button
LED control
Rocker button, sleep and
ch+/track+
rocker button



Operation*








* The "Operation" parameter can only be used when there is the speaker system (thus for the sleep, ch+/track+,
volume On/Off functional blocks).
N.B.: For art. 01470 there is no LED Control parameter.
357
Configuration on the control unit
Functional blocks
Parameter
Actuator
On and off delay

On duration for one-position stable operation

Warning period

Output status at power on and at power down

Operation

Up and down time
Roller shutter
actuator
Blinds actuator


Full slat rotation time


Scene control execution delay


Command execution delay


Behaviour at power ON


Roller shutter position at power on


Slat angle at power on

Position on forcing


Position on end of forcing


Roller shutter position on forcing


Slat angle on forcing
Valve check
358
Pump
for circulation


Configuration on the control unit
3.4 Configuration of controls and actuators on multiple groups
For articles 01470, 01471, 01475, 01476 and 01477, the command group depth is equal to 1 while for the
actuators it is equal to 4; an actuator can then belong to 4 groups and 4 different scenes.
SIMPLE GROUP
A simple example of a command for a relay actuator is shown in Fig. 1 where a command sends a toggle request to a relay actuator and receives feedback on the latter's status.
feedback
COMMAND
On/Off
On/Off
RELAY
ACTUATOR
feedback
Fig. 1
GROUP DEPTH ON THE ACTUATORS
Fig. 2 shows the interaction between two relay actuators configured in a group with its own command and a
second group with a command that switches multiple loads on/off simultaneously
feedback1
1
feedback2
2
COMMAND
1
COMMAND
2
On/Off1
On/Off1
On/Off3
On/Off2
RELAY
ACTUATOR 1
On/Off2
RELAY
On/Off3 ACTUATOR 2
feedback1
feedback2
3
feed
back3
COMMAND
3
On/Off3
Fig. 2
359
Configuration on the control unit
• On creating group 1:
- the relay actuator 1 is associated with the command 1
- the actuator output is given the address that indicates the status of the actuator (feedback 1)
• On creating group 2:
- the relay actuator 2 is associated with the command 2
- the actuator output is given the address that indicates the status of the actuator (feedback 2)
• On creating group 3:
- both relay actuators are associated with the command of group 3
At this stage, for each actuator, you can set the desired feedback group, ie towards which command the
information on the state of the actuator is sent. In this case actuator 1 can send feedback to command 1 or
to command 3, actuator 2 can send feedback to command 2 or to command 3.
Caution: If a group contains many relay actuators, it is not necessary to leave the feedback active on more
than one actuator so as not to burden the bus by sending repeated messages (see Fig. 3).
On/Off
feedback
COMMAND
On/Off
On/Off
feedback
RELAY
ACTUATOR 1
On/Off
RELAY
ACTUATOR 1
feedback
feedback
RELAY
ACTUATOR 2
Fig. 3
GROUP DEPTH ON THE COMMAND
Fig. 4 illustrates an example of a configuration that is not feasible because a command cannot activate/deactivate two different groups; that command cannot send a request for activation and deactivation on On/Off1
and On/Off2.
360
Appendix
1
On/Off1
feedback1
feedback2
COMMAND
feedback1
RELAY
ACTUATOR 1
On/Off1
On/Off2
On/Off2
RELAY
ACTUATOR 2
feedback2
2
Fig. 4
4. APPENDIX - Operation of actuators for art. 01470, 01471, 01476, 01477
This section graphically illustrates the operation of roller shutter and relay actuators depending on the settings
made in the configuration phase and on their parameters.
RELAY ACTUATOR
• One-position stable with ON delay
On duration
ACTIVATION
On delay
DEACTIVATION
Command
On
361
Appendix
• One-position stable with ON and OFF delay
On duration
ACTIVATION
On delay
Off delay
Command
On
DEACTIVATION
Command
Off
• Two-position stable with ON and OFF delay
ACTIVATION
On delay
Off delay
Command
On
DEACTIVATION
Command
Off
• Behaviour of one-position stable actuator for POWER DOWN/UP
On duration
ACTIVATION
On delay=0
DEACTIVATION
Command
On
362
Power
down
Power
up
Appendix
• Behaviour of two-position stable actuator for POWER DOWN/UP
ACTIVATION
The state depends on the
parameter
"output status at power down"
On delay=0
Command
On
Power
down
The state depends on the
parameter
"output status at power up"
Power
up
ROLLER SHUTTER ACTUATOR
• Request to raise the roller shutter and later on a request to lower it.
Up time
Down time
UP
ROLLER
SHUTTER
DOWN
ROLLER
SHUTTER
UP request
DOWN request
• Request to raise the roller shutter and later on a request to lower it while it is raising. The "command execution
delay" parameter is set to a value other than 0.
Up time
UP
ROLLER
SHUTTER
DOWN
ROLLER
SHUTTER
Interlock
500 ms
Command execution
delay >0
Request
UP
Down time
Command execution
delay >0
Request
DOWN
363
Appendix
• Request for positioning the roller shutter at a certain value (this case is similar also in the case of calling up
a scene).
ROLLER SHUTTER
POSITIONING
RESET
SLAT ANGLE
Interlock
500 ms
Roller shutter
height request
• Behaviour of the actuator in the event of close slat rotation requests (the "command execution delay" parameter is always null for the slats).
Rotation time/10
ROTATION
SLAT
Slat rotation
request
Rotation time/10
ROTATION
SLAT
Interlock
500 ms
New slat rotation
request
• Request for forcing during the movement of the roller shutter
Up time
ROLLER
SHUTTER UP
Request
UP
364
Interlock
500 ms
THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE ROLLER SHUTTER DEPENDS ON THE PARAMETER
"POSITION ON FORCING"
Request
for FORCING
(managed at the end of the interlock)
Appendix
• Request for scene saving during the movement of the roller shutter
Up time
ROLLER
SHUTTER UP
Request
UP
Scene saving
request
The scene is saved
with roller shutter fully open
• Request for forcing during the interlock period
Up time
UP
ROLLER
SHUTTER
Request
UP
Down time
Interlock
500 ms
Request
DOWN
DOWN
ROLLER
SHUTTER
Interlock
500 ms
THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE
ROLLER SHUTTER DEPENDS ON THE
PARAMETER
"POSITION ON FORCING"
Request
for FORCING
(managed at the end of the interlock)
• Setting an absolute value for slat rotation during the movement of the roller shutters
Up time
ROLLER
SHUTTER UP
Request
UP
Slat rotation request at
a certain value
(the message is ignored)
365
WARNING.
To read the FAQs for the By-me system, please see our website www.vimar.com under the
section Support --> FAQ.
366
367
Viale Vicenza, 14 - 36063 Marostica VI - Italy
Tel. +39 0424 488 600 - Fax (Italia) +39 0424 488 188
Fax (Export) +39 0424 488 709
www.vimar.com
21509 installer EN 12 1602
VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement